THE J. PAUL GETTY MUSEUM LIBRARY oh ffV &95 Vm h/» THE ART O F vjLAb !b # »W^-«'«p*-^ ' ■ ' «« ' THE Art of Glafs. SHEWING How to make all Sorts of G L A S S^ Cry fid and Enamel. Likewife the Ma- king of Pearls, Precious Stones, China and Looking-Glaffes. To which is added, The Method of Painting on Glafs and Enameling. Alfo how to Extract the Co- lours from Minerals, Metals, Herbs and Flowers. A Work containing many Secrets and Cu- riofities never before Difcovered. lllufiratedtvith Proper Sculptures. Written Originally in French, By Mr. KB LANCOVRT, And now firfl Tranflated into Englijh. With an A p p e n d i x, containing Exact. Inftru&i- ons for making Glas s-E y e s of all Colours. LONDON, Printed for Dan. Brown at the Black Swan without temple-Bar ; Tho.Bennet at the Half-Moon , D. Mid- winter and Tho. Leigh at the Rpfe and Crown, and !(. Wilkin at the Icings-Head in St. Paul's Church-yard, MDCXCIX. *5"& THE J. PAUL GcTlt MUSEUM LIBRARY TO My Lord Marquifs O F VILLACERF, Counfellour of State, Chief Steward of the Houjholdto the Late §^een ; Superinten- dant and Surveyor-General of His Majejlfs Buildings and Gardens, Arts and Manufa- ctures. SIR, THE Knowledge which I acquired by my Study and Experience in the Art of A 3 Glafs, G/^has Retriev'dfeveral Im- portant Secrets, which for a long time lay Buried in Obli- vion : Of thefe I at length re- fol ved to Compofe a Treatife ; and I here make bold to In- fcribe it to your Uluftrious Name, that they may be once more Reftored to this King- dom. If your Honour pleafes to look over the Wonders here- in delivered, you'll be fatisfied I have found out and added le- veral Curious Things of my own Invention, as well relating to the Secrets of Nature, as the mod profound Science of the Adepit , or Ancient Philofo- phers. Hence The Epiftle Dedicatory. Hence it is, Sir, I am to hope You'll Receive this Fa- vourably ; that under the Ho- nour of your Prote6tion, it may meet with Acceptance A- broad : For if You grant Your Approbation, the World will not deny it Theirs. Permit therefore, lilujlriom Sir, that I may Impart the Secrets of this Noble Art to the Publick, un- der your Aufpicious Patronage: Which is the Mod Humble Requeftof him who Subfcribes himfelf with all Imaginable Refpedl, Tour Honour V, Most Humble, and mo si Obedient Servant, H. de Blancourt. A a 4 I rjoi .'' - - THE PREFACE- THE Art of Glafs, being one of the Most Noble and Curiopts of all other Arts, and the Wonderfulnefs of it, both in the Simplicity vf the Matter, whereof it is made, and in the Formation of it ; as alfo the Various Colours it is capable of receiving, appearing fo Curious and Entertaining, chiefly engaged my Thoughts in the Study of its Principles, and to pene- trate into the moft hidden Secrets of it. The Knowledge I had acquired in the Secrets of Ma- ture, both by Speculations, and repeated Experiments, Excited me to a more particular Enquiry of whatever might be extraordinary in it, that I might Impart it to the Publich Most People are of Opinion, That the Ancient Man- ncr of Tinging Glafs, (with thofe fine and rich Colours, whereof there are pill fomc Remains to be feen in Anci- ent Churches) is -atprefem quite loft. It is true indeed, it is lost PublidHy, fince thofe who publickly profefs the Art of Making Glafs, know nothing of it : But to thofe who fet them I elves throughly to fiudy the true Principles of whatever they undertake, jt is not difficult to Retrieve- lost The PREFACE. loB Arts, and Revive them in their Ancient Splendour and Perfection. J Jhall therefore here endeavour to Revive, and make Public^, this fuppofedly loft Secret, of giving all thofe Curious and Rich Colours to Glaft, which the Ancients did, by jhewing whatever has been performed, that is ex- traordinary and curious in this Science, which I have traced and recovered from the obfcure Tracts of Ancient Authors, and confirmed by my own Experiments ; and alfo augmented what was delivered by them, in Prepara- tions of fever al rare and precious Matters, that cannot but appear very extraordinary. This Ace has been very happy for the Refiauration of Arts and Sciences, of which that late Excellent Mini- fy er of State, Monfieur Colbert Superintendant, and Sur- veyor-General of the Buildings, Arts, and Manufactures of France, has been an AJfiduous Reviver and Encoura- ?er : They fe cm at prefent to be arrived at fo high a de* gree of Perfection, that there is not one but has furpajfed whatever was done by the Ancients , and thofe under his Infpeltion, particularly merit on that account a preference to iifiy others. TVat of Glafs, whereof we are at prefenp to treat, has not been the last that has fignaliz.ed it felf, having already ftewn Wonders in the extraordinary large- nefs of Coach-glafles. Wc have divided this Work into Twelve Books, which contain fo many different Heads, tW derived from the fame Principles. If we were to follow the ordinary Cufiom of most Authors, we jlwuld Epitomise in the Preface, the Contents of thofe Twelve Books: But that feertis to us a needle fs Task, fince the Reader in$y pleafe to per ufe an Index, which we have for that piirpafe annexed to the End of this Volume, which will be ptjficiem for the Reader'* Satisfaction therein. Our Ihe Jf K b b Alb, 0#r Defign being not to trouble the Reader with a long Preface, roe have refolved only to touch very lightly of the Matters contained in the Book, and only to hint of fdme things that are omitted. Glafs has fomething in it fo beautiful to the Sight, and its Tranfparency is fo agree able , that it is no wonder we find it by fever al, and even in the Holy Scripture it fclf, compared not only to Gold, the mo ft per feci of all Metals, but alfo to things far more high and Spiritual. They are Myfteries of deeper Confequences, than at firs~t fight we imagine, fince by them we are informed, that Vitrification gives a better Being, or Nobler Nature. This requires the attentive Thoughts of Philofbphers, not only in the Nature of Metals, where it is eafily feen -, but alfo in other things, where Senfe and Experience te- ftifie the Truth of it. We have afferted in our Book, that Glafs is a perfect Metal, fince it will bear the utmofl force of Fire as well as Gold : And that there is but one fort of Fire, more Puiffant than the Vulgar, that can confume it : But here we will take notice, that there are two Ways to make Glafs, and that it may be made more or lefs fixed. That the more fixed, which is the leaft beautiful and the leaft tranfparent, refifts every thing ; no Preparation of Mercury, nor any Species o/Aqua-fortis, can Diffolve it, nor the moftfub- tle Poilbns, or higheft Corroiives, arrive any further than to break it. The lefs fixed, on the contrary, which is the mofi clear and tranfparent, as that 0/ Venice, is lefs capable of Refiflance, being compofed of a more purified Salt : Thus it will Diffolve in the Earth, or in cold and moifi Places, if there be more Salt in it proportionably than Sand, by a Separation natural to thofe two forts of Matter: And ?oifons Extratted out of Minerals will Diffolve it, by reafon of their great cold. Wc i ne r Kii r a b n. We Jhant repeat here the Virtues Glafs is capMe of acquiring, (whereof we make mention in fever al placesj by the Grand Elixir of the Philofophers, (which makes it Malleable, and Converts Cryftal /^Precious Stones) asalfo by fever al other ways. Wc^ll only add, That there are fever al other lefs and particular Secrets, by which it may be made foft and fuftllike Wax, and afterwards re- duced to its former hardnefs in Water ; but thefe are Ut- ile Gtriojitios that ferve to no purpofe. Glafs may receive either within or without any fort oj Metajlick Colours, which males it very proper for Painting. Thofe which wc Jliall teach to Extratl from Metals, and jhew in this Book for the tinging of Glafs, give it a Istflre equal to Precious Stones, and fet it off with an unfpeakablc Beauty. As we have (riven you the ordinary Preparations of all forts of Metals, Cryftal, Glafs, Rochetta, Soda, Tartar, Manganefe, Salt, Sulphur, Vitriol, Aqua- fortis and Regis, Paftes, Enamels, Pearls, and other things contained in this Work : So we can fafcly fay, wc have given you more of them than are common, and fome which have never been publick ; which we have all alono tah'H particular care to do, to oblige the Curious in this Art, who will apprehend it better by reading the Book itfelf than we can tell them in the Preface. But more particularly to Jhew our Ingenuous andVnprejudiced Im- part idity in this A fair, and how little envy wc have to. the Students and Praclifers of this Art, we dtf cover to them fuel) extraordinary and precious Receipts in it, m would \>ave been biduflrioufly concealed by any ether Hand, becaufe they point out the Paths to Perfons Conver- fant and Illuminated in thefe Studies, even to their grc.'.- tejl Secrets^ and mofi hidden Recejfes. By The PREFACE. By what we treat of in this Book upon this Subject, cne may perceive that there is nothing in Nature which Man cannot imitate: And if we believe what Claud ian tells us, of that great Sphere of Glafs, made by Archi- medes, we frail have reafontobe as much furpriz,ed, as ClaudianV Poem makes the Gods to be. If the Reader would know the reafon why that Sphere was made o/Glals, he may fee it in Cardan 5 ^ Book, de Subtilitate, where he may fee with it, a Quotation of the l r erfcs we here mention. Befides what relates to the Art of making Glafs, we alfo treat of the Ways of Tainting on Enamel and Glafs :, and we alfo foew the Way of Extracting Tin&ures of feveral Colours of Herbs, Flowers, Roots, Grain, Wood, Stones, and other things, for this fort as it had been alfo before of the very Mat- ter whereof this Metal is compos'd, as we fliall here- after (hew. The ufe of Glafs is fo Antient, that it is difficult to aflign the time of its firft Invention : Pliny pre- tends, that it was in the City of SI don thai the firft VciTels of Glafs were made, as may be feen in the 26th Chap, of his $6th Book. Others affirm its Origin „ muft be as antient as Bricks, by reafon one can fcarce make the one with- out the other , this is the reafon that has made fome affiert that this Art was known at the time of the* Building of Babel, that being made of Brick, and that way of Building continu'd in Egypt , fince we read, it was the folc employ of the Children of Jfracl'm their Captivity to make them. This might be ftrengthen'd by a convincing Proof out of the Bible, whereof Mofes was the firft Author, where you read of Glafs, which would not have been mention'dif it had not been in ufe in thofe Days. ThePailages we find of St. John in the Apocalypfe y feem to put a very high cftecm on Glafs ; for in fpeaking of the Throne of God, Chap. 4. ver, 6. he fa/S, Andbefore the Throne there was a Sea of Glafs like into Cryfial. And fpeaking of the Heavenly City, whereof he gives the Dcfcription Chap. 20. Ver, 18. he lays, And the building of the Wall of it, was of Ja- B 4 /per, 8 Of the Art of Glafs. fper, and the City was of fur c Gold, like unto dear Glafs. and at the 2 1 . verft^ And rhr twelve Gates were twelve Pearls, every Gate was of one Pearl, and the fl-reet of the City was pure Gold , as it Were tranfparcnt Glafs. That is to fay, a Glafs of Gold, or more properly, Gold Vitrifi'd, which is that EleBrum of Ez.cchicl, where- of St. Jerome makes mention. I may flrengthen it yet further, by a paffage out of Job, Chap. 28. ver. 1 7. where (peaking of the Wifdom of God, he fays, The Gold and Cryftal cannot equal it. Which does not only mew us the Antiquity of Glafs, but alfo in what efteem it was had in thofe days, being always equalfdtoGold. This lad paffage is alfo Cited in a Tranflation of St. Jerome, and in feveral other Au- thors, among whom, Tome have chang'd the word of Gold and Glafs, to that of a. Stone more precious than Gold. Others to a Carbuncle, or fomc other precious Stone. But, (fay they,) all thefe names are under- ftood of only one and the fame Stone, which the An- tients believed gave Light by Night, and which is no where to be found. This laft Opinion is very Myfterious, and that one only Stone, according to St. Paul, in the Epiftle to the Romans, ought to be un- derftood of the Divine Union with our Nature, by the Myftery of the Incarnation of the Word. The great Hermes, the Father of the Philofophers, call'd that Stone, the Image of the Invisible God, which Mofes (alfo J lhut up in the Ark of the Cove- nant, and which was call'd the Glory of God, mining in the Night like a burning Fire, or like a bright and and mining Star which gave light by Day, as you may fee in Numbers. This it was, which thefe Au- thors meant and understood, but which no others can comprehend, unlefs it be the true Philofophers. We defign to treat more largely thereof in our next Work, Entituled, The Myfiical Characters of Antiqui- ty hjn'eiPd and laid open y wherein we will make it ap- pear Of the Art of Glafs. y pear, that of thofe Characters were Compos'd the Two Tables of the Law, which were afterwards put into the Ark , and which are the two Pretious Stones which ferve at prefent for Guides to the wife among the Philofophers,as they did heretofore for Figures to the Antients. We might fetch the Origin of Glafs from Tubal- Cair?, the Son of Lamech ^ for he being the firfl: Chy- mifc that found out the way of melting Metals, and the ufes of Iron and Brafs, whereof he forg'd Arms for War, as is noted in the \th. Chap, of Gen. it is not improbable, but that he might be the firfl: In- ventor of Glafs, becaufe one can fcarce avoid redu- cing Calcin'd Metals into Glafs, efpecially when the Fire is more than ordinarily violent, and the Mat- ter remains longer in it than it ought. It was this which made Ferrandus Imperatus^ fay, that the Origin of Glafs came from Fire , or from its Rever- beration alone in thofe Furnaces where Fire was prefervM in its full force. We own Fire to be the firfl Agent both of Nature and Art ; but with this diftin&ion , that that of Nature vivifies or en- livens, and that of Art refolves and deftroys, efpe- cially when it is too vehement : But he who knows how to direct and manage it, may make good ufe of it for the Separation and Perfection of the Matters wherein he works ^ whence it very often happens that leveral Perfons feek that which they cannot find, and find that which they did not feek \ wherefore we may truly fay, that mod part of our Deft Inven- tions and Secrets, have been found out by meer chance, and as it were hazard of Art. The great Hermes was not ignorant of the Art of making Glafs, fince he taught the Knowledge of it to the «s£gypnan Chymifls, but not that of the Tranf- mutation of Metals, tho 1 he pofTefs'd it, as Kircher tells in his Ord'pus-.. That fince that time, that Peo- ple io Of the ArtofGlafs. pie have always profcfs'd this Art, in which they were fo Expert, that Flavins Phpifcus fpcaking of Alexandria, tells us, it was very Rich, and Fruitful in Corn, and that no one is there idle, one part of the Poor making Glafs, and the other Paper. We have another Evidence of the Antiquity of Glafs, in the qth Book of Lucretius : But the molt part of Hiftorians attribute the Invention of it to the Alchymifts, who by endeavouring to counterfeit Pretious Stones, found out this Secret. It is to thefe great Men, indeed, we are oblig'd for almoft all our Modern Knowledge of the moft curious Se- crets of Nature, they having unveiFd her moft hid- den Myfteries. The ProfefTion of an Alchymift in thofe Days, was not Vilifi'd as it is now, it being efteem'd very Honourable, Kings themfelves exerci- fing it. We fhall difcourfe thereof in the Work we have promis'd, and whence the word Chymiftry is derived, where we will prove its Antiquity by fe- veral paflages out of the Holy Scripture. But we will here add, that the Chymifts of this prefent Age are very far remov'd, both in Knowledge and Pro- bity from thofe Antient ones, who never pra&is'd thofe bafe Sophiftications , and a thoufand other Tricks of that Nature, which the Modern do^ which is the reafon that this Art, fo Noble and Sub- lime in its Principles, is now a-days fo much Vilifi'd, that to have the name of a Chymift, (of that fort, ) is enough to render a Man deteftable among honell Men. A lfo moft part of thofe who fet up for that ProfefTion, are nothing but a fort of Quack Collectors of Recipe's, with which, under the falfe appearances of Fixation, of Augmentation of Gold and Silver, which they call Powders of Projection, &c. and which they pretend to do with common Mercury, the Im- perfect Metals, Minerals, Salts, Powders, and o- ther Ingredients, Heterogeneous to the principal Mat- Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 Matters, with thefe, I fay, they abufe Credulous Per- fons by their fair words often to their Ruine. It is not with common grofs Matters that Philofophers woi k, nor can they bring any thing to Perfection, be- fore they have converted their Matters into Fluid, Volatile, and Spiritual Subftances, fuch as they were before their Coagulations ; not by the means of Aqu& Fortes and Corrolives, which the Antients knew no- thing of:, but by means of the fame Liquors that'en- gender'dand nourihYd them, which is as it were their Parent, Homogeneous to them, and that Water of Life of the Philofophers, or rather the Key of Na- ture, without which, you'll always work in vain. That which feems to the Eyes of the Credulous to be Augmentation, will never undergo the true Proofs of Silver and Gold ; if it mould chance to undergo fome one tryal :, you may be fure the fecond will make all the hopes of the pretended profit vanifh in Smoak, and on the contrary, make you fenfible of confidera- blc lofs, both by the wafte of the Matters, and the Charges expended on the way of managing them. Thus thofe who have fo little Senfe as to engage in thefe Matters, may one Day find themfelves drawn in to their lofs. Hut let us return to the Origin of Glafs - the Au- thor of the Eilays of the Wbnders of Nature, tells us, That the Limon of Lac Cendevia , which is found at the Foot of Mount -Carmcl, was the firit Matter wherewith Glafs was made. That fome Mariners being about to make a Trcvet for a Kettle, went a- /ho^e in a place where they found this Lac, that they took; fome of the Sand, and mix'd it with Nitre, wherewith their Ship was laden, and that making a Fire under the Kettle, they law a Noble Stream as it were of running Crylral, or melted Jewels, whence they learn'd to make Glafs of thofe two Matters, line: which time, (fays he,) they have alfo mixed Load- H Of the Art of Glafs. Load-Stone, feeing that will attract Glafs as well a* 5 Iron , thence following they made ufe of certain fine Stones, and alfo of Sand, as the Indians alfo did of Cryftal :, but that in his time they made ufe of a Glaffy Subftance, extracted from an Herb, call'd So- da, wherewith they mixed Sand to fix it. Tiny tells us fomething like this, in his %th Book, Chap. 19. where he alfo afferts, that we were indebted to Chance for the firft Invention of Glafs, which was on the Banks of the River Bdas in Syria, where certain Mer- chants being drove a-fhore in a Storm , were obliged for fometime to ftay and make Fires and to drefs their Provisions;, that the place abounding with a certain Herb calfd Kali, which, by the great Fires they made, being redue'd into Afhesfuil of Salt, and joyn'd with Sand and Stones proper for making Glafs, which are Natural and plenty thereabouts, run down into a fcrt of melted Glafs : Which fhew'd them not only the manner of making Glafs :, but alfo Cryftal , and feveral other fine things, which had not been found out without the Invention of Glafs j the ufe where- of is fo neceflary to pafs away Life with Plcafure and Satisfaction, that Divine Providence has taken pecu- liar care that no place on Earth ihould want Materi- als to make it, all being ftock'd with them in fuch a- bur.dance, that they feem inexhauftible. Which once made a certain Artift pleafantly conclude , That the Art of Glafs would laft throughout all Ages ^ for the general Conflagration in reducing the Earth into Allies, by reafonof the vaff. quantities of Salts that arc mixed with it, would at laft vitrific the whole Maf; into a lafting Monument of the Art. It is true, the end of the World , according to the Holy Scri- ptures, is to arrive by Fire, not by that material Fire we ufe in our Chimneys ^ but by that which we call Elementary and Central, whereof God will only augment the heat, which will {0 dry up and parch the Of the Art of Glafs. 1 3 the Earth, and exhauft all its humidity, that it mall not only be Calcin'd, but chang'd into a better Nature , afterwards to be inhabited by a new World of a Spiritual, Incorruptible and Glorious Nature, no more to be fubjected to any change. What the two Authors we have juft cited tell us, concerning the Origin of Glafs, is far better clear'd, and more particularized by Jofephns, in the gtb Chap. of his id Book of the Wars of the Jew, wherein he acquaints us with feveral furprizing things concern- ing the Sand for making Glafs, whereof we have been fpeaking. Ke takes notice that the River Ile- itis arifes out of Momt-Carmel, and partes between Ttolcmais and Tyrus, that it is not above 2 Fur- longs from rtolemais that near this River is the Se- pulchre and Statue of Bel or Belus^ Father of Nirnis, firft King of the Affyrians, whom the Babylonians w or- ihip\l for a long time, and Sacrific'd to, by the or- der of Ninus, who was the firft Author of the Idola- try and Prielthood of the Chaldeans , according to EiifebiHs, lib. 1 . and Ifidore, lib. 8. That that Sta- tue of Belus, whom the Pagans call'd Jupiter, was al- molt 100 Cubits high, (which is very remarkable,) and that in that place there is a Valley almoft round, full of a clear Sand very fit for making Glafs: And if the Ships which come thither for their Lading, chance to empty the place, it is immediately filFd again, by the Winds driving it down from the Pre- cipices of the Mountains which environ the Valley round , infomuch, that having for many Ages paft, made ufe of this Sand, it ftill always remains in the fame abundance. He alfo tells us in the fame Book, Chap. 1 7. that this Sand has a ilrange Nature above any other, which is, that it will change any Metal into Glafs that is thrown in among it :, and that which is yet more ftrange, that all the pieces of Glafs made of this Sand, and caft again upon it, are 1 4 Of the Art of Glafs. are immediately converted into Sand again : That there is alfo found among tin's Sand a Pretious Stone about the bignefs of an Acorn, very fine and tran- iparent. Tacitus in the y/^Book of hisAnnals,makes alfo men- tion of this River Belus, telling us it enters into the Sea of Judca, at the Mouth whereof, the Sand that isgather'd up, by reafon of the great quantity ot Nitre contain d in it, iseafily chang'd into Glafs in the Furnaces. And altlio 1 the Shore is but fmall, that the Sand is notwithstanding inexhauftible. Strabo tells us the fame thing in his 1 2th Book,and/7/>/y in his 6/£?,and alfo Agricohi in hisTreatifcof Fojfils: And one may fay, that generally all Authors, who have fpokc of Glafs,have made mention of the place where this Sand is gotten, whereof Glafs is made without any other mixture, wherein the Effects of Nature are to be ad- mired, in affording us fo fine and pretious a Metal in fo bale and common Matter. Hi is ought to be an example to the Curious, and teach them, that thofe who feek for the prime Agent of Nature only in rare and pretious Matters, may be grolly miftaken, feeing it may often be found in the moil Simple and Common ^ and often even in thofe things we tread underfoot: So true it is, that Wife Nature, or ra- ther the infinite Goodnefs of God , has fo ordain'd the Bufinefs, that the Poor as well as the Rich, may partake of the molt pretious and valuable Treafures, and as cafily arrive to that Sovereign, Univerfal Me- dicine, to cure all Difeafes , otherwife God could not be faid to have difpens'd his Benefits to all Man- kind, and his Word, which is infallible, would not be true, when he fays , That he is no refueller of Perfons, but that every one who loves and fears him, (liall be a<. - ccftedbyhim. Which fhews us, that it is his Will to be known by all Men , and that all thofe who live in his Laws, may hope to be poflefs'd of this hid- den Of the Art of Glajs. 15 den Treafure, to employ the fruits of it to his Ho- nour and Glory, which are the true Sentiments all i T ,ood Chriftians ought to have •, otherwife they ought never to hope for that Divine Treafure, which God only manifefts to his Elecl:. Several Authors have written, and among the reft Pliny, Caffiw, and Jfidorus, That in the time of the Em- peror Tiberius, who reigned in the time of our Savi- our, a certain Perfon, but Anonymous, an Archi- tect by his Profeflion, having by an admirable Piece of Skill, fct upright again in the City of Rome, a great Portico that lean'd to one fide, and made'the Founda- tion firm and immoveable : Tiberius paid him, and ba- niftYd him the City, forbidding him to return. In the mean time this Perfon had found out the means to make Glafs malleable, and came again to Rome, and prefented one of thefe Glaffes to the Emperour, who, being angry with him for returning without his Leave, flung the Glafs againft the ground, which only bruifed : That this Workman taking it up a- gain, immediately mended it with a Hammer upon a little Anvil he had brought on purpofe, expecting for it the Empcrour's Pardon ; but it happen'd quite contrary ; for that Prince asking him , if there were any other that knew the Secret, he anfwering no, the Emperour immediately caufed his Head to be cut off on the fpot, for fear the Knowledge of this Secret, Ihould come to be propagated to Pofterity, and that Gold on that account mould come to be no more valuM than Dirt, and confequently all other Metals lofe their Efteem and Value. In fhort, Glafs would be more valuable than Gold, if it were malle- able, by reafon of its Tranfparency. Our Age, fruitful in great Men, has had no lefs Advantage in the Reign of the late King Lewis the Jus'!, than that of Tiberius ; fince we are aflur'd, That a certain Learned Man having found out the fame Se- cret 1 6 Of the Art of Glafs. cret, made a Prefent of a certain very fine Image td Cardinal Richelieu, the then great Patron of Learn- ing, which that great Minifter going to take into his hand, the better to contemplate its Compofure, the Gentleman who prefented it let it fall on purpofe, whereupon Richelieu feeirfd difpleafed •, but the Gen- tleman having taken it up again , mended every thing that had been hurt in the Fall , with that Art, that it appeared as if it had not been at all bruifed j which very much furpriz'd that Lear- ned Minifter, as being not ignorant of the Reafon , But the Politick Reafons which it is believ , d he cn- tertain'd from the Confideration of the Confequen- ces of that Secret, made him commit the Author of it to Prifon. Thus the Fortune he hop'd to make by that important Artifice, ended in perpetual Im- prifonment. PancirollHs, and the whole Cabal of Philofophers and Chymifts , attribute that Malleability to the White Flixir, which takes away the Frangibility of the Glafs, and gives it Extenfibility like other Me- tals : This is what we believe very poflible,by reafon of the infinite Virtues we are allured that Elixir muft needs contain \ with which alfo Cryftals may be con- verted into very fine Diamonds, giving them both Luftre, Weight, and Hardnefs •, and alfo many o- ther Miracles be performed, whereot we ihall lay no more at prefent, lince they may be feen in all the Books and Writings of the Adeyti. We will only add , That the White Elixir having the Power to change Cryftals into Diamonds, the Red can con- vert them into fine Rubies and Carbuncles, and other forts of Pretious Stones } and equally give to Glafs the Malleability, Hardnefs, and Extenlibiiity of Metal, as we are allured by the Learned Ray* mitnd Lully. J We Of the Art of Glafs. 1 7 We will conclude this Chapter, with a particu- lar Secret, which will no lefs furprize , than appear lingular to the Curious , no Philofopher having yet made any mention of it :, which may ferve to whet their Curiofity to find the Caufe of it. Every one knows that Glafs is a perfect Metal, becaufe Fire can no more confume it, than it can Gold (as we have heretofore noted, J and that it is impoflible to deitroy it, or change its Nature, as all thofe tefti- fie who have writ concerning it, and whereof, molt affirm it is the laft (Action of Fire or) Work of Art, iince every tiling may be vitrifi'd, or turn'd into Glafs, even Gold it felf, tho' it be the molt perfect Metal in Nature: Notwithilanding , we can here allure the Reader of the contrary, for we have fcen. fome of the Secret Writings of the Philofophers, which affirm, that by a Fire a little more puiffant than the common ones Glafs may be perfectly deftroy'd, which they have found by diverfe Experiments they have made of it with their Elixir, whereof they give you fome Cafes, wherein there has remain'd no Foot-ftep of the Metal. This will feem a Para- dox to many who have read their Books, wherein they have learifd ( as I have faid, ) that with the Elixir, Glafs and Crystals may be converted into Preicous Stones, and it may feem, as if what I ad- vance, ought either to contradict thofe Writings, or it felf to fall. ., but to leave no Scruples in the minds of the Reader in fo important a Cafe, I will tell him that they are all in the right - 7 but this Cafe depends' on the different ways the Elixir is to be made ufe of, which may either perfect or deitroy the fame Subject, according as it is appropriated after parti- cular manners, known only to the Philofophers, who know how to apply it with Judgment. It is the fame thing in the Cafe of curing Difeafes, which may be Eradicated by the Elixir, how dan- C gerous. 1 8 Of the Art of Glafs. gerous, how great, and incurable foever ; on provi ilon, that either he that adminifters it, or he tha takes it, knows well the prerequir'd Conditions fo: making ufe of it, in making the Dofe always pro portional to the force and circumftances of the Pa tient : For otherwife it will he fo far from being ; Sovereign Remedy, that it would totally confum< the Radical Moifhire by its great heat,and deflroy th< Body, inftead of curing theDifeafe. This the tru< Philolbphers very well know, who ufe it only witl prudence, knowing in what Circumftances, and witl what Caution it is to be Adminiftred, to become ; true Antidote againft all Difeafes, and fo prolong Man's Life ^ which, by this extraordinary and preter natural Remedy may be often fnatch'd out of th< Jaws of Death, to which ordinary Remedies had betray'd it, which have not vertue enough to re- cltablifh the intemperature of the Elements withir us, which this precious Elixir, or rather Univerfa! Medicine might do, whereof the Effe&s feem to be rather Miraculous than Natural, both for its fpeedy Operation, and (if I may fo fay, J a fort or fpecies oi Rcfurre&ion which it performs, by eftablifhing thofe Perfons in a perfect Health, who were jult before given over by their Phylicians, and in the extreme Agonies of a fpeedy Death. Wherein we ought to admire the infinite goodnefs of God, who be- ftows on the Induftry of the Wife and Studious fo Sublime and incomparable a Knowledge, to ma- nifefl his Power, and immenfe Love to Mankind. CHAPJ p l 9 Of the Art of Glafs. 1 9 CHAP. II. The manner of building Furnaces for making Glafs. BEfore we begin to fhew the way of making Glafs, it will be neceflary to fhew the Conftruction of the Furnaces for that Work. But becaufe it would be impoffible to explain the Terms without a great deal of Circumlocution, we have taken care to have the Figures of 'em cut in Copper,and inferted la their refpective proper places, that fo we may a- void a long Difcourfe, which when all was done, would not fhew 'em fo plain as thefe Figures make 'em. j4o-ricola mentions three forts of Furnaces, the firfthe calls Fornax Calcaria, ovCalcar, which is that where theFrittis made; this Furnace is made in fafhion of an Oven, ten Foot high, and feven broad ; this Furnace has two Vaults, the one A. is that wherein the Fire is made, having a hole on the top through which the Flame palles into the upper Vault mark'd B. where it is Reverberated from the Roof upon the Ingredients that make the Fritt, which are laid on the Area, or Floor of this Oven or Vault, wherein the Workman takes care to ftir them about till they are Vitrifi'd and fully prepa- red } this upper Vault ought to have a very great Mouth , that the Workman may ealily ftir about the Fritt, whereas the under Vault ought to have but a little one, as ferving only to put in the Wood to maintain a continual Fire, and take out the Afhes.. . In the time of Agrkola^ they made ufe only of Coals in the Glafs-houfes j but the ufe of Woo^ which is among the Moderns, is much better •• For C i beins; ao Of the Art of Glafs. being, firft of all throughly dry'd, it does not Smoak like Coal, which always makes the Glafs dull and obfeurc. The Lumps which lie by the Furnace mark'd C. are the Fritt, which they break when they are too big, to make them fit to go into the Pots for the great Furnace, there to be pnrifi'd and render'd fit to be employ'd as occafion (hall require. The fecond Furnace, or rather Oven, AgrkoU mentions, is that where the Workmen labour, or the working Furnace :, but the dcicription he gives us of it, isnotjuft} for he makes all thefe Ovens round, whereas they ought only to be round with- in, but oval without. Moreover, he adds two Mouths in form of Chimneys, wherein a Servant throws Coals day and night, which is no more now in ufe, fince we only life dry'd Wood, as I have obfeiVd \ which alfo makes the Iron Grates he mentions, for the Mouth and Alh-hole , of no more ufe amongfl us. This Oven, whofe Diameter ought to be always proportional to the hcighth, is divided into three parts, each of the three parts being Vaulted. That below mark'd A. is the place where the Servant flings in the Wood to keep a continual Fire, and without Smoak j and this lower Oven is call'd the Crown, and the Mouth, the Bocca^ but there is neither Grates nor Afh-hole, the Wood being caft in on the Coals, care being taken to take them out when there are too many, with a great Iron hollow Shovel. This Oven made like a Crown , to which AgrkoU allows but one hole in the middle of its heighth, about one Foot Diameter, has notwith- ftanding, feveral holes all round it tor vent of the Flame, which afcends into the fecond Oven thro' the middle, where are plac'd the Pots fiU'd with the Of the Art of Glafs. n i the Ingredients that make the Glafs mark'd E. upon which that Flame perpetually Reverberates. The fecond part of this Oven mark'd B. whereof the Vault is round, ferves for the Work-men. A- grkoU allots to each of thefe Ovens eight Arches, neverthelefs, we commonly make but fix \ between each Arch there is an opening or hole, made in fa- fhion of a Window Arch-wife, mark'd C. caird the great work hole, through which, the Pots are put in, and taken out, which contain the Metal •, thefe^ great holes areflopp'd each with a Cover, made of the fame Lute and Brick that the Oven is, to preferve the Work-mens Eyes from the too vehement heat, and likewife to keep that the ftronger in the Oven : In the middle ofeveryoneof thefeCovers, there is a hole fomewhat more than a Palm wide, which is call'd the little working hole, through which the Workmen, take with their hollow Irons the coloured, or finer Metal out of the Pots, where- with they make what fort of Veflels they pleafe. It ferves alfo to fcald their Veflels when they have occalion, and which reft upon Hooks made on pur- pofe on the fides of thofe holes, which are call'd according to their Terms, the little working holes. The Place where they put the Pots in the Oven, is call'd the floor or ground, there are always two ro each working hole in the little Glafs-houfes, the diftin&ion between which, and the great ones, we will give at the latter end of this Chap, and in the next. The one ? which is the lcaft, is full of fine Metal fit to work } and the other, which is the greater, is filPd with Metal that is to be Purifi'4 or made fine, as we will explain in its place :, the little Pot being empty, it is forthwith fill'd again with Matter from the greater, when it is renVd, with an Iron Ladle ^ the great Pot being empty, they put into it new Matter to melt and be renVd, C 2 which ii Of the Art of Glafs. which is. done alternatively that the Workmen may not ftand itill, and that they may always have where- with to be employed. The upper Vault of this Furnace, marked -D, which is above that where the Metal h melted, and the Workmen work, ferves to put the Veflels, that are new made, upon, there to cool by degrees, that place having onlv a moderate heat , otherwife the Veflels would break if they were too foon expo- fed to the cold Air. We might alfo divide that upper Vault into Two, the half of it being enough for cooling the Veflels , and on the other might be made Balnea Maria ^ of diverfe degrees of Heat, f^nd-Furnaces, or of Afhes, for Purifications, Di- gestions, Diftillations, and other Ufes, and may ferve for the Preparations of the Ingredients wherewith we make Tinctures for Glafs and Cryftal, whereof we fhall treat in the Sequel of this Book. The third Furnace which stgrUola mentions,which he makes of a Square form, and which ferves (fays he) for making green Glafs, is now no more in ufe, ilnce they are all round within, as we have fhewn. The fame Author gives diverfe forms of Furnaces in his Treatife Dc Re Metallic*- whither we refer the Curious. The Ovens of the great Glafs Houfes are round within and oval without, like thofe of the little Glafs Houfes whereof we have already made menti- on ; But there is this difference } that any Ingenious Work-Man can build thofe of the little Glafs-Houfes, but there is only one race of Mafons in all France^ who have the Secret of building the great ones, they came from Caule in the County of £//, and thofe only can fuccced in it, what, and how nice Obfervations foever others have made to imitate them, there was never any one yet could arrive to it, infomuch that all thofe who have any great Glafs- Houfes Of the Art of Glafs. 23 Houfesi throughout the whole Kingdom, are obliged to have recourfe to that Family to build their Fur- naces ; and that for want of a due proportion which muffc be obferved, becaufe they muft have three de- grees more of heat than the little Glafs-Houfes, and one inch di^rence in the Arch and Body of the O- ven is enough to r poil the whole procefs. Thefe Ovens are built like thofe we have before mentioned , except as to the proportions which augment the heat three degrees beyond the others : they have Six Arches } two, which ferve to heat the Matter before you put it in the Pots , and another to heat the Pots before you put them into the Oven, when there is occafion to change them. In this Oven each Working-hole has but one Pot in it, and in the further end of the Oven on the o- ther fide of the Work-Men, there is a great Pot wherein the matter (or ingredients) is prepared, out of which you take it with an Iron Ladle of Ten or Twelve Foot long, to fill the Pots' of the Gentlemen, who Work at the rate the Pots arc emptied \ after ihat the great Pot is filled again, with other matter to be refined and prepared as before. The Materials which ferve for building thefe Furnaces are Bricks for the outward Parts, and for the inner Parts a fort of Fullers-Earth which is gotten from Believe near Forges , and which is the only Earth in France, which has the property of not melting in this Excefllve heat : and it is of this fame Earth that the Pots are alfo made, which will hold the melted Metal for a longtime. The worfl and roughcfl Work in this art, is the changing the Pots when they are worn out,or crack'd : for you mult take off the Cover of the great hole of the Oven, or great Working hole, and theil take out the Pot which is faulty, and put a New one in C 4 its 04 Of the Art of Glafs. its place through the Flames, and thatvery fpeedi- ly •, the one is done with only the Hands, and the o- ther with Iron Hooks and Forks. But before they enter on this rough Work, thofe who do it Cloath themfelves with a Garment made of skins in fhape of a Pantaloon, which they make as wet as pofTible, and which Covers them all over except the Eyes, and for them you make ufe of Gl fs to fee to guide your felf : and without this fort of C L< 'athing which Guards them from the force of the Fire, it would be almoft impoflfiblc to manage this Change of the Pots by reafon of the long time you would otherwife be ob- liged to employ to that end, and which would be yet more incommoded by the vaft and intenfe heat pro- ceeding from the great Mouth of the Furnace. Altho' all thefe Furnaces are Oval without as we have already laid, yet I have caufed fome to be made round in imitation of Agricola, thereby the better to diitinguifh the parts within, which is not fo eafily done in Oval ones. CHAP. III. Of the way of making Glafs, and the Privileges of Gen- tlemen who make it, and of the Inflruments necejfaryfor that Work. IN the making of Glafs we will diftinguifh between two ways in that Art, the one of great Glafs- Houfes, the other of lefs ; we will begin with the great, altho 7 the laft in ufe, which is only for making Glafs for Windows, and bottles for Wine or other Liquors, which are afterwards covered with Wicker for Tran fportation. The Working of thefe two Arts is very different, as may be (ecu in the Sequel of this Chapter : The Gentlemen of the great Glafs-Houfes Work only Twelve Of the Art of Glafs. 25 Twelve Hours, but that without retting, as in the little ones, and always Handing and naked.- This work pafTes thro' three hands,the firft thro' the hands of Gentlemen Apprentices, who gather the matter with their hollow Iron that is in the Pots in the tittle Working holes, when it is fit to be ufed or worked , and that till three heats, then he puts it on a Marble. Then a fecond Work-Man more advanc'd in the Art, takes the Iron and gives ityet three heats more, and fetting it on the Marble, makes it into a Lump. Then the Mafter Work-Man takes it and makes it per- fect by blowing it, and making it ready to be Work- ed : then there comes a Servant with a fharp Tool of Wood, which he thrufts into the end of the Lump or Mafs, and the Mafter Work-Man with an almoft inconceivable Addrefs and Art works it at the heat of the Mouth of the great Working-hole, then cafrs the Plate upon a place prepared on the ground with live Coals , to give time to a Servant of the Glafs-houfe to take it , and carry it to a Furnace which is at fome diftance from the body of the Oven i whence you take it out again when it is cold. And it is of thefe Plates they make Window-Glafs for the Glafiers. If the Work of the great Glafs-Houfes is more rough, than of this lefs, it is alfo lefs Laborious, its Matter being more eafily prepared : for without more ado they take their Matter, which is the broken GlafTes of the Glafiers, &c. and whe 1 it is well heated they put it in the great Pot in the O- ven, with Soda, and Fern Afhcs, and that of the Lixivium or Lye of the Whi titers in a moderate quantity, and when thofe ingredients are vitrined,and infufion, you muft skim them to purifie them, after- wards you diftribute this Metal into the Pots of the Work-Men with a great Iron Ladle, as we have faid, and after that fill the Pot again with the lame Matter, and reiterate the fame continually. la a 6 Of the Art ofGlafs. In the little Glafs-Houfes where they make Coach Glades, Drinking Glafles, Cryflals, Dimes, Cups, Bottles, and fuch like forts of Veflels, the Work- Men Labour but Six hours together and then Six more come and take their places, and after they have Labour'd the fame time they give their places again to the firft, and thus they Work Night and Day, the fame Work-Men fuccefiively, as long as the Furnace is in good Condition and the Pots don't break, or the Metal run over : for if any of thefe mifchances hap- pen, thofe that are at Work mult leave offtill repairs are made. The Metal in the Pots being ready to Work ought to flick or be clammy like Glutinous, Vifcous matter, then the Work-Man takes out as much as he has oc- cailonfor, with his hollow Iron (which flicks to it as he turns it about in the Pot) this he rouls to and fro on a Marble, the better and more firmly to unite the parts thereof, then he blows gently into his hollow iron, which raifes the Metal jufl as blowing does a bladdery but when he takes breath in the Intervals of blowing, as he muft do often, when the VcfTel is large, he mufl take care firfl to take the Iron out of his Mouth, for fear of drawing in the heat, and ap- ply it to his Cheek. After which he takes the Iron and Whirls it feveral times about his Head, which leng- thens and cools the Glafs, and if it be needful he flats the bottom (by prefTing it on the Marble) then he gives it to the Mafler Work-Man, who gently breaks the Collet, or that part of the Glafs which cleaves to the blowing Iron, and calls it by, among the Common Glafs, Then he takes up this Glafs by flicking it on another Iron rod, to heat or fcaldit at the mouth of the Working hole, then with his Pon- teglo he make sit into Glafs, and with his Taffago, makes the bowl of the Glafs, and then with his l'rocdlo he Widens it and makes it more hollow and Capacious, Then Of the Art ofGlafs. 27 Then making it plain and even with the Shears, he cuts offwhat's fuperfluous, and thus with Blowing, Preffing, Scalding, Amplifying, and Cutting he forms it into what fhape he pleafes, putting or fan- ning on Feet when need requires, and with the Spiel puts on Rigarines and Marblings. After that a Ser- vant takes them with an Iron Fork, and puts them into the Superior Oven marked D, to anneal them. If he does not take fpecial care, he will break the Glafs inftead of annealing them, this Ware being extreme brittle. Thus the Workman may make all forts of Ve£ fels and Figures of Glafs or Cryftal whatfoever : For it is tradable at pleafure while it is hot, you may mould it, polilh it, flower it, piece it piece by piece, and, in jfhort, make all forts of imbofs'd Works, as if it were Wax. You may alfb paint any Stories on it, either in Bajs or Relief, and tinge it with any fort of Colour even in the Furnace; infomuch, that you may imitate with it a,ny forts of Jewels or precious Stones } as we will mew in the following Part of this Book. The Holes of the Oven having each one Work- man, they have each of them a large wooden Elbow- Chair to fit in, fixt and immoveable, on which they hang their Instruments ^ for they always work fit- ting,inthe Summer almoft naked, and very few Cloaths on in Winter, only taking care to cover their Heads for fear of catching cold. It mufl be own'd, thofe great and continual Heats which thefe Gentlemen are expofed to, from their Furnaces, are prejudicial to their health, for coming in at their Mouths, it at- tacks their Lungs, and dries them up \ whence moll part of them are pale and fhort-liv'd, by reafon of the Difeafes of the Head and Brealt , which the Fire caufes : Which made LibcmHs fay, they were of a 8 Of the Art of Glafs. of weak and infirm Bodies, thirfty, and eafily drunk •, this Author allures us, this is their true Character. But I will fa/ this in their Favour, that this Chara- cter is not general, having known feveral of them my felf without this Fault. The Workmen who are employ'd in this Noble Art, are all Gentlemen, for they admit of none but fuch. They have obtain'd many and large Privi- leges, the principal whereof is, to work themfelves without derogating from their Nobility. The firil who obtain'd thefe Privileges, according to Hifto- rians, were the Workmen of the great Glafs-houfes, and altho'they were not in ufe till long after the lit- tle ones , ' yet they have out-ftrip'd them in this point of Honour. It has been a vulgar Error among mofl People , that this Art Ennobled thofe that work'd in it \ on the contrary , thofe who obtain'd thefe Privileges firft of all, were Gentlemen by Birth ; and their Privileges running, That they may exercife this Art without derogating from their Nobility, is a fufficient Proof of it •, which has been confirmed by all our Kings, and in all the Inquiries that have been made into Coun- terfeit Nobilities, never any one was Attainted who enjoy'd thefe Privileges, having always maintain'd their Honour down to their Pofterities. I could eafily give Examples enough of what I fay, if it would not be tooVoluminous,and befides the Subject : I will notwithstanding, give fome Examples, that the Reader may be convine'dof the truth of what I aflert. Anthony de Brojfard Efcfo Lord of St. Martin and St. Br ice, Gentleman to Charles d? Artols, Count of £//, a Prince of the Blood Royal, finding this Art fo confiderable, that underftandihg ; itf did riot dero- gate from Nobility, obtain'd a Grant from that Prince in the Year 1453. to cftablifli a Glafs-houfe in Of the Art of Glafs. 29' in his County, with Prohibition of any other, and feveral other Privileges he had annexed to it. The Family and Extraction of this Sieur de Brof- fard, was confiderable enough to bring him here as an Example. His great Uncle Anthony de Bro{Jard i was Knighted before Fumes, and Marry'd Judith de Pont bleu. This Anthony was Born Anno 1290. Na- tural Son of Charles of France, Count of V'alois^ by Helena Broffard a Miftrifs of his, whofe Name that Prince tranfmitted with him to his Polterity, and for a more fignal Note of his illuftrious Ex- traction, gave him for Arms three Flower de Luces d 1 Or, on a Field Azure, a Bend d y Argent round, which his Pofterity frill carry. Ever after, this An- thony de Broffard obtain'd this Grant in the Coun- ty £ En, the Elder Sons of that Family have ex- ercis'd that Art, till the latter end of the" lafl Age, when it ceas'd after the Death of Charles de Broffard Knight, Lord of St. Martin and St. Brice y who waskilPd at the Siege of Chartres, in the Year 1 591. commanding a Troop there in the Service of Henry the IV. He was Great Grandfather to Charles Amedee de Broffard Knight , Lord of St. Martin, Godfon of Madam Roialle, prefent Dowa- ger of Savoy, firft Married to Francis Chevalier, by whom he had four Sons ; a fecond time with Mar- garet Qefpin, Widow of Lawrence de Boeffel Elq*, Lord of Toccfueville, and of Charles d°. Broffard Efq; Lieu* tenant of Horfe in the Regiment of de la Kalliere. alfo twice Married, nrft to Elizabeth de Monfures Sully, and the fecond time to Mary Margaret le Roy- Cerify, both of an Antient and Noble Family ofP/- cardy, whereof we have made mention in our Ca- talogue of the Nobility of that Province. This Right of making Glafs being fo Honourable, fu\cc the Elder Sons of the Family of Broffard left 30 Of the Art of Glafs. left it off, the younger have taken it up, and con- tinue it to this day. Meflieurs de Cayueray, alfo Gentlemen of An- tient Extraction, obtain'da Right of Glafs-making by an Alliance, which one of their Anceftors con- tracted by Marriage, in the Year 1468. with a Daughter of Anthony de Broffard , Lord of St. Mar- tin, who firft obtain'd the Grant. That Gentle- man giving half his Right for part of her Porti- on, he was afterwards confirm'd in the Chamber of Accounts. Meflieurs Vaillant, an Ancient Family of Gentle- men, obtain'd alfo a Grant of a Glafs-Houfe for Recompence of their Services \ and for Arms, a Poignardd? Or, on Az.ure ; which agrees with their Name and try'd Valour. Befidesthefe three Families who ftill continue to cxercife this Art, there are the Meffieurs de Virgille, who have a Grant for a little Glafs-Houfe ; Mef- lieurs de la Maine, de Sagricr, de Bongard, and feve- ral others have been Confirm'd in their Nobility during the late fearch in the Year 1667. We have, moreover, in France, fevcral great Fa- milies fprung from Gentlemen Glafs-makers, who have left off the Trade: among which fome have been honour'd with Purple , and the higheft Dig- nities and Offices •, but it is not our defign to defcant further on this Subjed, that of our prefent Treatife being to fhew the Art of making Glafs j with all its Dependencies, which we will now pur- fue in the following Chapters it Of the Art of Glafs. 3 1 The Names of the principal Jnjlruments that are ufed in this Art. rlc hollow Pipe mark'd A. ferves to blow the Glafs \ it ought to be of Iron , with a little V/ooden handle on the top. The Rod mark'd B. ought to' be of Iron, but not hollow :, this ferves to take up the Glafs after it is blown, and cut off the former, fo that there remains nothing to do to it, but perfect it. The Sailors mark'd C. arethofe which. ferve to -cut the Glafs when it comes off from the firft hol- low Iron, when it is given to the Matter-work- man. The Shears mark'd D. ferve to cut and fhape the great Glaffes, as alfo the lefler, to open them and make them more capacious. The Inftruments mark'd E. ferve to finifh the Work, which the Italians call Pomeglo^ PaJfago 7 Procello, Spieiy and alfo Borfdlo, whereof we want the Figure. The great Ladle mark'd F. is of Iron, the end of the handle being only done over with Wood ; it is with this you take out the Metal of the great Pot when it is rcfin'd, and put it into the little ones for the Work-men. The little Ladle mark'd G. is alfo of Iron, and cover'd with Wood at the handle j this ferves for skiming the Metal, and taking off the Alkallck Salt which fvvims on the top, as alfo to take the Metal out of the Pots, and call it into Water to refine it after a method we fhall hereaff^ treat of in its place. The great and little Shovels, or Peels mark'd H. find which are hollow, having the edges turn'd up all 51 Of the Art of Gldfs. all round except at the End, ferve only to take up the great Glaffes. The lefs is called the Little Shovel , and they make ufe of one like this to draw | out the Coals and Afhes of the Furnace where the ! Fire is made. The hooked Fork marked I. ferves to flir the matter in the Pots j it ought to be all of Iron except ! the handle. - The Rake marked K. is alfb of Iron, and the han- dle of wood ^ it ferves to flir the matter - y ai alfo to move about the Fritt in the firfl oven. The Inftrument marked L. is for making Cham- ber-pots. The Fork i narked M. is made alfo of Iron, and the handle of wood :, there are of them of feveral big- neffes, they ferve to carry the Glafs-works into the upper Oven to cool them. They make ufe alfo of Forks in the Glafs-houfes , when they change the Pots in the Furnace. The great Ladle marked N. is of brafs and hollow, full of holes about the bignefs of a Pea ; its handle towards the bottom is of Iron, and the top of Wood. | This Ladle ferves to take offthe Alkalickfa\t from the Kettles, as faft as the Lee evaporates , as we will ihew in Chapter V. There are alfo feveral Moulds both of Marble and Brafs and alfo of Copper, which ferve to make their \ Forks of feveral Figures , accordingly as theWork-j man defigns them in blowing, which would be too tedious here to defcribe. If there be any thing remaining neceflary to fay of thefe Inftruments farther, or ot any others we /hall have occafion to treat of hereafter, we will annex them at the End of the Book whither we refer the Reader. CHAP, Of the Art of Glafs. 33 CHAP. IV. Of the Places whence Polverine, Rochctta, and Soda are gotten which ferze for making Glafs and Cryftal, and their differences, AFtcr having delivered the Manner of making Glafs, it will be necelfary to explain whence the Salt that ferves to make it is extracted, (ince that is the foundation of the Art, and without it Glafs can- not b: made,exccptit be with the Sand we have men- tioned in the Firft Chapter, which will do the buli- nefs without any other help, becaufe it contains in it a great quantity of Nitre. It is common to call all Afhes or Polverine that is ufed to make Glafs, by the name oiRochetta. Hereto- fore it ufed to be brought out of Syria from the Eaftern Parts of it, where it grew in great abun- dance ' 7 but at prefent it comes from Alexandria, from Tripoli^ and from Spain, where it equally abounds, but is fomewhat different in quality : which we will here acquaint the reader with, for the fake of thofe that are curious and inquilitive. The Pol- verine and the Rochetta come from Syria , they are the afhes of a certain herb which grows there in great plenty, called Kali ; the Salt which is extracted both from the one and the other is far whiter than that of Soda ; hence the Salt of it helps to make a very good Cryftal, but fomewhat verging to- wards Sky-Colour, the Beauteoufnefs whereof is owing to the Oriental Polverine (or that Oithe Levant) ; whereas that of Soda, which is more plentiful, makes the Cryftal more blue, and has not that mining Brightnefs, nor the fame Whitenefs and Beauty. D The, 34 Of the Art of Glafs. The difference between the Polverim and Rochetta, although made of the fame Herb, comes from the methods of Preparing them. All forts of afhes which come from theEait for making Glafs are called Polverine - becaufe the afhes are truly pulveriz'd, or in powder : And on the contrary, the other is called by the name of Rochetta, becaufe it is brought in hard lumps like Stone. TheGlafs-men know by Experi- ence that this lafl is better than the afhes: for thofe lumps when they are great and hard yield a whiter and fharper Salt than the powder, or pieces that are Lefs. We mould be apt to think that might proceed from the difference of the Plant, or from the diffe- rent places where it grew, or from fome fophifticatcd Mixtures of Heterogeneous Salts, proceeding from Salt Sea-Water, or other damps that might be mixt with it and noxious to it, if we were not afllired that it is the preparation only that makes this diffe- rence. It is certain, that to extract a very fbarp and poig-j nant Salt from Rochetta, there muff be a great deal of care taken in its preparation : Thofe who make it in the Levant , firftof all make a Lixivium of thei afhes they have made, with which they fprinkle the herbs they are to burn, after having dryM them a and thus continuing to fprinkle them each timd with new Lee, they make very fharp afhes, which Congeal into great lumps hard as flints, by rcafon of the abundance of Salt wherewith the herbs ard impregnated by the Lixiviums ; and it is hence that] there is more Salt Extracted out of the Rochetta. Poherine^on the contrary,has no fuch preparation the herbs are only burnt on Iron hurdles or bars} afj terwards, when cooled, they are gathered up and laid by^ whence they have lefs fait than the Rochetta but this Salt has no lefs virtue or goodnefs. Thcf two matters are now no more in ufe in France as here tofore Of the Art of Glafs. 5 5 tofore •, but they nfe them ftill at Mwran, where the Vance glafs is made. .Wa, which comes from Egypt and Spain, derives its name from the abundance of Salt it contains -, it is made; of the fame herb as the Polverine and Rochctta of the Levant, that is of the fame fort and nature with that :, and though this herb grows in great quantities in many places, and comes naturally among water, and commonly ftourifhes near lakes, yet it is planted on the banks of the Mediterranean in France, in Spa!??, and Egypt, where, byreafon of the heat of the Cli- mate, it grows in great quantities } but it has the molt Sharpnefs and is Itrongelt in Egypt, where there is never any rain. It is green all the Winter, but they commonly cut it in the middle of the Summer when it is in its full Vigour : After it has been dry'd in the heat of the Sun, they gather it in heaps, and burn it on Hurdles or Grates made of Iron, the afhes falling through into a Pit made underneath on pur- pofe, there they grow into a hard Mafs or Stone, and arc gathered and laid up for ufe, and arc called Soda, as Lobcl affirms , and their Salt Alkali. This Herb called by molt Kali ; has yet diverfe other names. The fame Lobe! calls it Soda ; Gcfner, Alkali ; Dodo?/, Salicor??ia ; Thaiuts, Antbilloides ; Merrct, Kelp ; Columna, A/itillis, and aKo Kali ; of whom this lair, fays he, found it at Naples, and gives a Defcription of it, and allures us of its fitnefs for making Glafs. In La?!gucdoc, where it is found on the Sea fhoars, they call it Flour of Cryital , and in France, Saljola ; which Matthiolus refutes in his Apology againit LhfipanHS, who law this Plant grow at Tergeftum in Mamit-ania, and that there grows great quantity of It near Salines de TricJJ'e , in the State of Venice % whereupon the fame Matthiolus , following t)iofcorU des, calls it the common Alga of Venice, and fays that Hie Venetians cover their Glaffes which they traflfc \ftv. 36 Of the Art of Glaj's. port beyond the Seas, with this Alga. Job?! Banhin, A3 9. Ch.2. of his Hiftory of Plants, fpeaks alfo of this Alga ; and Dr. Turner in his Herbal, gives us an Ac- count of the firft knowledge of this Plant, and what names were given it :, briefly, thofe which it has of Kali, Soda, Kelp, Salicornia, and Salfola and others, are for the moil part derived from fal Salt. The true name of this herb is Kali. There arc fcvcral forts of it, but mod of them are good for nothing, flying all away in Jmoak; as does the knotty and thorny forts of it, or Kah Spinofnm, which is found in feveral places about the River Thames, and in other Maritime places in England, which is the rea- fon that the Engllflt never make ufe of it for Glafs : for if it be put upon an Iron heated red hot it fmoaks all away, leaving little or no Afhes thereon \ and on the contrary, if that from the Levant, be put on the fame Iron, it will be foon converted the moft part of it, into black and fait Afhes, con- tracting it felf in burning like Worms, flaming a long time, and yields a very white and itrong Salt. The Kali therefore of the Levant is the belt of all, according to the Sentiments of moft Authors ; and that which is found in Egypt , which has long leaves and very hairy, has no lefs virtue. Lcbel thinks that we owe the Plant, name and way to make the Salt , to the later Grecians or Arabian Thilofophers,ChymiJts that wrought in Glafs. The name Kali that they have given to this Plant comes from its reduceablenefs into Salt: For Kal fignifies Salt, whence the name of Alkali Salt is derived, which is purely Arabkk, as the firft particle of its name Al Sufficiently denotes, which makes us of opinion that the Arabians were firft acquainted with it ; the Clymifts calling that Alkali or Alkali ck Salt that can endure the moft violent heat of the fire, without being diffipated. > Amongd Of the Art of Gldfs. 37 Amongfl the Arabians, who have written of the virtues of this Salt, we find that Serapio, and Avi- cen, very Learned Phyficians, have recommended it as ufeful againft the Stone, Vlcers, and Difeafes of the Eyes : So that it is not only ferviceable for ma- king Glafs, but alfo for Difeafes of Humane Bodies. CHAP. V. To Extract the Salt of Polverine, Rochetta, and Soda, for making Glafs. THofe who undertake to make Glafs, mull begin by providing good Rochetta or Soda, to Extrad the Alkali Salt of it, which is the Balis or Foundation of their Work. The bell, and that which contains the moll Salt, may be try'd by touch- ing it with the Tongue, and tailing what Salt it contains. But the moll fure way of all is, to make an EfTay of them ma melting Pot, a thing common in this Art, and which the Work-men very well know. To extrad the Salt of Rochetta or Soda, wilich is commonly in lumps, you mull firfl reduce it into a fine Powder : Heretofore, Stone Mortars were in ufe for that end, with Iron Peltels ; after which, they fifted it through a fine Sieve, and put the pieces that remain'd in lumps behind, into the Mortar to be pounded again, and fo till the whole was lift- ed off j but at prefent we make ufe of Mills, which do the bulinefs with more Expedition and lefs Charge ; belTdes this way it is immediately redu- cevfor ground to a fine Powder, which is no:with-s Handing, afterwards lifted, and the lumps that re- main put into the Mill again, until all be gro/md D 3 into 3 8 Of the Art of Olafs. *nto a Pnc Powder: for in this con fills the Art of Extracting more or left Salt. And as Salt cannot be Extracted without the help of Water, you muft fet up Coppers with their Furnaces like thofc of the Dyers, big- ger or left, according to the greater or lefs quan- tity of Salt you defign to make. Then you muft fillthcfe Coppers with fair Water, and make a Fire with dry Wood, that you may not be molefted by Smoak : and when the Water begins to boil, you muft put in ten Pound of Tartar Calcin'd to a white Colour, (for reafons we will fhevv hereafter in the Preparation of this Tartar ) to every hun- dred Pound of Soda, you put in, according to which proportion you are always to regulate your felf ; then you muft ftir it with a long wooden Ladle that it may diftblvc apace \ after that, you muft put in as much Powder of Rochetta or Soda, as it can contain, regulating your felf according to the greatnefs of your Coppers, and the quantity of Water in them ; you muft continue the Fire, and ftirring with the Wooden Ladle in the Copper till all the Poherine is Incorporated with the Water, and the Salt extracted all out of it. The Wa- ter being one third part boy I'd away, you muft fill the Coppers again with frefn Water, and continue to make them boyl till half be confum'd \ then the Lee will be made and the Salt extracted. Your Lee being thus made, flacken the Fire un- der the Copper, and fet in order as many Earthen Pans as you fhall have occalion for to contain it. Thofe Pans muft be very well glaz'd, or firft Hand filFd with common Water tor fix Days. Then you muft fill thofe Pans with the Lee and Ames together with great Brafs Ladles ^ then let them ftand fo fix Days, that the Ames may fettle to the bottom, and the Lee become clear. Then again pour Of the Art of Glafs. 39 pour off that Lee into other Earthen Pots, lea- ving the Afhes behind, and let it ftandfotwo Days longer, and the Lee will become very limpid and clear, for all the Earthy Fasces will precipitate, and fettle at the bottom. Yon muft continue to do thus three diverfc times, to have a moil clear and limpid Lcc, which will yield a very fine and perfect Salt. You might avoid thefe three times milting it, if you filtered it oft^ but that would be very troublefome, by rcafon of the great quantity of Water you would have to Filter. I The Coppers being empty, if there remain yet any Materials to extract the Salt from, you mufl fill them again with Water, putting in each ten pound of Tartar, as before, and after that a pro- portionable quantity of Polverine or Soda, and con- tinue to work as we have explain'd , till all the Salt be Extruded. After which, you mult wafh the Coppers well with fair Water, then fill them with the faid refin'd and clarified Lees in the Pans, which you mufl caufe gently to boil to evaporate the Water till it begins to thicken and moot its Salt •, which it commonly docs in about twenty four Hours time, fo that the Salt begins to appear on the furface of the Copper all white. Then you muft take a great Skimmer full of holes, and put it down to the bottom, and the Salt will fall up- on it, which Operation muft be repeated, letting the Lee all drop out of it again into the Copper before you remove the Skimmer from it. Then mufl you put this Salt into the fame Earthen P you made ufe of before, the better to drain the Lee that remains, which mull be fav\l and put into the Copper again, then dry the Salt ; continue work till all the Salt be gotten out of the per. D 4. ' 40 Of the Art of Glafs. I mnft here acquaint the Reader, That he mufi: make a gentle and eafie Fire as fbon as the Salt begins to (hoot, for fear the Salt fhould ftick to the Cop- per, the which a great Fire will caufeit to do, and fo burn it, which often happens to thofe that don't take fuch precaution. This reafon ought to oblige thofe who work in this Art to procure Veffels well lin 7 d within with Lead, fuch as they ufe to boil Alum in :, befides thefe Lees being fharp and cor- roding, deftroy and confumc the Brafs by degrees, or the moifture cankers it, and fo it fpoils the co- lour and beauty of the Salt. The Salt in the Earthen Pans or Pots being well draiiul, muff be put into little wooden Tubs or Fats, the better to dry out all the moifture, accord- ing to the Seafon wherein it is made } then beat it grofly, and put into a Furnace moderately heated, there gently to dry. It being thus throughly dry'd take it out of the Furnace, and pound it in a Stone Mortar, or grind it in a Mill, and afterwards lift it through a fine Sieve, the holes whereof are not bigger than grains of Wheat. This Salt being thus prepared, ought to be kept in a dry and con- venient place where there is no dull, to makeFritt of Cryital, as we fhall teach in the following Chapter. The goodnefs of the Salt depends very much on the Tartar that is mixed in it, which ferves not only to make the quantity greater by attracting more Salt from the Matter, but alfo to make it whiter too \ which alfo makes the Cryital finer, and move tranfparent \ and by its means we commonly get eighty or ninety pound of Salt from three Hundred pounds of good Pohcrine of Levant, without which it could not be done. Tartar is made by Wine j it flicking round a~ bout the Hogfheads and Pipes, in little hard lumps, and Of the Art of Glafs. 41 and never among the Lees of the Wine, which are always moift and at the bottom } that of red Wine is extraordinary for this ufe, containing much more Salt, and that more fharp than the Tar- tar of White-wine. It mult be Calcin'd for the fpace of fix Hours in the fecond fort of Furnaces we have mention'd, in a moderate heat, that all Heterogeneous parts may be confum'd, and that it may become whiter , and more eafily diflblvable in Water. Experience teftifies, that this way of Calcining Tartar is better than when lefs time is be- ftow'd on it. The fecret manner fome Ckymifts proceed herein, /hews us of how great importance it is for thcTartar to be throughly dry'd : They pow- der it grofly, afterwards gently Calcine it, or ra- ther dry it in the Furnace on Tin Shovels, which makes it cream far better than any other way. By this Preparation the Tartar more through- ly difiblves in the Water, and you Extract more eafily, and in greater quantity the Salt of the Vol- verine or Powder of Rochetta or Soda, for it opens the Body of it, and by penetrating into it, becomes united perfectly with it, which would not other- wife arrive fo well. After the fame manner the Body of Nitre, in making Aqua Fortis, or Spirit of Salt is open'd by the Alum and Vitriol. It is for this reafon alfo, that we have taught to diflblve the Tartar in the Water in the Furnace heforq you put in the Polverine or Soda. CHAP. 5p Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. VI. The way to make Fritt for Cryftal. T He name Fritt is generally known inallGlafs- Houfes, for the firft Preparation of Matter to make Glafs and Cryftal, and which is made in the firft Oven, calFd Calcar. To feek the Ety- mology of it, will not be neceflary to our prc- fent purpofc. It is apply'd to the drying the Mat- ters in this Furnace, where they are reduced into great and little lumps. We think it fufficient to fay, That to make fine and perfect Cryftal, there muft be had Mat- ter Fufil and capable of being render'd white and tranfparent in the Fire. We have already told you that Salt is the firft and principal Matter for this Work. Here we will add that the next, and which gives Glafs its confiftence, body, or hard- nefs, is Sand or fome forts of Stones; juft as Cop- per gives confiftence to Roman, DanttSck, and Hungarian Vitriol and others: which would other- wife run into Water in moift places. Whence it comes to pafs that the cleareft and moft tranfpa- rent Glafs, made of the fineft and moft pure Salt, will difiblvein Earth, or in moift and cool places, if there be more Salt proportionably than Sand or Tarfo, by a reparation natural to thofe two Mat- ters j it is for this rcafon that fome affert , that putting Poifon extracted out of Minerals, into Ve- nice Glafs, the great cold of it will diffolve the Glafs. All this depends on the Compofition of the Fritt, wherein the quantities of Salt and Tarfo ought: to be rightly proportion^ to one another to make the Glafs more or lefs fixed. Several Of the Art ofGlafs. 43 Several Authors have given the name of Tarfo to all the Matters which give confiftence to Glafs when they are Calcin'd. Agrkola in his nth Book, fays, That white Stones when melted, are the belt Ingredients in this Art ; for this reafon they ought rather to be employ'd than any others for making Cryftal. Pliny fays, that Authors affirm,that of thefe Stones \n India, Glafs is made fo excellently tranfpa- rent , that no other is comparable to it. The Venetians who make Glafs in the We oiMn- ran, as well as thofc in Italy, makeufeof a white Flint, which they have out of the River Ticinns, where there is a great abundance of them : As alfo in the River Amus both above and below Florence, and in other places. They ufe alfo a rich Sand full of Salt, which they find in Tuft any , and in the Vale of Amus ; as alfo a fort of hard white Mar- ble, which is found in Tufcany, known to every Bo- dy ; it grows at the foot of the little Mountains of Pi fa, of Sarvavez.z,a,Ma(fa and Carrara ', that ought to be chofen out which is very white,which has no black Veins, nor yellow or red flains in it. Of all of thefe Materials may be made very white Tarfo, and alfo very fine Glafs and Cryftal. Ferrandus Imperatns, 1. 24. C 16. makes mention of Quocoli, and thus fpeaks of it : The Glafs Stone is like in appearance to white Marble, being fbme- what tranfparent ; but hard as a Flint, whence be- ing ftruck, it will fparkle, and put into the Fire turns not to Lime ; that it is of a Light green, like the Serpentine Stone, having Veins like Venice Talke ; that being call into the Fire, it ceafes to be tranfparent, and becomes white and more light, and at length is converted into Glafs. It is certain that all white and tranfparent Stones, fuch as will not become Lime are very fit for ma- king Glafs: That all Fire Stones, and thofe which ftrike 44. Of the Art of Glafs. ftrike Fire when they are Calcin'd, and reduc'd to an impalpable Powder, and fiftcd through a very fine Sieve, make an incomparable, pure and fine Cryftal : And all the Art confifts in reducing the Tarfo to fuch fine impalpable Powder :, but the great trouble of doing it, has made the Glafs Men give it over. They make ufe now a-days much more of Sand than of Flints, becaufe there is little or no expence in its Preparation, which only confifts in warning it clean, and afterwards drying it, and fifting of it before you ufe it, and that is all } this is the firft Matter or Ingredient for making Glafs ^ but Flint? being found better, and more fine, they after- wards made ufe of them :, nothing bui he Parcimo- ny andCovctoufnefsof the times , ha? i)i ought the other in ufe again, becaufe Glafles made of that, may be afforded cheaper. Cryftal requires a fort and white Sand, commor Glafs one more rough, hard and grating like a File, Sands differ very much from one another : Foi fomc will melt quickly, and mixing with the Sab immediately be converted into Glafs :, others again will endure a ftrong Fire^ but in general, there i; no Sand but what may be made into Glafs. To make Fritt, you muft have two Hundrcc pounds of Tarfo prepar'd as we have fhewn, or o fine Sand •, and mix therewith about one Hun dred and Thirty pounds of Salt, alfo prepar'd af ter the manner we have fhewn in the preceden Chapter. Care mull be taken to mix thefe twe Materials well together, then to put them intc the Furnace to be Calcin'd, after it has been wcl heated, to make the Fritt. During the firft hour the Fire muft be moderate, and the Fritt continu ally ftirr'd about with an Iron Rake, that th< Materials may the better incorporate ; then th< Fin Of the Art of Glafs. 45 Fire mull be encreafcd to a very ftrong heat, the (pace of five hours, continuing always ftirring the Fritt with the Rake, which is very neceflary to the Preparation of it. After the fpace of five hours the Fritt (having had fufficient Fire,) will be made andreduc'd to lumps about the big- nefs of a Filberd, which (if it be enough, ) in break- ing will be light and white, without any yellow: for it you find any of that, you mull put it into the Furnace again till it lofs that yellow Colour which it will infallibly do. By how much the more the Materials are ftirr'd and Calcin'd in the Furnace, they will be fo much the morerefin'd, and melt more eafilyinthe Pots. After this, you take it out of the Furnace and let it cool, then you lay it on Boards in a dry place, otherwife, the moift ure would caufe the Salt to melt into Water, and only the Tarfo would remain behind, which of it felf could never be made into Glafs. After this you cover it well for fear of duft \ for you mu If take a great deal of care and caution to have a fine Cryftal. The Fritt thus made, ought to be as white as Snow :, but during the time it is making, you muft try whether the quantities are well proportion'd or not} which may be done by putting fome of the Fritt into a Crucible, and afterwards on a clean piece of Glafs, where it may be feen whether it be well made, by its joining together, and being dear : If it be too hard, 6v too foft, you muft encreafe or diminifh the quantity of Salt in it, which thofe experienced in the Art know very well how to do at firft light. This being well prepar'd, and kept in a dry place, will laft three or four Months, nay, it will grow better, and more . r it to unite together fpeedily, CHAP. 46 0/ the Art of Glafs. CHAP. VII. Another way to extrabl the Salt of Polverine or Ro- chetta, which makes Cryfial as fine and transparent as natural (or Rock) Cryfial. THis way of Extracting the Salt of Polverine is far more laborious and troublcfome than that we have taught in Chap.V . and yields lefs Salt \ bftt it makes a very noble Cryfial, nay finer than the natural, fo that it is fit for the fined, molt nice and exquifite ufes. To make it, take Polverine of the Levant, well ferced, and put it into Glafs Cucurbits, or Bodies luted at the bottom the heighth of four Inches, fill them with common Water that is very clear, put them on a Sand Furnace, or of Afhes, and let them have a moderate heat for fome hours, till half the Water be evaporated : After that you mull put out the Fire, and let them cool, then decant off the Water gently into glaz'd Earthen Pans. Then pour frefli Water on the Polverine remaining in the Bodies, and let it digeft as before, on a Sand Furnace in a moderate heat, and repeat this till the Water has extracted all the Salt: Which will ap- pear to the Eye when the Water is void of all Co- lour, and to the tail when it is no longer Saltifh. Then take thefe Lees, and filter them into other glaz'd Pots, and let them fland five or fix days, that what ever is Earthy hi them may fettle to the bottom \ then filter thefe Lees again y then they will be purifi'd and feparated fr-0& loft part of their Earthy Matter. After the Lees are thus purifi'd put \ in into Glafs Bodies luted at bottom e •; .11,' Of the Art ofGlafs. 47 and fet them in a Furnace of Sand, or Afhes, there to evaporate all the Water over a gentle heat - taking notice, that when the Matter begins to dry, you muft ftill make the Fire more gentle, for fear the Salt mould he burnt. 1 his Salt being; dry, you muft take it out of the Cucurbits or Bodies, and fee whether they are not cracked, which often happens, by rea- fon of the ftrength of the Salt : In that cafe you muft put the Salt into other Cucurbits , luted at bottom as the former, and fill them again with common water , and place them again as before in a furnace of Sand or Ames with a gentle fire, to diflblve the Salt, and that till an Eighth part of the Water be evaporated : then put out the Fire, and let it cool, then Empty this Water impregnated with the Salt, into giaz'd Earthen Pans :, and let it Hand 24 hours, alter wards filter it diligently, that it may be the bet- ter Purified, and fcpa rated from its feces, and the reft of the dregs, or terreftrial particles. Then you muft again put thefe filtred Lees into the fame Cucurbits if they are not cracked, and if they are, into others •, then put them on the Furnace to evaporate the water over a gentle Fire, which you muft ftill make more gentle when it is almoffc evaporated and the Salt begins to dry, leaft it mould burn. Then after it is dry pour upon it frefh water to diflblve it, then filter it again as above and reiterate thefe procefles till the Salt be perfectly purified, and there remain no faces nor Earthy matter left in it. With this Salt, and fome very white Tartar Serc'd to an impalpable powder, may be made lb fine and transparent a Cryftal, that it will furpafs the natural as we have faid. This will not be deny'd by the curious who know that all depends on the purity of the materials which are madeufe of, and that nothing can be brought to perfection without it. C H A P. 4-8 Of the Art of Gill's. CHAP. VIII. Some Obfervations for a Golden Colour in CryfiaL GOld being the pureft and moll perfeft Metal in nature, muft needs require Materials very pure to imitate it. This obliges us here to note, that to make a Cryftal of a fine Gold Colour, the Fritt mult be made with fine Salt of Polverine , prepared and purified after the way above delivered, which is the only means of obtaining it :- For if there fhould be mixt any of the Fritt made of the Salt Extracted after the common way by help of Tartars in Chap. 5. the colour would be very imperfect, wanting the true Splendor and Beauty. We will treat further of it in Lib. 3. where we will alfo fhew the way of Tinging Cry fid and Glafs of all other forts of Colours, for which the ordinary Fritt will ferve. CHAP. IX. The way to ExtraH Salt of Fern^ which will make a fair Cryfial. THe daily Experience of Salt of Fern in the Glafs-Houfes, allures us of its ufefullnefs in making Glafs. It grows ( in -France ) in great a- bundancc in the Woods and among the Mountains. It ought to be cut from the End of May to Mid-Junefm the Encreafe of the Moon \ For then it is bell, and yields more, better and whiter Salt than at any other time : For if it be let alone till it dry of it felf on the Ground, it will give but very little Salt, and that not good neither. It mult, therefore be cut in the full Of the Art of Glafs. 4.9 full Growth, juft as it is run to feed which is about the time we have mentioned ;, then let it dry and burn it. You will have from it very good afhes, from which obferving the Rules we have given be- fore for the Salt of Volvtr'me, may be extracted a fine and good Salt ^ which being afterward puri- fied, with it and Tarfo, or very fine Sand, a Fritt may be made which will yield a very fair Cryftai, much better than the Ordinary, and will be ftro'ng, and be*nd much more than one would conceive the na- ture of Cry ft d would permit:, So that it may be drawn into fine threads, as has been often Experi- mented. With this Fritt may be made a fine Gold Colour, if you mix no Salt of Tart.ir, as we have laid, and which will be as fine as that which is made with Salt of Polvcrinc. This is as good as the firlf. to make all forts of VefTels which will be as fine alfo, if the Salt be well purified. It is a Vulgar Error that Fern and other Capillary herbs have no feed, for they have it in great quan- tities, like duft, and of a dark brown Colour on the back lide of their leaves : Nay, Moffes alfo abound in feed: As is evident in an undefcribed fort of Chamapeuce y which is like a Laryx, in the branches of the Fern and betwixt each Leaf you 1 11 find an a- bundance of round and brownifn feeds, provided it be Cut at the time I have mentioned: For it is very neccflary to take notice of the times and fea- tons that all Plants and Trees ought to be cut in, that they may anfwer the Ends deligned. For Ex - trading of Oyls and Spirits of Vegetables in C m.ftry for Medicinal ufes, they muft be cut a little before their maturity, whether you ufc the Stalks or the Leaves: For then they will yield one half more than at another time, as Experience teltifi . E C H A P. 50 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. X. The way to make a Salt of fever a! Vegetahles^ -which will pi or! uce a Cryfial of a wonder] nil Fine WE have told you in the 4. Chap, that the Salt which ferves to make Glafs, is Extracted from Volverine of the Levant , from Rochctta and Soda: And in the 5. Chap, we have jfhcvvn the way to Extract it \ but in this we will further accquaint you that any Vegetable that abounds with Alkalick Salt, is proper to make Glafs and Cryfial , by prepa- ring its Arties according to Chap. 4. Several Plants are good for this purpofe but thofe that grow near the Sea fide are always the bell, becaufe they acquire a great deal of Salt by their nearnefs to the Sea. Alga is one of them which is generally found on molt Coafts, fomc call this Sea-Ivlofs, and which is if I may fo fay, a fort of Excrement or the Refufeof the Sea. This Herb when gathered, if it be kept frefh and moiit fomc time, will fhew afterwards its white Salt on the furface of its leaves. The Inhabitants of thofe parts nigh the Sea commonly gather it together on the fhore, and drying it by often turning it in the Sun, as Hay is made; After it is ciry tlicy burn it, and its A'lhes yield an Alkalick Salt fit for making Glafs and AHom. The Englifh make life of it for both, and call the Afncs Kelp. Pot-Afhes are alio proper on this account. They come from Poland, Riijfia, and New-England? and are Afhes, for the molt part of Firrs, and Pines, and their Apples. The Salt of all forts of Allies may ferve for common (or green ) Glafs, notwith- idingthat of the Allies of the common Thiftle Of the Art of Guffs. 51 is the bed, but all forts of Thirties arc good. Next to Thirties Hops are the beft, taking both item and branch, when the Flowers arc gathered. Among Trees the Mulberry is the belt, (C. M. fays the Brainblc-Bufh) as alfo Genifia Spinofa, and Haw- Thorn ; and Black-Thorn which bears Blackberries, and among the Sea Plants, Kali Spinofum. So that it feerns that thofe Plants which are Thorny and Prickly afford in their kind thebeftand moft Salt. All Rufhesalfo and Reeds which grow in Marfhes, and in Pools, and in Ditches of Water, and on Banks of Rivers, yield a great deal of Salt fit for thefe purpofes. Next to the forementioned are all bitter Herbs, as Hops, Wormwood, Carduus Benedictus, Cen- tauries, Gentian, Southernwood, Tanfeywood, which they ufe in dying Wool, the Heads of Poppy, and feveral other Plants whereof Arties may be made with fmall charge and in great abundance: to which may be added Tobacco, which grows plen- tifully in Virginia and feveral other American IjlMids, the ftalks whereof picked and burn'd yield a great quantity of Salt, and might turn to great profit, tho 1 fome damage would accrue to the Soil : For the ftalks being left there and putriiying on the ground turn to dung and enrich the Soil by then- Salt. All Leguminous Plants have the fame Virtues, and are as good for our ufe; The Afhcs of the C and Stalks of Beans yield an admirable S making Cryfial: Peas, Fetches, Millet, Lupin, and Lentills: as alfo Cabbage-heads, and feveral other forts of Plants. Add to thefe the Milky all forts of Tithymals or Spurges, C 1 the Fig-Tree, Vine-branches and Sow- whichhave Milk like the Tithymals. E 2 Or" 5 2 Of the Art of Glafs. Of all the fixed Salts which are extracted from Plants, obferve that thofeare bell which are frccfl from Earth, and all forts of Heterogeneous Bodies, and which are united in the harden: and whitelt lumps, and are molt fharp to the tafte. That the belt Afhes, and fulleftof pure Salt, run fooneft in the Furnace. That thofe are the bell Ames of Vegetables, which are made while they are green, and of the biggefl Branches. That thofe Salts mult be diligently kept ia a dry place, remote from any moifture that may be hurtful to them. That fome of thefc Afhes make whiter Glafs than others. That the Afhes of Oak which partake of a Vitriolick nature, make Glafs of a darker co- lour : And Am and Haw-thorn, their Salts being more Nitrous, make the whiter Metal. ylgriccfo. treating of the Salts which fcrve to make Glafs, gives the firft place to Nitre, the fecond to white and tranfparent Foflil-Salt, the third to the Salt made of the Afhes of Anthyllis, or fome other Saline Herb. Some have given the firft place to the Afhes of jlnthyllis, and not to Sak-Petre or Nitre, for want whereof, they have made their Glafs of two parts of Oak-Afhes, and for want of that, of Beech and Firr, one part of Sand, and a little Sea-Water Salt, and a little Mangamfe ; but that Glafs is neither white nor very tranfparent. Now thefe Afhes are to be made of old Trees, whole Trunk when grown to fix Foot high is bord hollow, and Fire being put into the Cavity, the Tree is burnt to Allies : This is done either in the Winter, when Snow has lain long on the Ground, or elfe in the Summer, when it has not to; fome time rain'd ; becuufo the Rain in other Seafons is apt to make the Allies foul, by mixing Earth with them. For this rcafon, it is better to cut the Trees down , and burn them withia Of the Art ofGlafs. 53 within doors \ thus far AgricoU. But time and ex- perience have worn out the ufe of Salt -Pen e and Foj- (il-Salts which have ghen the priority to Polverine y the other being all too foft and gentle, whereas Glafs requires Lixivial and fixed Salts, that have a cauftical and ftrong taile, and that have but little Un&uofity, wherewith Nitre and Foffd-Salt abound, and therefore run molt of them into Sandever^ Vinto which Nitre comes fbmewhat near in tafte and fatnefs. But AgricoU and other Authors, feem to miftake Pliny, who puts Nitre for thofe AlkaUzMe Salts: For he fays. Lib. 31. Chap. 10. never much Nitre was made of the Afhes of Oak. Virgil alio feems to ufe the word in the fame fenfe, Geo) oic. 1 . Semlna vidi, &C. as Mr. Ogilby has Tranllated it, / have feen many would anoint their Grain With Nitre firft, then Lees of Oil would fpredd. This kind of good Husbandry he exprefleth before, when he fays, Nor with rich Dung /bare hungry Grounds to fecd^ And urn lean Apes on poor Champains fpread. Thefe latter Verfcs prove clearly, that Salts en- rich the Soil, and it is moll certain, that Earth wherein there is no Salt, will be Barren. Where- fore the word Mr re in the former Verfes iriuftfig- nifie either Salt extracted from Afhes, or the Afhes themfelves wherein the Salt is con'tain'd. And to the fame purpofe are thofe other two Verfes in the fame Book. To bum dry Stubble on the Barren Fields, Jn crackling fames oft handfomc profits yields. Now 7 in burning the Stubble, nothing but Salt is pro- duct, the nature whereof is to deftroy Weeds, which having been a long time and ftrongly root- ed in the Earth, take away the Nourifliment from the Grain new fow'd, make the Ground Barren, and 1 confume 54 Of the Art of Glafs. confumc the Seed. Befidcs we may add, that Sail and Allies deftroy the Worms which might other- wife eat the Grain \ and that Salt flrew'd in Mould in Gardens kills Worms and Weeds. But the coldnefs of Nitre, as my Lord Bacon affirms, is an Enemy to all forts of Grain - 7 but he forgot, with- out doubt, that there is a way of preparing it, whereby it is fo far from being an enemy to Grain, that a Bufhel of it mixt with this Preparation, will more than four without it. Nitre may be &ed from Sea-water, and feme Vegetable!?, but in the Furnaces it would run almoft all of it into CHAP. XI. makt >ery fair Cryflal of Salt of Lime. r~I~ He Salt of Lime wherewith they make Wall-: in Building, is no more in ufe in making Glafs. It is much ftronger than the ordinary Salt, and be- in ! well purifi'd, you may put two pound of it to an hundred pound of Salt of Volverine, whereof a Fritt muft be made and purifi'd well, as we fhall fliew in the following Chapter j of this Fritt you may make common Glafs, and alfo Cryftal, and Cryftalline fair and beautiful. Ferantes Imferatus recommends the Salt of Tcfta- ceous Fifncs, fuch as Oyftcr-fhclls, &c. asverypro- for making Glafs. There may be made of thefe Shells a very good Lime proper for Cement, and which yield a very ftrong Salt ^ but though this Salt makes the Glafs white, yet it is not fo tranfparent as that made of Kali, and will moft of it run in the Pots into. 1 CHA? Of the Art of Glafs. 5 5 CHAP. XII. The way to make ordinary Fritt of PolVerine, Rochet* ta, and Barillia of Spain. YJ^Ritt is nothing but a Calcination of the Ma- jp terials mixt together, which make Glafs. Altho' thofe Materials would melt and be convert- ed into Glafs without this Calcination, yet life and Reafbn have dictated this way, iince otherwife it would take up a great deal both of time and labour. To avoid which, this way of Calcining the Materi- als in Furnaces to make Fritt was found out, which being rightly made, and the Dofes in the Compofi- tion of it juitly obferv'd, it may be immediately put into the Pot to be clarifi'd before you work it. Fritt made of Polverine makes ordinary white Glafs ; that which is made of Rochetta of the Levant, makes a very fairCryftal \ and that which is made of Ba- rillia of Spain makes a Glafs not fo white and fair, being commonly fomewhat unctuous, which makes the Glafs incline to an Azure or blueifh Colour. We will not repeat here the Preparation of the Ma- terials, nor the way of Calcining the Fritt, fince we have done it fufficiently in the precedent Chap- ters :, we will only fay, that to one hundred pounds of Barillia, you may put eighty five or ninety pounds of fine Tarfo'i you muft regulate that Dofe according to the Goodnefs and Fatnefs of the Barillia, which Experience will teach you. Then you muft take fix or eight pound of good Sand, and mix it with the Dofe after having wellwafh'd, dry'd , and lilted it, and of the whole you make a Fritt which 'vill yield a very white and fair Glafs. This Fritt being Calcin'd in (he Furnace, you muft take it out hot, and throw upon it three or R , four 56 Of the Art of Glafs. four Pails of cold Water, and then put it in a moiftand cold place, after which, you muft from time to time fprinkle it with a fmall Lee (which we fhall prefently fhew you how to make) for the fpace of two or three Months, which will make it as hard as Stone, fo that you cannot break it without a Hammer-, then it will melt eafily , and in fhort time in the Pots, and makes a very white Glafs al- moft like Cryftal, and caiicr to work. The Lees which communicate to it their Salt, caufe this Effect, and augment the Fritt} if your Lees mould fall Ihort, or you had none, you might water it with common Water, which, altho' it is not fo ftrong as the Lee, yet it is ufeful. To make this fmall Lee, you muftufe the Earthy parts or Faces that fettle in your Earthen Pots when you make flrong Lees,whereof we havefpoken Chap- ' ter V. you muit fill thofe fame Veflels with com- mon Water a little heated, and let itftand therein long enough to extract the Salt that remains :, af- terwards you take out that Water gently with an Iron Ladle without troubling the F&ccs, and filter it to clarifie it, and afterwards let it Hand fome time to fettle, and then keep it for the life above- faid. ThefcLccs will be ft ill pretty fharp and full of Salt, communicate it to the Fritt in watering it, and by this means none is loft. In our Modern Times wherein the Workmen ra- ther fcek to Abbreviate than Embellifh their Work, there are but very few who take the pains to water their Fritt after this manner we have fhewn ; and that only to fave the time they muft employ in do- ing it, for the Water cofts nothing. Notwithftand- ing, as that Fritt is the lineft, molt fruitful, and moft eafie to melt, we thought it worth our while to mention it in this Chapter, for the fake of thofe that are more curious in their Work-Houfes. CHAP, Of the Art of Glafs. 57 GAAP. XIII. The way to make very fine and perfcfl Cry flat. fT^His Cryftal will be white, very bright, clean X and bcautifull if the Workman take care in managing it. You muft take of the Cryftal- Fritt prepared as in Chap. 6. and put it in a Pot in the great Furnace, putting into it little by little, and at fome interval of time, as much Manganefe of Piedmont as is fufficient after it has been prepa- red, as we fhall fhew Chap. 18. The Fritt being, throughly melted, you muft take out the Pot, and put it in a great earthen VelTel full of Cold water, or in clean wooden VefTels. This way of putting the Fritt into water ferves to take from it the Sand- ever which is noxious to the Cryftal, and makes it obfenre and cloudy, and very difagreeable to the Sight. Then put it again into a clean Pot, and being mel- ted, call it again into Water } which muft be repeated, until the Cryftal be feparated from all this fort of Salt. In the laft place, let it Hand 5 or 6 days in the Pot in the Oven to boil, and ftir it as little as poflible with the Iron, for it is apt to difcolour it, and make it blackifh. Being well boil'd and clear, fee whether it hath Manganefe enough, which may be known by infpe&ing it, (viz..) if it be white ; but if it be ftill greenifh, you muft add more Manganefc to it, and then let it boil till it be clear, and of a mining Colour. The Property of Manganefe added to it in a due quantity is to perfect the Cryftal, and take from it a foul and dull Green, and give it a bright and mining Whitenefs. You 58 .Of the Art ofGlafs. You mnfl: take heed to add it little by little, and and by degrees^ as we have ol-erved, other wife it will rather fpoil than perfect the Cryfkd, blacking it and taking away its Luilre. All this depends on the Skill and Difcretion of the Workman, for there is no Certainty or Handing Rule for the quan- tity to be added. As foon as your Cry fid is fine and fhining, you may ufe it without delay for what VeiTels or other Works you defign to put it to:, but in the mean while you mult have lefs Fire than for common Glafs, and it mult be very clear, and without fmoak,for the Reafons we have given here- tofore. Moreover the Workman mult fake care that his Iron Rods be clean and well polifhed, and that the Necks or Collets of theGlalTes where the Irons touch them, be always kept out of the Pots of Cryftal, becaufe the Iron always difcolours the Cryftal, wherefore particular Care muft be therein taken. None of our modern Workmen, (or at leaft very few of them) take the pains of this way of fepara- ting the Sandwcr from their Materials, by calling them into Water \ they content themfelves to skim it off with an Iron Ladle when it fwims on the top, tho' if it does not all feparate, the Cryfial and GlalS will be lefs clear and fine. This Salt which the French call (Shin de Verre) Sandever is ufeful for Se- veral Purpofes, and in feveral Chymical Operations. It has belides fome other Ufes and Virtues, that are not known, even to very few of the Learned } I could tell fome very furpriling and wonderfull ufes of it. But this may ferve to whet the In- duftryof, and excite the Curious to further Enqui ries. C JU A F Of the Art of Glafs. 59 CHAP. XIV. To male Common Glafs become white and Cryflalline. {F you put in a Convenient Pot Fritt of Poherine^ whereof I have fhewn the Preparation in the precedent Chapters, you'll have a Common white Glafs. If you add Salt of Rochetta to this Fritt, you will have a very fair Cryfial Glafs, which is between ordinary Glafs and Cryfial. To make it very fine, you muft add the fame dofc of Manga- ncfe of Piedmont prepared as for Cryfial, in the precedent Chapter: For the Manganefc takes away all Greennefs from the Glafs and makes it very white. If you would have a very fine Glafs, you mu ft always caft the Cryflalline Matter into Water : you may alfo do the fame by common Glafs to bring it to Perfection. After that put the Mat- ter in the Pot again, and being melted, put it a- gain into Water : reapeating this till it be purified and made fine, as we have noted : and then employ it to the Ufes defign'd. To have a Glafs finer than ordinary, this call- ing of it into the Water mult be very exactly obferved 5 for belides its whitening, it is there calcinM and purified, and has fewer Blifters, and P allies. But to raifc the Matter to the Perfection 1 lk of, you muft mix together 100 Pound of ( '■yftalline Glafs, and as much common, and put to it 20 pound of Purified Salt of Tartar ^ that will a Glafs and Cryftal more than Ordinary fine, and fit for ufej provided you always take care not to mix with it the Collets of the Glafs which has touch'd the Iron Rod, for they always make the Glafs blackilh, and are only fit for green Glafs. We will add, 6o Of the Art of Glafs t add, that the addition of twenty pounds of Salt of Tartar to 200 pounds of Glafs ought to be when the Fritt is making , that they may the better incorporate together according to the way we have fhewn. Here follows the way of purifying Salt of Tartar. CHAP. XV. The way of Purifying Salt of Tartar. TAke Tartar of Red Wine, the biggeft Lumps, Calcine it in Earthen Pots in a ftrong Fire till it becomes black, and all the un&uofity be ex- haled, and till it begins to grow White ^ then put this Tartar into earthen VefTels glazed, which fill with common Water, and boil it over a gentle Fire^ fo that in the fpace of two hours the fourth part of the water may be evaporated : Then take them from the Fire^ and when the Water is cool and become clear, decant it off gently without troubling the Faces or Sediment, and you'll have a ftrong fharp Lee. Then fill the VefTels again, wherein the Faces remain, with common Water, and let them boil as before :, then let them cool a- gain, and decant them off as before, and repeat this till the Water become inlipid : This being done filter the Lees, and put them into Glafs Bodies to Eva- porate in the Allies at a gentle heat, and there will remain at the Bottom a very white Salt. Take this Salt and difolve it again in common Water, and let it Hand ftill two days, that the Faces may- fettle , than filter it and evaporate it at a gen- tle fire as before. Then you will have a Salt whiter than the former :, continue this Procefs of diilblving, filtring, and evaporating it three or four Of the Art of Glafs. 6 I four times and you'll have a Salt whiter than the Snow it felf, purified from all its Tereftriety - y which being mixed with Poherine, Rochetta, or Soda^ and the requifite Dofe of Tarfo or Sand, being made very fine and well ferced, will yield a very good Fritt, and that a Cryftalline and common Glafs, finer and better than that before. CHAP. XVI. General Remarks for all Colours. """T^Hc firft time a new Pot is put into the Fur- JL nacc, it always leaves fome Sully's or Foul- nefs on the Glafs, which fpoils the Colours : For this reafon they always begin to melt white Glafs in it firft, which afterwards they pour out again into another VefTel, to make common Glafs of it, this the Workmen very well know : But the fecond time there will appear nothing of this foulnefs. Particular care mull be taken, that when you prepare Materials for tinging Glafs, the moft where- of are extracted from Minerals, to do it in a fepa- rate Furnace : or not to have any Vefiels in it, that you ufe for Cryftalline Materials - for the fmoak of Metals and Minerals make Cryflal pale and un- even. The VefTels or Pots which ferve for one Colour muff, not be made ufe of for another , and every Colour ought to have its own Pot. Care muft alfo be taken not to Calcine the Ma- terials more than is necefiary, for then they burn, and become good for nothing. As a Proportion ought to be kept and minded in e/ery thing we do:, fo we wiil here lay fome down, which muft not be exceeded, whether for Fritt orColours.Notwirhllanding when theWorkman make> 6 1 Of the Art of Glafs. makes any EfTay, if his Colour be not deep enough to his mind, he may add as much as he fhall think neceftary. Which fometimes depends on the Prepa- ration of the Metals, more or lefs Calcin'd, and of- ten on the Fancy of the Workman. It isnccclTary alfo to be obfeiVd, that all the Dofe of the Colouring ought not to be thrown on the melted Glafs at once, but at fevcral times, and in proportion according to the quantity of it, ftirring each time the Materials that they may both mix and incorporate, and at the lame time to prevent them from riling and (running over. We fhall ac- quaint you with feveral other Particulars on this Subject, in the Chapters wherein we fhall treat of particular Colours, where they will be of more ad- vantage to the Reader than to amafs them altoge- ther in one Chapter. We have heretofore acquainted you, that the Fur- naces ought always to be very well heated with hard, dry Wood, and not with green or wet Wood, which caufes a Smoak that fpoils the Work, which requires a vivid 1! rang Fire, and mult be taken great care of. C II A P. XVII. The way to prepare Z after to tinge and colour Glafs. MErret {peaking of Zaffer^ and of the Latin word Zafftr*, fays it comes from Germany, It is taken by fome for a preparation of an Earth to tinge Glafs blue, by others for a Stone, and by him for a Secret ; aflerting that there are but few Au- thors who make mention of it, and no one that tells us what it is. We will here give you the fentiments ol fome Authors who fpeak of it, whence the Reader will fee, that Authors arc undetermined about it. Cardan Of the Art of Glafs. 63 Cardan in his 5 th Book de Subtilitate, calls it a Stone, his words arc thefe, There is another Stoat which colours Glafs bine, fame call it Zaffer. JmUhs Scalier, who has compofed a Treatife of Glafs, docs not at all reprehend Cardan for calling it a Stone t C&falpinus after Cardan, I.?, c. 55. reckons it alio among Stones, thus lie (peaks of it ; There is another Stone colouring Glafs blue, and if yon add too much it make! it black, they call it Zafler \ it inclines from an AJJj to a Purple Colour : It is heavy and brit- tle, and melts not of it felf, but with Glafs runs like Water. Ferant. Imperahis, I. 28. c. 8. fays that this Stone is very like the Loadilone and Manganefe; but the Learned Agricola without doubt knew it not, for he makes no mention of it. Anfelmus Boetim of Boot, Phyfician to the Em- peror Rodolphus II. who has given us a large Hi/lory of all forts of Stones and Jewels, has allotted no place to Zaffer among thole he mentions, altho' it be brought from Germany, according to the Sen- timent of Merret, who fays Zaffer is a Compound, alferting it is neither Earth nor Stone, not mix- ing at all with Water, nor breaking, as is ealie to remark, by fqucezing it between the Fingers. That certainly, if it were either of thefe two, it would have been difcovered by the Diligence of thofe that have treated of it, being of fo great ufe to thofe who make Glafs. Which makes that Au- thor fay, that Zaffer is a Secret, whereof the Com- pofition was found out by a German. That if he might give his Conjecture of it, he mould think it made of Copper and Sand, and fomc proportion of Lapis Cai '■ ; that the blue Colour it : fcems to be owing to the Brafs, as that of nefe to Iron. That only Minerals can tinge C and that no Materials can be found for that purp except 64 Of the Art of Glafs. except Metalline Ones. Wherefore he concludes, that the matter which eoinpofes Zajfer can only be cither Copper orBraR The only Preparation of Zajfer , according to Merret, is to grind it into a very final 1 Powder and ferce it through a fine fievc. But Neri gives us one which makes the Glafs much finer, which is this. TakeZ^r, in the biggeft pieces you can get, put it into Earthen Pans, and let it Hand one day in the Furnace, Then put it into an Iron Ladle to be heat- ed red-hot in the Furnace, take it thence and fprinkle it with ftrong Vinegar ^ being cooled, grind it fine on a Marble-irone, after which wafii it with warm Water in Earthen Pans, letting the Zajfer fettle to the bottom, and decanting offthe Water gently - 7 this will feparatethe foulnefs and impurity from the Zajfer^ which will remain at the bottom pure and clean, which you mult dry and grind again, and keep it in VefFels well clofed for ufe } this will tinge Glafs much better than at fir ft. Tometus in his general, Hiilory of Drugs, makes mention of a Mineral brought rrom Surat, of a bluifh Colour,or like a Patridge's Eye, which he calls Zaftr % Safre, or Sapher, to which he ailribcs the fame Vir- tue of tinging Glafs blue. CHAP. XVIII. To prepare Manganefe, called by fame Magnefe, to wk'- ten and tinpe Glafs. M Anganefe is called by that name by Reafon of its Refemblance in the Colour andWeight to the Loadftone : It will not only give a blue Colour, but alfo Green, according to Virgil, whereupon thus the Commentator, The Green, lays he, is watry, and Of the Art cf Glafs. 6 5 and is in all fort of Glafi, fi that / Unganefe may not improperly be laid to be the Soap of Glafs. More- over it will tinge Glafs Red, Black, and Purple: and, one may fay, it is the moil llniverfal Ingredient in all forts of Colours \ as this Work will fhew. This kind of Load-frone is at prefent called Man- q^anefe or A4agnefe, according to Cs and liber- ties : it is made ufc ot in Glafs becaufe it is thought it attracts the Liquour in Glafs into it felf as the Load- Hone does Iron ; and without doubt it is this fort of Load-ftone that Pliny and Agricola treat of, who aflert that it Attracts the Liquor of the Glafs into it felf, that it purifies it, and that of Green or Yellow it makes it White, and that afterwards the fire Con- fumes it. Lucretius would perfwadc us that the Name of Magnes was given to the Load-ftone from Magnefia, a certain Country in Lydia, near Macedonia, where it is found, fo it is no wonder that that Species of it we ufe in Glafs retains the Name of Magticfe and fo Man- ganefc , fmce the Country failed by that Name pro- duces it. The Ancient Philofophers, call alfo every thing Magnefia, that has a Magnetical Power of At- tracting the Occult Virtues of the Heavens and A- ftral Influences to it. They call alfo Adagnefia, Vir- gin Earth, and Sacred, faying that is the Mother of all things, the only Efpoufed of Heaven, whence all Fruitf ulnefs is derived. They alfo mention two forts of Magncfi^s, the one Simple, the other Com- ponud. They fpeak little of the fimple, as being a light, fpongy fort of Earth, to be found almoft every where ^ bat much of the other, which is a more Conco&ed and brittle matter, which Covetous Pinto takes care to Lock up among the Treafures of his Kingdom, Concealed in the Belly of Aries, under thefignof Caprkom, according to fome Aftrol. AL E chyrmfis 66 Of the Art of Glafs. chymifts, and which fome Philofophers have called An- umoniiim Saturninum^ by Reafon of their Refem- blance. Pliny mentions feveral forts of Load-ftones, and gives the differences of them, and tells us the Places where they are gotten •, but without going far- ther, that which we call Manganefe , and which ferves to tinge Glafs , comes in great abundance from Germany and Italy ^ but that of Piedmont is the belt known, infomuch that the Venetians hold it in fuch cltecm, that they make ufe of no other : For and that found among the Mountains of Vherba, and in the State of Genoa , contains much Iron, will give a black colour:, on the contrary that of Piedmont gives a very fine colour, takes away all green nefs and makes it very white, obferving the due Dofe. The Preparation of Manganefe is much like that of Zaffer, you mull put the pieces into an Iron Ladle, and put it into a Reverberatory Fire, and when it begins to whiten fprinkle it with good vi- negar, afterwards beat it and walh it while hot, as you do Zajjer •, after that dry it, and reduce it into powder, and Sift it, and keep it in a velfcl .cover'd tor ufe. The belt is cafie to break, and very mining, the great and lefs pieces of it full of Rocky Matter as can be. CHAP- Of the Art ofGlafs. 6j CHAP. XIX. To make FerrettO of Spain which ferves to Colour Glafs. THe Name Ferret to comes from the Italian and Spa- mjl) according toCafalpims, to whom we refer r the Reader, /. 3. c. 5. It is called Ferretto, becaufe it is found in Iron Mines, and commonly Ferretto of Spain, becaufe the molt part of that fold here in thefe parts, and which is the bell of any found in Mines, comes from thence. There is fome black like Iron, and which communicates its colour to the Matter wherein it is ufed, which is the reafbn it ought to be chofen ; for good Ferretto is known by its being Red, and being beaten, imitates the colour of Cinna- bar, which it always does when it is pretty well calcined. Pomctus m his Hiflory of Drugs /. 2. c. 1 8. fays that the Lapis Hematites, is what we commonly call Ferretto of Spain -, that this mineral is of a reddilh colour, hard, weighty, and pointed with long and fharp points ; that it is brought from Several places, forafmuch as there are no Iron Mines in which 'tis not found ; that the name Hematites is given it from the Greek Haima, which fignifics Blood, becaufe this ftone is good for flopping blood •, and it is cal- led Blood-Stone becaufe it is the Colour of Blood j and Ferretto, becaufe it is found in Iron Mines. Pliny makes mention of Five forts of Hematites or Blood-ftones. In /. 36. c 20. he gives a Defcription of them which he takes fxomSotacbitszn Ancient Author, and pretends that they have a Magnetick Virtue in Attracting feveral forts of Metals to them. Anfelmus Boctnis of Boodt 7 who has largely trea- ted of the Virtues of the Lapis Htrnatite v 9 no where F 2 calls 68 Of th^Art of Glafs. calls it by the Name of Ferretto, nor makes any men- tion of it. CHAP. XX. To male Ferretto of Spain for Tinging Glafs. ALtho' Ferretto be found in Mines, yet* it may be artificially made much better , as I (hall fhew in the following Chapter. Excellent Ferretto ufed to be made heretofore in Cyprus, and at Memphis, the Metropolis of Egypt , but it is no more ufed in France, whether by rcafon they make no more of it there, or that we bring it no more from thofe Places, I cannot tell. Neri and Merret, who have written of the Art of Clafs, ufe only Copper or Brafs to make Ferretto : We will give you their Preparations ^ but true Fer- retto cannot be made without Iron or Steel, altho' Iron and Copper are fomewhat of a like Nature ; fince 'tis eafie to convert the former into the latter : wherein there is far more Virtue for feveral Operati- ons than in the Natural Copper, and it is finer, more pure, and redder. An ordinary way of making Ferretto is this -, Take Filings of Iron very clean, and Sulphur beat to Pow- der, put them in a Crucible Layer over Layer, or firft one Layer of Sulphur, then one of Filings, and fo on , beginning and ending with the Sulphur ; which is called Stratification, or Stratum fuper Stra- tum. After that you mil ft cover the Crucible with another, or with a Tile, and lute it clofe, and fet it into a Furnace with Coals round it for fix hours, encreafing the Fire every two hours, that is, the two firft hours let the Fire or Coals be half a foot from the Crucible \ the two fecond about a quarter of Of the ArtofGla/s. 69 of a foot, and the two laft let it: be covered all over with Coals. Then, the Matter being cooPd, you mufl pound it fmall, and keep it for life. CHAP. XXI. Another Extraordinary U r .?y of making Ferretto of Spain, which is a great: Secret. rTpHis way of making Ferretto is not common, nor X much known , wherefore we will here teach it for Satisfaction of the Curious. It is of a very wonderful ufe, not only for Tinging Glafs, but for feveral Chymical Operations, wherein we know the ufe of it, which is very furprizing, if a fecond and further Preparation be made of it, whereof we mail here make no mention, it being foreign to our Subject j but take that which ferves for Tinging Glafs as follows. Take very fine Steel, for in the Perfection of that confilts all the Excellency of the Work , make it in- to thin Plates, or file it : alfo do the fame with Cop- per or Brafs, viz.. make that alfo into thin Plar :;s, or take the Filings of it, one part to two of the Steel ^ put them into a Crucible fir at um fitper firatitm, lute them , and put it on a gentle Fire for Eight Hours, then take it out, and melt the whole in a Wind-Furnace, then caft it in a Lingot, or in lit- tle Plates, and the bufiuefs is done. To make ufe of this in Glafs, you mull calcine thefe Plates, then pound them, and fearce them, and keep that Powder in a Pot ciofe fhut up for ufe. G H A 70 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. XXII. Another Way of making Ferretto of only Copper , for Tinging Glafs. NEri and Merrct give the Name of Ferretto of Spain to the following Preparations , in this and the next Chapter \, aflerting that it communi- cates feveral very fine Colours to Glafs. The diffe- rent ways of Calcining Metals, canfes different Ef- fects j which is known to the Expericnc'd in this Art, If the Ferretto we have taught in the precedent Chapters, be of van: ufe in Glafs , and very fer- ' le in Paftes, Enamels, and Glafs of Lead, by n iw ( " tbi Rcfemblance it caufes to Preci- ous Stones; ■ ind the following are of no lefs ufe. thin Plates of Copper or Brafs, cut them into pieo ut them into a Crucible, in the Botnm gi w hi have laid a Bed of Sulphur pul H riz?d,theB a . . er of Copper; then another of Sulphur, and then again of Coppe v : which you muff: thuscontmstftratHmfiiper ffraettm^ till the Crucible is full. Th q cover over the Crucible with another, or with al tie, and lute it well, and dry it, and put it in- to a Furnace among hot Coals in a good brisk Fire for the fpace of two hours. Then take out the Crucible, let it cool, and you will find the Copper or Brafs cakiifd , which will break and crumble between your fingers like dry earth, of a blackifli Colour. You mult pound it to a fine Powder, and fearce it and keep it in a Veflel well clofed for ufe. c h a p; Of the Art of Gllafs. 7 1 CHAP. XXII I. Another Way of making FctTCtto of only Copper for Tinging Clafs. r~lpHis fecond way of making Ferretto is ibmething JL more trou blcfomc than the former, but its Effects in Glafs are far finer. In this method you muff, take Vitriol inflead of Sulphur, wherewith you ftratifie the thin Plates of Copper in the Cruci- ble juft as in the precedent Chapter, then fet this Crucible to Calcine in the Mouth of a Glafs-Furnace, which the Italians call Occhio, and the French the little Working hole, where it ought to ftand for the fpace of three days. Then take out the Crucible and add to the Copper new Rows or Layers of Vitriol, llrati- fying it as before -, then you put the Crucible in a Reverberatory Fire in the fame pi ice as before^ which you mult continue to do for fix times iaccef- fively one after another, and then you will have a very Excellent Ferretto, which you beat to Powder, and it will tinge Glafs of Extraordinary Beautiful Colours. CHAP. XXIV. To make Crocus Feni, commonly called Crocus Martis, to colour Glafs. WE willfhcw feverat ways of preparing Crocus Martis, fome more Simple, others m >re Ex- traordinary and Curious, both with and without Liqours or Menftruums, whereof the effe&s are dif- ferent both in tinging Glafs, and other ufes, to which F 4 U 7 2 Of the Art of Glafs. it is put. Crocus Mortis, which is made without Menflruums, depends on a very fine Calcination of the Iron, by means of which the Tindhire that is Extracted, gives a very fine red to Glafs, and fo communicates it fclf to it, that it not only manifefts it fclf, but makes all other Metalline Colours (which Ordinarily are hidden and dead in Glafs) appear fair and refplendent. As to the way of Menfiruums, we may fay that all And and Corrofive juices which Operate on Copper, will alio do the fame on Iron, fo that you will al- ways have a red Colour, more or lefs bright, and which may be mixed with Tinctures of other Metals to canle other different Colours. We don't in this place underlhnd by ourtwo me- thods of dry and wet (or with and without Mcnftru- urns') for the preparation of Crocus Alartis, thofc two ways which the Philofophers fpeak of, in the fame Terms, their dry way or method being only a certain Vitrified matter, and their wet or Meiiftruous one, a fort of fweet * Liquor without any Corrofwe, wherein Metals will dillblvc like Ice in warm Wa- ter, and which afterwards cannot be redue'd again into Metals by any way whatfoevcr. The firft way of making Crocus Munis take as fol- lows ^ Take very fine filings of Iron , or thofe of Steel are better, mix them in a Crucible with three parts of Powderd Brimitonc, Stratum fuper Stratum (Commonly noted thus S S .V.) Calcine them four hours at a very Itrong Fire, till the Sulphur be Con- fumed : then take the Crucible out of the Fire, and let the matter Cool, then grind it to very fmall Pow- der, and fearce it through a very line Sieve, then put that Powder into a Crucible , and lute it well, and put it into the Mouth of a Revcrberatory Furnace for b .is Van . AlkibcS. the Of the Art of Glafs. 73' the fpacc of Fifteen Days or more } and of the Reddiih Colour it was before it will become a very deep red almoit. like Purple : keep it in a clofeVe£ fel for the ufe of Glafs Colours j it will work many wonderful Effects. CHAP. XXV. Another way of making Crocus Mart is for Colouring of Glafs. TH O' this fecond way of making Crocus Martis be very Eafy, yet it ought to be Efleemed ; fince it tinges Glafs of the true red Colour of Blood } it is prepared thus. Take filings of Iron, or, which is better, of Steel \ mix them well in Earthen Pans with ftrong Vinegar, only fprinkling them fo much that they may be throughly wet, fpread them in Pans and fet them in the Sun till they be dry, or if the Sun be hid by the Clouds fet them in the open Air^ then Powder them, and fprinkle them again with Vinegar, and dry them as before , then Pow- der them again, and repeat this Procefs Eight times j at laft grind and fearce them well, and you will have a very fine Powder of the Colour of beaten brick, which keep in clofe Veflels for ufe. This Crocus Mams thus made with Vinegar com- plies very much with Greens, and the Emerauld Co- lour of Glafs of Lead. It is ufed alfo in Partes for the fame Colour with Verdigreafe, and in Blacks. CHAP. 74- Of the ArtofGlafs. CHAP. XXVI. 'Another way of making Crocus Martis with Aqua Fortis. CRocm Martis may be prepared a third way, with Aqua Fortis, by which the red Colour of Iron is made yet more maniteffc inGlafs; wherein it is fo very refplendent and brigh that it feems almoft incredible, irexp< ience iid i w it. Put fine filings . or c hz'd Earthen Pans, fprinkle then .i 1 ortis, and fetthem todryinthe Sun, an . i • tduccthem * ■ '. ; 1 into Powder, a,~. rt fcfeis procefs feveral ti oes, as you have done with the Vinci:. :' bent, Chap, and having obtained a g . ed ( jIout as be- fore, Powder it and fearce it, and kee^> it ror ufe. CHAP. XXVII. Another way of making Crocus M Kl Regalis. THis is a fourth way of ra iki and perhaps the belt of all, occ them you cannot find fuch Diverfities of I as in this. Diffolve, filings of Iron or Steel, in a Glafs Body well Covered, in. Aqua Regalis, I ui- Hiade AquaRegalis withfal , hail mew in the fecond Book. Keep them fo three days, itir- ringthem every day well, during which you may add frefh filings little by little, \\ I ou mult be very Cautious : for it 1 ifcth fo much by Fermentati- on Of the Art of Glafs. 75 on ill the Aqu. Reg. that it will endanger breaking the Glafs or running over. After three days fet your Cucurbite on a gentle Fire, that all the Water may Evaporate till it leaves the Crocus behind dry, which is admirable for Tinging Glafs, which keep for ufe. CHAP. XXVUI. Another way to make Crocus Martis. THis way tho' it be eafy makes a Crocus of no lefs Virtue and Beauty than the , recedent. To make ittake fine filings of Iron or Ste< 1 without anyruft, let them ftand in a Rcvt. Furnace with a very ftrong Fire, the heat being at Leail to the fourth degree, till it becomes of the Colour of Pur- ple. Then take it out of the Fire, and v hen it is Cool, put it into a Veflel full of Water, and ftir it briskly about, and then prefently pour off the Vater into another Veflel, which you may reiterate. Thus there will remain in the firft Veflel the Iron that is not yet Calcined, which if you pleafe you may put a- gain into a Reverberatory Furnace ; In the fecond Veflel there will be the Crocus which fet over a gentle Fire to evaporate the Water. But you mufl not de- cant off the Water tho' it appears clear after it has fettl'd : for tho' the Crocus may feem to be precipi- tated to the bottom, yet the Water Contains the molt fubtile parts of it imperceptibly fufpended in it. Having well Evaporated the Water you will have a very red Powder, very fine and Extraordinary, which keep for ufe. CHAP. 76 Of the Art of Glafs. — PWM—PI l II !l II U M— M i !■■■ IP ■ ■■—■■■- ■ .■-■■■.■ .■ . I^ W p—— ■—»— — ^— » C II A P. XXIX. The loft may of making Crocus Martis. Tl lis laft way will be of fome ufe to thofe who lhall defire to have the Iron or Steel Granu- lated, or in little drops, the Metal whereof is dif- ficult to Melt. Take a bar of one or the other Metal, of the weight of live or fix pounds, which heat as hot as you can in a Smith's Forge, fo that it may Sparkle when it comes out of the Fire: At the fome time another Perfon mull have ready a long itick of Brimftonc and large which is the bell for this Operation, and the Metal coming out of the Fire in the condition we have fhewn, you mult thruft them one agaiull another over a great Ear- then Pan full of warm Water, into which the Metal will drop in little drops, or granuli, melting like Wax, when touch'd by the Sulphur •, then you mull take thofe little grains, and Stratifie them in a Crucible with Powder'd Brimftone', and afterwards fett them in a Reverberatory-Fire, where they will be redue'd to a red Powder, which grind and fearce and keep for your ufe. CHAP. XXX. The way to Calcific Utile Plates of Copper , to tinge Glafs oj a blue Colour. WE have fhewn the way to make Crocus Martis for Colouring Glafs, and now we will Ihew that of Copper, which is very near in nature to the other as we have remarked - 7 And which dif- folve s Of the Art of Glafs. 77 *olvcs in the fame Acids and CorrouVes. Venus as well as Mars (or Copper as well as Iron) gives us diffe- rent Colours, which proceed from different ways of preparing them, as we fhall fee in the following Chapters. Mcrret pretends that Brafs gives us a finer blue than Copper, by reafon of the Lapis Calaminaris which is mixt with it, and partly caufes the Colour. Of all Metals Copper is only ufed (as Allay) to give malleability to Gold and Silver in Coin: It melts eafily in an indifferent heat, but it is calcin'd into powder with difficulty. There are feveral ways of Calcining Copper, here follow five of them by help of fire. The firft is of Copper alone with- out any addition \ the fecond by the addition of Sulphur; the third by Vitriol^ the fourth of Brafs alone divers ways \ the fifth by a preparation of the Vitriol of Verms. Thefe preparations are the befr, and of more value than thofe prepared by Spirits and Cor- rolives. All thefe different ways of Calcinations and Preparations of Venus, fhall be explained in feveral Chapters of this Treatife, whither the curious Rea- der may have recourfe. The little Plates or Leaves, whereof we are now to fhew the preparation, are a fort of Copper or Brafs exceeding thin, approaching the Colour of Gold, called Fcltoons. Thefe Plates are made of this Colour by Lapis Calamwaris, which does not only Colour the Copper, but augments its weight:, this Brafs being well calcined tinges Glafs o^ a Blue, and Sea-Green. The way to calcine if is this. To avoid the cxpcncc of buying new, you aay make ufe of thofe leaves that have been already ufed and worked, they being good,;uid cut them with Suffers into little pieces, and put them into a Crucible 7 8 Of the Art of Glafi. Crucible covered and luted, in the mouth of a Furnace to Calcine, and let them fland there for four days, at a Coal fire, fo that the leaves may not melt : For then they would be unfit for this ufe. The four days being expired, the whole will be calcined, beat them on a Porphury Stone, and Searce them thro' a fine Sieve} and you will have a blackifh powder, which yon muft fpread on Tiles, and put it into the fame Furnace for four days longer j then take it out and blow offthe afhes that may be fallen on it } then reduce it again into Pow- der, fearceing it thro' a fine Sieve as before, and keep it for ufe. You may ..now when it is well Calcined, if the Glafs rifes and fwells when you put it upon it, if it does not you mult calcine other leaves, thofe being not Serviceable by realbn they are burnt in the Calcination. CHAP. XXXI. Another tray of Calcining thefe leaves of Copper to make a very transparent Red^ Tellow and Chalcedo-ny. rAke the fame leaves as in the precedent Chap. Cut them into fmall pieces and Stratifie them a ith Sulphur pulveriz'd, in a Crucible covered and li ed. Then fet them on burning coals at the IV uth of the Oven to Calcine for Twenty Four ht ars^ then take it out and grind it fmall j then pu it in an Earthen Veflel in a Reverberatory Fur- nacs, where leaving it 10 hours, take it out and, povrder it, then keep it for ufe. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 79 CHAP. XXXII. To calcine Copper to a Red Powder, which ferves in fever al Proccfes for colouring Glafs. ALtho' Copper be of the fame nature as Brafs^ which ferves to Colour Glafs blue, yet there is fome difference between them, for the latter will tinge it of feveral Colours, which proceeds from the Lapis Calaminaris, and fome other mixtures iu the preparation. To make this powder, Take what quantity you pleafe of Copper in thin plates, put it into a great Crucible into the Furnace, till it be calcined, with- out melting :, then being cooled, reduce it into powder which will be very red, and fearce it; whereof you may make divers ufes as we fhall mew hereafter. CHAP. XXXIII. To make Copper thrice calcif/d for colouring Glafs. TH E fame red Powder in the preceding Chap- ter ferves here. Take of that Powder and put it on Tiles, and calcine it again in the Furnace four days j it will become black , and coagulated into one Mafs : Powder it and fearce it, calcine it again 5 or 6 days in the fame Furnace , and it will become grey without coagulating any more, or running into Lumps, and will be in a conditi- on fit to be dilfolv'd. Of this Powder which the Italians call Rarnina di Trccotte^ is made Sky-colour'd blue, the colour of Turcois^ the green of Emerald^ and 8o Of the Art of Glafs. and feveral other colours. It mull not be calcine* above thrice, for it would no longer Colour Glaf You may know if it be calcined well, by caflinj fome of it in a Pot of boiling Glafs } if it fwell as we have faid before, if not, you mult fet it ye Twenty Four hours longer in the Furnace, or rathe begin a new Procefs. CHAP. XXXIV. Another way of making thrice calc'rad Copper with lej, charge and more cafe. WOrkmen who feck ways to fpare their pains, will find this way of Calcination lefs Ex- penfive than the others, and almofl of equal beauty : Take the Scales which the Brafiers make when they hammer Pans, Kettles, or other works of Brafs, as being much cheaper than new Copper. To calcine thefe Scales there is no need of Stratification as we have fhewn before in other Copper, which is troublefom :, they need only be well warned from all foulnefs:, and being well dry'd, put them into one or more Crucibles, and fet them juft into the Mouth of the Reverberatory-Furnace for the fpace of four days : Being at length cool'd, pound or grind them and fearce them. Then fet that powder a fecond time in the fame Furnace to reverberate during four days longer-, and you will have little Balls of a black Colour, which you mult pound and fearce again , and then put them the third time into the Reverberatory \ and after four other days re- duce them to powder as before \ thus it will be prepared with lefs Expcncc, and as good to colour Glafs, which will be caiy to fee by making tryal on melted Glafs : For it it makes it rife when you can: it on, it is right CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 81 C H A P. XXXV. Another Calcination of Copper call'd Ms uflum. THe belt and fincfl ' made ufe of, with their Names, that they the fame Letters here fet down again b H 3 be ioa Of the Art of Glafs. better underftcod. A. is the Afh-holc, into which ail the Afhes, on the Iron Grates which go crofs it, fall down, and which are taken out with a little Iron ihovcl, or a fort of Iron Peel. B. is the fpace or whole room of the Afh-hole. C. Is the Fire-Grate which ought to he of fquare Iron Bars lying with the Edges upwards that the Afhes may not lie thereon, which they would do if the flats were upwards. D. is the place where the Fire is made of Coal or Wood. E. is the Door of it. F. is feveral holes wherein are put Iron Bars which go crofs from one fide to the other, to keep up the veffels wherein the matters to be worked are contained, {topping up the other holes that are not ufed with Lute. G. is the Work hole, or little Laboratory of the Furnace. H. is a fcmicircular opening with the like hole in the Cover to put the neck of the Retort through, when you diftil in a Revcrberatory, or otherwife. /. is the inner part of the Work-hole of the Furnace. K. is two Regiiters. L. is the Cover of the Furnace for 8 Regiftcrs. M. is a round hole which ferves for a Regifter to Reverberate, and to pafs the neck of the Ma- traffes through which arc in Bdneo, whether in digeftion or otherwife. N. is the Regiilers which are to be opened or fhut to augment or diminifh the heat of the Fire of the Reverberatory. This Furnace, very ufefull in a little Laborato- ry, may ferve tor moll part of our works. Firffc of all for a wind Furnace for feveral operations if the veilel containing the matter be fo accommo- dated P.io 3 , Of the Art of Gfafi. 103 dated in the work-hole, that the fire may touch it immediately. It may be alfc) ferviceable for Fufion of feveral Metalline matters which we Em- I ' for Tinctures, to calcine them, vitrifie them, make Enamels, &c. If it be open at the bot- tom where the Afh-hole is, and placed upon an Iron Trevet 5 and befides that, covering the top with two Cafes the better to keep in the heat. 2. For a Reverberatory Furnace, if you cover the work-hofe with its cover, or door, and feut the Regifters, the veflel containing the Materials being expofed to the naked flame, 3. For a Balneum Mar'uc , if you put into the hole a Copper Veflel of the fame Diameter, in fhape of a Copper, the bottom whereof muff be ftrong and Hat, and fill it with hot water, wherein you may put the Veflel that contains your matter: Which if it be a Matrafs or Bolt-head, you may le^ the Neck out at the hole at the middle of the Cover, which covers the Balneum (or veflel full of water.) 4. For a Balneum faporofum, by putting in the fame hole, a veflel full of water that fhail rife in vapours : And in that veflel, another which mall contain the materials two Inches above the water, fhutting this veflel with a lit cover leaft: the vapours Exhale. 5. For a Balneum Aercum, or dry bath, by putting in the fame hole a veflel filled w T ith hot Air fliut clofe, and therein alfo another veflel with the Ma- terials. 6. For a Sand or Afh Furnace, and with filings of Iron, if. the veflel put in the hole, and which is expofed to the nuked Fire be filled with Sand, Ames, or Filings of Steel, and that you pu. ia the one or the other, the veflel that contains the n itt ter you are to work on. H 4 7- For 164 Of the Art of Glafs. 7. For a Lamp Furnace, if in place of the Bars below yon put a Porringer full of Afhes, to contain thcVeifel wherein your matter is^ provided you put alfo a Glafs Bell on that Veflel to cover it that mu ft ftand on the Brim or Ledges of the Por- ringer, well ill ted to it, to preferve the heat that arifes: and then put under that Porringer the Lamp on a little Trevet. In fhort, this Furnace may ferve for almoft all Chymical Operations whatfoever, which would be too long here to mention. CHAP. LIII. The way of purifying Vitriol to male Aqua-Fortis jlronger and more penetrative. TTTTE have promifed in the preceding Chapter, V \ to [hew the way of purifying Vitriol, which confifts hi taking away its Yellownefs , which alone hinders the good efle&s it is capable of producing. Take Roman Vitriol, the belt you can get } dif- folveitin common warm Water, then let it ftand three days :, then filter it, and fling away the yel- low faces - then evaporate in Glafs Bodies two thirds of the Water, and put the Remainder into Earthen glaz'd Pans, and fet it in a cool place for the Cry- ftalsof it to fhoot, which in 12 hours time they will do, about the Brims of the Pans in little tranf- parent pieces, like natural Cryftal of an Emerald- Colour } and at bottom there will remain a ful- phureous Sediment, which mn ft be carefully fepa- rated, and caft away. Then you mult take all thofe little green Cryftals, and diflblve them again in warm Water, as before, and then filter and evaporate them in the fame Glafs Bodies : Of the Art of Glafs. 105 Bodies : And fet them again to cryftallize, as be- fore, in a cool place, taking care to feparate all the yellow Faces you find. Reiterate this Procels of clifolving, and filtering, evaporating, and cry- ftallizing the third time \ then you will have a well purified and refined Vitriol. We will here add for the fake of the curious, that thofe who make ufc of Vitriol inftead of Roach-Ailum, to make Aqua-Fortis, the Preparation whereof we have fhewn in. the precedent Chap, ought to take a fpecial care in the Diftillation, that aflbon as the Red Fumes are paffed, all the Spirits of Nitre are raifed, and that then the Fire muft be extinguished - 7 for that which follows after, is only Spirit of Vitriol, which hinders the Opera- tion of the Spirit of Nitre in the Solution of Metals. You may alfo draw a parting Water in 12 hours time, (as fome Refiners do) during which time, but little Spirit of Vitriol can arife with their fires. CHAP. LIV. The way to make Aqua Regalis for the folntion of Cold and other Metals^ except Silver. A Qua Rcgalis, is nothing but a common Aqua- j/jl Fortis, wherein you diflblve 4 of its weight of Sal-Armoniav. But to have a good and ftrong Aqua-Regalis you mufl take one pound ol Aqua-Fortis prepared as in Chap. 5 ?. put it in a Glafs Matrafs, and add to it only 2 Ounces of Sal Armoniac, then put the Matrafs into a warm Bath or Pan, of warm Water, and ftir it often, that the Sal armo- niac may be well dilfolved in the Aqua-Fort is , which will 106 Of the ArtofGlafs. will be tinged of a yellow Colour. Then you muft add as much Sal-Armomac to it as the Aqua- fortis can diflblve, then let it fettle a little } and the Sal-Armomac will leave at the bottom all its Terreitreity. After that decant it gently off into another Vcficl, fo that you don't trouble the fettling at bottom, or rather filter it through whited-brown Paper. This Water will diflblve Gold and other .Metals, far better than the com- mon Aqua Regalis, except Silver, which it toucheth not at all , for reafons which Chy mills arc ac- quainted with. CHAP. LV. Another way of making Aqua-Regalis far ftronger than the former. OUr Defign being not only to fhew Operations and ProcefTes proper for Glafs , bur alfo for the fake of Gentlemen chymically inclin'd, whofe Curiofities are not contented with what's common, or with ordinary Preparations } thofe which we here give of Aqua-Regalis are among the number of thofe, whofe Virtues are far above the common Preparations, they more intimately pe- netrating and dillblving Gold and other Metals than others, rendring them more volatile, and conveniently more proper to be drawn ov r er in Diftilfatiofts. The firfl is that which fome Philofophers call the Water of the two Champions, which is made with two parts of purified Sulphur, two parts of purified Sd-Armoriac, and one part of calcined Flints, all re- duced to powder, and mixed well together. Then take an earthen Retort, which mult have a little hole on Of the Art ofGlafs. 107 on the back (or Curvature) on the upper fide, through which you may put in the Ingredients. For the more fafety fake, you may lute the Body of the Retort over well, and let it dry ; then put it in the Furnace we have defcrib'd chap. LII. and fit to it a great Glafs Recipient ( by reafon of the violence of the Spirits) wherein you may put a lit- tle common Water to attract them \ lute the Joints of them as you do for jiqna-Fortis , and let them be well dry'd before you kindle the fire, for Rea- fons we have elfewhere afligned. The Lute being dry, and all in right Order, you mult begin by a gentle fire, that the Retort may grow warm by degrees, and afterwards gradually encrcafe it till it grow red-hot. Then put in at the Hole of the Retort four Ounces at a time of the Ingredients you have prepared, and ftop it a- gain prcfently. Doing thus you will fee in a lit- tle time great quantities ot cloudy Vapours arife, and pafs into the Receiver, and fill it, which will diflblve little by li^le, mixing themfelves with the common Water, and the Receiver will grow clear. Afibon as you perceive this, you muft put four Ounces more of your Ingredients into the Retort, and give time for the Vapours ( ariling again ) to diflblve as before :, then reiterate this Procefs till all your Ingredients are diftill'd ofi\ Then unlute your Receiver, and pour the Liquor into an Alem- bick, and draw off the Phlegm in Balneo MarU, and re&ific it in an Afh-Firc : Then your Water will be made , and fit to diflblve any MctA but Silver. CHAP, io8 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. LVI. Another way of making Aq. Reg. more eafie^ and with lefs precaution, THIS fecond way of making Aq. Reg. will be more eaiie than the former, and the Water of as much force. Take i pound of good Salt-Petre, pow- der it, and mix it with 3 Pound of Potters Clay, or Flints calcined to Powder:, put the whole into a Glafs Retort well luted, and lit to it a great Recei- ver, lute the Joints well, then put it in a reverbera- tory Furnace, and diftil it according to Art in a gra- dual Fire. When all the red Spirits are palled over, as we have explained in fpeaking of Aq. fortis in the 52 Chapter. Then draw off the Phlegm in Balneo Marix (which the Chymiits and we hereafter will note by the two Letters B. M.J then rectifie it in an Afh Furnace, and keep it for ufe. Then take a Pound of Sal Armoniac, well pow- der'd, and mix it with four Pound of Wood-Aihes, (out of which you have before extracted all the Salt with warm Water) then put the whole into a Re- tort, fit a Receiver to it, and diftil it in a Sand-Fur- nace, and the Spirit of the Sal Armoniac will pafs over into the Receiver. Then unlute your Receiver, and take off that Phlegm of the Spirit in B. M. and rectiiie it in Afhes. This4Roiic, take equnl parts of each of thefe Spirits :, then mix them together and diftil them in an Afh - Furnace. Then you'll have a ftrong Mcnftruum for diUblving Gold. I can't here omit, that the Spirit of Sea-water Salt diftilfd as Salt-petre, has the fame effeSs as the Wa- ter of the 2 Champions whereof we have given the Prepa- Of the Art of Glafs. 109 Preparation in the preced. Chap, and as that we have jufl now treated of \ and in the mean while is not fo fharpnor corrofive. You mutt, to make it fuccef- fully, take 3 parts of Spirits of Sea-water Salt, and add to it one part of Salt-petrc, then diitil it together in an Afti-Furnace, the better to unite them. Then you'll have an Aqua Regain^ which will dillblve Gold fooner than the Spirit of Sal-Armoniac, and which will make it rife and pafs over in the Recei- ver • thus you may this ealie way make it more fit for the ufe you defign it for. But notwithstanding this, you muft not imagine that this Solution of Gold is a radical and total one, becaufc it will pafs over in an Alembic, and that fo it is redue'd into a Species of Aurnm potabile : For there is nothing but the one Sovereign Menftruum ofthePhilofophers, which has that virtue, as being homogeneous to it, and formed of it. That is the only Liquor in which it can putrifie and be totally re- folved, and regenerated again after the manner of the Phoenix, to become a Spiritual and Glorious Bo- dy, capable of performing all thofe wonderful Ef- fects afcrib'd to it. CHAP. LVI1. The way to Calcine Tartar. WE have already given one Preparation of Tar- tar in Chap. 1,5. both for the Calcination of it,and to extract the Salt \ and we have largely fhewn in Chap. 5. of what importance it is to dry it through- ly : For that reafon we will not repeat it here, but refer the Reader thither. To no Of the Art of Glafe. To make this Calcination,which is eafie, Take Tar- tar m great lumps, the thickefl: and moft fliining you can get, blow away all the Powder, then put it in new Earthen Pots upon live Coals, or in a little Fur- nace, where you mull leave it till it fmcaks no more, and all its humidity be exhaled, and it be reducYl in- to Lumps of a black purplifh colour - then it is cal- cin'd and well prepared. Tartar may alfo be calcin'd by wrapping it in pie- ces of brown Paper \ then lay a Bed of live Coals, and lay a bundle of it upon them, then another Layer or Bed of Coals, and on them another parcel of Tar- tar ^ continue thus to do S. S. S. till all your parcels of Tartar are laid on, obferving that the upper Layer be always of Coals j and leave the whole in that State till the Tartar be well calcined and leaves off fmoak- ing j then take it off and blow away the Afhes. CHAP. LVIII. A way to make a fair Chalcedony in Glafs. ALtho Chalcedony is not fo dear as it has been heretoforc,lince it is found in Europe , yet Peo- ple have not left off counterfeiting it by help of Art, to make feveral Works of it no lefs beautiful than the true, and much cheaper. We will mew three different ways to prepare this Chalcedony, which will make three different Species of it, all of them very fair, but whofe Beauty may be alfo augmented by the number of Ingredients we compofe them of, and which caufe thofe Diverfities of Colours, which that Stone ought to have. Among the reft of the Ingredients we employ in this Subjecl, there are fome that give no colour to Glafs, as Tartar, Soot, Sal-Armoniac and Mercury. Thofe Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 1 Thofe that are of an unctuous Nature, as Lead, Soot, Tartar, the Azure-itone often hinder the Union of the ingredients, by rcafon of the Separation which mav happen by the cooling the Metal } which does not happen to thofe who know how to obferve the degree of heat, wherein the principal knowledge of this Art conli. To make the firft fort of Chalcedony : Put two Pound of Aqua fortis (whereof we have given the Prepara- tion in Chap. 52.) into a Glafs Body with a long Neck, four Ounces of fine Silver in (mall and thin Plates, or granulated, put the Body in an Am Furnace over a foft Fire, or in warm Water, and the Silver will be prefently diflblv'd. At the fame time take ano- ther Body and diifolve in it 6 Ounces of Quick-filver in a Pound and half of the fame Aquafortis. After that pour both the Solutions together into a greater Body, which put in the fame Bath, or warm Water, or Afh-Furnacc : then add to it lix' Ounces of Sal- Armoiriac, which diffolve over a gentle Fire \ then put to it one Ounce. of Zaffer, and half an Ounce of Manganefe prepared, little by little, with as much Ferrctto of Spain alfo little by little, for fear the Matter coming to fwell too much mould break the Vcflel. Add to all thefe Ingredients one Ounce of Crocus Mortis calcined with Sulphur ? as much Scales of Copper thrice calcined, which ought to boil like Manganefe , as much blue Lake that the Painters ufe } and the fame quantity of Red Lead, the whole redue'd into Powder. In putting in thefe Powders you mult gently ftir the Glafs Body, that they may the better incorporate with the Aquafortis, never- thelefs take care there be not too much heat ^ then you muft well ftop the Matras (or Glafs Body) ftir- ring it well every Day for ten Days, that the Pow- ders may well incorporate, and that they may always appear as feparated from the Water. After that put Ill Of the Art of Glafs, put the great Glafs Body in a Sand-Furnace in a temperate heat,or rather empty it into a GlafsCucur- bit, after having luted it at the bottom, and put it over the fame Fire, fo that the Aqua finis may eva- porate in 24 Hours, and at bottom of the Veflel you will have a yellow Powder, which keep fafely in Glalles for ufe. When you are to make Chalcedony, take white Cryftal in Glafs, well purified, and that has been often melted ; for Cryftal new made is not fit for that Operation, becaufe the Colours will not ftick to it, but are confumed by the Frit. Put about twenty Pound of this fort of Cryftalline Glafs into a Pot •■, and being well t mclted, put in about three Ounces of your Yellow Powder at three different times, mix the Glafs well with it each time, that the Powder may incorporate with it, the Glafs being thus well mixed, let it Hand an Hour, then mix it once more and let it Hand during 24 Hours : Then mix it again for the laft time, and make an Eflay of it, it will give a yellowifh Azure colour. Having made your Elfay, and found your Matter right, you may take your Pot out of the Furnace, and when it is cold you'll have colours which fhall reprefent Wavings of the Sea, and other fine things/But tohave a very fair Chalcedony, you muft make a fecond Ope- ration to join to the firft, by taking eight Ounces of Tartar calcined, as we have fhewn Chap. 41 . Two Ounces of Soot of the Chimney well purified, half an Ounce of Crocus Martis calcined with Sulphur : Mix the whole well together, then put it into the melted Metal at five or fix different times ; otherwife the Impetuous Swelling of the Materials would break the Pot, and the whole would be loll -, which may be avoided by putting it in little by little, ftirring it each time well, that the Matters may incorporate : Make the Pot alfo boil, then let it ftand twenty four Hours. After which you may work it into what you pleafe, Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 3 pleafe, which put in the Furnace to whiten, and fee if the Glafs pleafe you - y if it be green without, and blue, white, red, yellow and of other Colours like Jafper and Oriental Agat. If looking on it obliquely it be red like Fire, and held to the Sun it fhew the Colours of the Rain-bow by refle&ion of the Rays ; if fo, then it is fit to make all forts of Veflels which may be polifhed at the Wheel. If it be pale and clear, you mult add to it more calcined Tartar and Soot as before, ftirring it well to make it incorpo- rate } then let the Glafs Hand and purifie feveral Hours, and afterwards work it as you pleafe. Chalcedony is much ufed for the Effgies of Kingsand Princes, for Heads, Cups, and many other VeiTels ; principally for making Seals, becaufe it may be gra- ved ealily, and the Wax will not flick to it. CHAP. LIX. Afecond Species o/Chalcedony. THE fecond fort of Chalcedony ought to be finer than the former : The Preparations are as fol- low. Put into a Glafs Body a Pound of Aqua fortis, and three Ounces of coppel'd Silver granulated, the bet- ter to diflblve. In another Glafs Body put alfo a Pound of Aqua fortis^ with five Outices of Mercury well puri- fied and palPed through the Glove, and clofe it well. Take like wife another Glafs Veflel, and put into it alfo a Pound of Atp* fortk^ with two Ounces of Sal -A mom ac to diilbl r e in it. I After ii4 Of the Art of Clafs. After it is diflblv'd add to it Crocw Munis prepa- red, as in Chap. 27. Feretto of Spain, of Chap. 22. Cop- per calcined as in Chap. 32. Leaves of Copper calciifd by means of Sulphur J as mChap. 31. of each half an Ounce, the whole reduced into Powder •, taking care to put them in one after another, and little by little, for fear the VefTel fhould break. Then put in another Earthen Body, one Pound of Aquafortis, with two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac^ nnd the whole being diflblv'd, add fuccefiively as before of good crude Antimony, of blue Enamel which the Painters ufe } of red Lead, and of Vitriol well purified of each one half Ounce , the whole well powderd, and put in little by little, as we have faid, for fear of breaking the VefTel, then clofe it well. Take alfo another Glafs Body, wherein put one Pound of Aquafortis^ and two Ounces of Sal-Armo- mac \ being diflblv'd, add to it two Ounces of pre- pared Zaffcr, as we have fhewn in Chap. 1 7. a quar- ! ter of an Ounce of Manganefe of Piedmont alfo pre- pared, as in Chap. 18. half an Ounce of thrice calci-j ncd Copper, as in Chap. 33. with an Ounce of CinnaX bar j the whole being well pounded, put it by little and little into the VefTel \ taking care (as we have: laid) that the Powders dont by too much fwelling. break the VefTel •- then clofe it well. You mult have a fixth VefTel of the Tame bignefs] With the reft, wherein likewiTe put a Pound of Jtp .1 -fortis^ and two Ounces of Sal-Arrnonlac :, as Toon ad it is diiiolved, caft in two Ounces of Cerufe little byj little, for that will caufe a great fermentation. Then] add the like weight of Painters red Lake, and ai much of Iron Scales from the Anvil, putting it irj little by little, as we have heretofore admoniflfd, and for the Tame Reafons \ and laftly : proceed very llowlyl Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 5 ilowly in all thefe Operations j then flop your Vef- fel well. All ) our fix Veflels being on a gentle fire of Allies, or in a warm Bath, to haiten the Solution of your Materials, you muftftir them at leait fix timesa Day, during the t.vclve in which you leave them in that heat, that the Aquafortis may the better penetrate the Powders, and they communicate their Tin&ures the better to the Glafs. The twelve Days being pair, take a great Glafs Crucible that will hold the whole, and lute it well for fear of breaking} let the lute dry, then pour in gently your Materials in the \\x Matras's one after the other, after ha- ving well ftirred eacli of them beforehand 9 then put your Cucurbite on a gentle Afn Fire, and fit to it a Head and Receiver, and lute well the Joints ^ then diftil gently all the Aqua fonts for the fpace of Twenty four Hours, that is in the Body, making a very gentle Fire towards the end, otherwife the Powders maybe fpoiled by too much heat, and the Spirits which ought to remain in the Powder would pafs into the Receiver. Then they will remain at the bottom of the Vefiel of a yel- lowifh red colour, which keep in a Glafs well flop- ped, for tinging Glafs, or Cryftal, which is yet better, as I have fhewn in the preceding Chap- ter. I 2 CHAP. 1 1 6 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. LX. The third and Lift way of Chalcedony. at THIS third way furpafles the other two in Rca ty:, it is fomething tedious, but the Learned know that what is molt perfect, requires moil time. To make this Preparation, you mull ufe the Aqua fortis of Chap. 52. putting one Pound in a Glafs Ma- trafs, with four Ounces of Leaf-Silver to diffolvc, and fTop the Matras. Take another Matras, wherein put a Pound of the fame Aqna fortis, with five Ounces of Mercury pu- rified with Salt and Vinegar after this manner. Take common Salt, fprinkle it with Vinegar in a Wooden-difh, where add to it a little common fair Water to make it diflblve, put in your Mercury, and ftir it well with a Wooden-Peftle to draw out the Blacknefs; repeat warning them often with frefh Salt and Vinegar, till there be no more Blacknefs , then dry them with warm Linen or Cotton, and pafs it thro 1 the Glove , then it will be purified, and <:* j.-. „,,♦.;., ,t^v,t^ /*„.,-, £>«•/>*/ \KJhe>n it- Jc AiflrAycd.^ flop the Matras and keep it. Take another Glafs Body, wherein put a Pound of Aqua fortis with three Ounces of fine Silver calci- ned. Amalgamate the Silver with the Mercury, as; the Goldfmiths ufually do, and put it into a Crucible,! with its weight of common Salt purified, as we have heretofore fhewn : Then out the Crucible on hot; Coals, that the Mercur>V Clav evaporate, and that only the Silver remain at bottom, which will be pu- rified and calcined. Then add to that calcined Sil- ver Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 7 ver, an equal weight of common Salt purified as be- fore, mix them well together, and put them over the Fire in a Crucible to calcine them afrefh :, then warn them well with warm Water to take out the Salt } the- put this Silver into a Glafs Vial filPd with common Water, which boil till one fourth part be confumed, then let it cool and fettle to the bottom, then decant offthe Water, and put more upon it : t Reiterate this Procefs with frefli Water three times, t $nd at the fourth dry the Silver, and put it into x your Aqua finis, and ftir it well, and flop the Ma- dras. <_ We have promifed to give the way of purifying tporamon Salt, which is this. Take what quantity a you will of Sea-Salt, diflblve it in a convenient (■quantity of common Water, boiling it for the fpace fof two Hours, then let the Water reft, that the {.earthy part of the Salt may fettle to the bottom : a Then filter the Water, and evaporate it in an Ear- then VeiTel, or rather in a Glafs Cucurbit, till the l£alt remain dry at the bottom. DiiTolve this Salt gagain, making the Water boil, then let it Hand for lithe Dregs to fettle, after which filter it and evapo- Q-ate it as before \ which you mult continue to do, ,ar } of Crocm Mortis calcined with Sulphur as I % above j ' Ii8 Of the Art of Glafs. above :, of Vltramarine, and of Fcrretto of Spai,\, prepared as in Chap. 22. of each half an Ounce, the whole well pounded into Powder; you mult do this little by little as we have heretofore hinted for fear of breaking the VefTel, by the fermentation which they make with the Aqua fortis •, then Hop the Ma- tras. Put into another Matras a Pound of Aqua fortis^ and diflblve in it two Ounces of Sal-Armoniac as be-i fore j add to it of Crocus Mart is calcined, as iiiv Chap 25, with calcined Tin, known among the Glafs-Men, of Zaffa defer ibed in Chap. 17. and of* Cinwfoat, of each half an Ounce, the whole well- •powder'd, and caft little by little into your Matras^, for the Reafons before affigned, which require that great precaution •, then flop the Matras. - Take another Glafs Body, wherein put one Pouncb- of Aquafortis, and difiblve in it two Ounces of SaU'> Armoniac\ then add one Ounce of fmall Leaves of a Copper calcined, as in Chap. 31, half an Ounce ofir Scales of Copper thrice calcined, as defcrib'd iiiid Chap. 34, half an Ounce of Mangancfe of Tiedmont^ prepared, as in Chap. 18, and half an Ounce offt Scales of Iron which fall from the Smiths Anvil, thes , whole well pounded, which caft little by little intoid your Matras for fear of breaking it, then' flop itad well. Put into another Glafs Body one Pound of Aqua fortis, and two 'Ounces of Sal-Armoniac : The diflb- lution being made, put to it little by little half an Ounce of red Lead, one Ounce of Scales of Copper of Chap. 34, half an Ounce of crude Antimony, and as much Caput Mortuum of Vitriol purified, the whole well pulverized 3 then ftop the Ma- tras. Take Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 9 Take another Glafs Matras, put into it one Pound of Aftftt fonts with two Ounces of Sd-Arrmniac $ add to that Water of Orpiment, of white Arfnick, of Painters Lake, half an Ounce of each ; the whole bei] ig well powder'd, and put into a Matras with the fame precaution as before, ftop it well. We have not repeated at each Operation, that you muft put your Matras on an Afh Furnace over a gen- tle heat, or in a warm Bath to haften the Solution of the Materials 5 becaufe we have told you it mull be al- ways done in Chap. 58, in fpeaking of the Preparation of thole things which ferve to tinge the hrltSpecies of Chalcedony , which may fuffice for the inftru&ion of ihofe who employ themfelvesin this Art. We will add, that all the nine Matrafles mentioned in this Chapter, mull remain fifteen Days in the fame heat, Pining them often every Day, that tho Water may the better operate on the Materials fubtilizing them, and well opening their Tinctures. Then put all thefe Materials, with the Aqua fonis, into a great Glafs Body, little by little, that they may unite well to- gether. Clofe the Body and fet it in the fame heat, ftirring it well for fix Days. After that, take a great Glafs Cucurbit well luted half way up the Body of it, put it on an Afh Furnace, put into it all the Mate- rials out of your Body, fit to it a Head and Receiver, lute well all the Joints, then difbilit during the fpace of twenty four Flours, over a very gentle Fire, for fear the Colours mould be fpoil'd, that the Water pafs gently over, and the Spirits remain in the Pow- der, which of green will become yellow. Thus putting that Powder in the requisite Dofe(as we have taught in the firft Species of Chalcedony) into purified Glafs Metal, made of broken pieces of Crj - ItaL, and not of Fritt-, and adding to it in its due time, calcined Tartar, Soot of Chimney, Croctti I .| Murtpj Of the Art of Glafs. Mortis made with Vinegar, obferving all we have on this Subjeft remarked, thefe Materials will give an opacity to Glafs, which may be worked twenty four Hours afterwards, managing it well with pro- per Tools, and often heating it j and you'll have things made of an extraordinary Beauty, greater then°can be imagin'd. The End of the Second Book. O F Of the Art of Glafs. 1 1 x / O F T H E ART F GLASS BOOK III. CHAP. LXI. The Way of making Glafs of the colour of Gold Yellow, of Granat, Amethift, Saphir, Velvet Black, Milk White, Marble, Peach Flower, and deep Red : Alfo to make Fritt with Natural Cryftal, to colour Glafs of a Pearl Colour, Viper, Ruby, Topaz,, Opal, Sun-flower and others, with fever al other particulars in this Art. THERE are fevcral Ways of giving Glafs the Colour of Gold, of Amethift, of Sa- phir and others ; which are not unknown to the Curious in this Art ; and as there is generally fome one way more particular and finer than the reft, feveral may be ignorant of that ; for that rea- fon this Third Book is deftin'd to that end, viz,, to mew \ii Of the ArtofGlafs. fhew the beft, and alfo to make Fritt of Natural (or Rock) Cryftal,the way and Procefs whereof we will lay down fo diftin&ly, that it (hall be impoffible for any one to mifs his aim in doing it, that obferves thefe Rules : To that end we caution thofe who em- ploy tVcmfelvcs in m^cing them, that they muft be very punctual in the Dofe, Time, and Circumftan- ces, and Materials: For if you err in any one, the whole will befpoiPd and come to nothing, for you will have quite different Colours from what youpro- pofed to your felf. We will endeavour to make our Defcriptions in the following Chapters, fo clear and plain, that we hope they will prove to the Reader's Satisfaction. CHAP. LXII. To make a Gold-Yellow in Clafs. CI Old-colour being one of the moft noble and fi- I ncit we can make, by reafon of its imitating the moft: perfect Metal in Nature, as we have faid in Chap. 8. muft be made with the pureft Materials, and great precaution. Take two parts of Cryftal Fritt, made with Tar- fo, and not with Sand, which is not fo good \ and one part of Fritt compoied of two thirds of Tarfo, and one third of fine Salt of Poherine, prepared as in.Chap.7, pound and mix them well, and to each hundred Pound of this Compolition, add one Pound of Tartar purified, pounded and fearccd fine ^ and one Pound of Aiangane[eo{ Piedmont, prepared as in Chap. 1 8, mixing well thefe Powders with the two Fritts, becaufe you muft not caft them on the melted Glafs as in other Colours : Then put the whole little by little into a Po f , and put them into a Furnace, wherein Of the Art ofGlafs. 123 wherein let them ftand at an ordinary Fire four Days, for fear the Glafs rifing,fhould run over. When that Matter is well purified, you may ufe it for making Veflels, and what other Works you pleafe, which will be of a fair colour. If you would have the Co- lour yet clearer, you mufl add more Powder, and you will have a very fine Golden-colour. If you would have it yet finer, take fine Cryftal Fritt made of Tolverim oi Rochetta, and the Golden-colour wilL be yet more fair. CHAP. LXIII. Granat -Colour i?i Glafs. THE beauty of this Colour is to exprefs the Yel- lowifh-red of Fire, when it is expofed to the Sun : We will treat more largely of it in the fifth Book, in mewing the way to counterfeit this Stone, as alfo feveral others. To give Granat-colour to Glafs : Take of Cryftal Frit, of Fritt of Rochetta, each an equal quantity, mix them we'll, and to an hundred Pound of thefe Materials, add one Pound of Manganefe^ of Piedmont , prepared as in Chap. 1 8, one Ounce of Zafier, pre- pared as in Chap. 17, mix them well with the Fritts, then put them little by little into an Earthen Pot made red-hot in the Furnace, becaufc the Glafs is apt to rife and run over. After four Days the Glafs be- ing well tinged and purified, you may work it ^ you may encreafe or di minim the Colour as much as you pleafe, that depends on the Difcretion of the Work- man who puts in the Powders, which ought to be orderly put in, that the Matter be not fpoiled. CHAP- CHAP. LXIV. To make an Amethift-Co W in Glafs. r A Methist being of a Violet Colour, proceeding _/Y from Red and Blue, muft be well imitated to look beautiful. For this Colour, take Cryftal Fritt well made, with Tar fa and not Sand, this Colour re- quiring no other \ to which add to each Pound one Ounce of the following Powder, whichmix well to- gether before they be put into the Pot. After that you muft fet the Per to the Fire in the Furnace little by little, othcrwife the violence of the Powder would caufe it to break. When this Glafs has been well purified for the fpace of four Days, and it has the colour of AmcthisT-, you may work it. This Colour may be augmented or diminifhed by means of the Fritt, or Powder, according to the Difcretion of the Workman. This is the Powder which produces the Amcthist Colour in Glafs. Take one Pound of Mangamfe of Piedmont- prepared as in Chap. 18, and an Ounce and half of Zaffer, prepared as in Chap. 1 7 } mix them well together, and put the Dofe we have ftewn to each Pound of Fritt, to have a true Amc- r/j/iZ-Colour. Von a in his fixth Book, Chap. 5. only allows one Drachm of Manganefe to each Pound of Metal, to make the Glafs of an Amcthist Colour - but that Dofe is too weak, and you mull follow that we have (hewn. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. I a 5 CHAP. LXV. To make Glafs of a Saphir -Colour. r~r^O imitate the Colour of Saphir in Glafs, which X is of a clear and tranfparent Blue \ you muft put to each hundred Pound of Fritt of Rochetta, one Pound of Zaffcr prepared, with an Ounce of Manga- vcfc of Piedmont, alfo prepared as we have fhewn. Well mix thefe Powders with the Fritt, then put the whole into a Pot in a Furnace, letting the Glafs be well melted and purified : For the longer it remains on the Fire it becomes fo much the finer, if you take care to take it out from time to time. Then mix it very well, and make an Eflay of the Colour, and if it be not full enough, augment or diminifh it asmuch as you think fit ; then the Glafs may be wrought, and you will have a Saphir of the Colour of the Dou- ble Violet of Confaminople, which the fmallDofe of Mangancfe produces. C H A P. LXVI. Another way of giving Glafs a finer Saphir-G//o//r. C"1 LASS will have a far fairer SapfoV-Colour, if in X room of Fritt of Rochetta, you take good Cry- stal Fritt, and add to it the fame Dofe of Powder, as in the preceding Chapter. Of this Glafs thus tinged you may make what Works you pleafe. You mult not put the Powder of Alanganefe and Zajferow the melted Glafs, but mix it with the Fritt as we have noted : For the Colour the melted Glafs takes, is not fofine as when the Materials arefirft mixed. CHAP. Ii6 Of the Art of Glafs. — t • nm— ■!— 111 CHAP. LXVH. To give Glafs a Velvet Black. ALTHO' this Black Colour look mournful, yet it is not without its Beauty : To make it, take pieces of Glafs of feveral Colours, to which add a little lefs than half the quantity of Manganefe as Zaf- fer, and put the whole into a Pot in^the Furnace. This Glafs being well purify'd may be wrought, and it will give a Black like Velvet, fit for many things. CHAP. LXVIII. Another Way of giving Glafs a much fairer Velvet Black. ANOTHER Way of giving a Black Velvet Co- lour to Glafs, much fairer than the former, is to take twenty Pound of Cryftal Fritt in Powder, with four Pound of Calx of Lead and Tin, of each an equal quantity ^ mix the whole well together, and. put them into a Pot heated in the Furnace •, and when this Glafs is well melted and purified, you mult caffc in three Ounces of Steel calcined and powder'd, and three Ounces of Scales of Iron from the Smiths Forge, powder'd and mixed with the Steel j mix the whole well as you caft them in, that the Glafs may not rife, and the better to incorporate them. Then let all reft twelve Hours, during which time, ftir them fometimes ; then you may work it : And you will have a Velvet Black Colour very fair,wherewith you may work as you pleafe. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs, 117 CHAP. LXIX. Another Velvet Black fairer than the precedent. THIS laft Way of making a Black, furpafles in Beauty the preceding, lake one hundred Pound of Rochetta Fritt, two Pound of Tartar, fix Ounces of Manganefe prepared, reduce all to Pow- der, mix them together, put them into a Pot, which you mull put into the Furnace leifurely, that the Matter don't rife too much. Then let it melt and purifie during the fpace of four Days or thereabouts ; mix the Materials well, call them into Water the better to purifie, and then melt them again \ and you'll have a Black of an extraordinary Beauty, which may be wrought as you pleafe. CHAP. LXX. To male a Milk White Colour in Glafs. THE Milk White to be done well, requires no lefs cxacrnefs than the Blue. To fucceed in it, take twelve Pound of good Cryftal Fritt, two Pound of Calx of Lead and Tin, one of each, and half an Ounce of Manganefe of Piedmont prepared, as we have fhewn : The whole pulverized and mixed toge- ther, and put them into a Pot heated in the Furnace, where let them ftand twelve Hours, then mix the whole well, and make an Eilay of it. If the Colour don't pleafe you, add to it feme Calx of the two Me- tals before mentioned, which incorporate with the Glafs, well mixing it. Eight Hours after the Glafs will be fit to work, and white as Milk. CHAP. ia8 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. LXXI. Another Fairer and Whiter Colour. THIS fecond way of giving Milk White to Glafs, is much better than the precedent, and the Working more exquifite. We only make ufe of the Calx of Tin, without mixing any Lead ; and we put fixty Pound of that Calx, to four hundred Pound of pure Cryftal Fritt, with two Pounds and an half of Man; id tedious, but any onerliar. will diligently apply himfelftoitj will find himfelf fufficiently rewarded tor his pains, both by the PleaHii c of feeing fo fine, Productions, and the Profit he may get by a thing of fo fmall charge. CHAP. XCII. Tlje Way of preparing Natural Cryftal. WE have already given a very fine Preparation of Natural Cryftal in the fecond Book,- Chap. •-;6, yet we will give you here the principal one, which is its Calcination, and which we will explain at large. To perform this Calcination well, Take Natural Cryftal the rairelt you can get, fince that is the Balis for Artificial Gems, it is no matter whether it be in great or fmall pieces. Fill with thefe Pieces of Cry- ftal a large Crucible, cover it with a Cover made of the fame Earth, which muff, be fomewhat broader thanthe Mouth of the Crucible, for fear Allies or Coals tumble in, which you miift take particular care of. Then fet your Crucible in burning Coals in a little Furnace, and when your Cryftal is well heated, calf it into a Veiled of cold Water, the more Water there is, fo much the better will the Calcina- tion be performed, becaufc the cold of it is fo much the Of the Art of Glafs. 1 5 1 the greater. Then take it out of the Water, and dry it in an Earthen Ladle, then put it into the feme Crucible to be heated again, faking care to cover it well : Then caft it again into frefli cold Water, and repeat heating it and quenching it thus twelve times, changing each time the Wa- ter. You may know if your Cryflal be well calcined, for it will eafily break and crumble : If there appear in it any black Veins, you mult take care to take them all clean out, by breaking them, and do this till only the White remains behind ^ then it is well prepared. After you have well dried your Cryftals thus cal- cined, grind them to an impalpable Powder on a Marble or Porphyry Stone, by putting a little on at a time, and fearce it well through a fine Silken Sieve. And fince we ufe this Powder of Cryllal for all Artificial Gems whereof we are going to treat, your belt way will be to keep a good quantity by you, which you may always have recourfe to in Work- ing. If you defign to fucceed in this Art very well you mult not ufe ordinary Fritt of Cryflal, how good and fair foever it be, nor Chalcedony , novTarfa nor any other Stones - for the Glafs made of them is far lefs fair and rcfplendent than that made of Natural Cryflal, which has the molt luftrc, and approaches nearefl precious Stones, as we have already remark- ed in the preceding Chapter. J. 4 C H A P, 15- Of the Art of Glafs. ♦, CHAP. XCIII. The Wjy of Making a very fine and pure Salt of Tartar. N£^/makesufeof no Salt of Tartar, in all his Preparations of Artificial Gems \ notwith- ifanding this Salt being prepared after a certain man- ner, we (hall here relate, for the fake of the Curious. Itferves in a great meafure to work the Cryftal,belng a true V eh icle for the better introducing the Colours that are to be ,iven, and which is of ufe for the Tin- cru res federal w;> Thofc, who in their Operations of Artificial Gems, have made no life of Salt of Tartar, have with- out doubt been ignorant of this fine Preparation of it j for if you ufe ordinary Salt of Tartar, there is a Sulphur and Foulncfs in it, which renders Cryftal obfeure, and confequently would be hurtful in thefc Operations. To make this Salt, you mult firft calcine your Tartar, till it become Grey, and notto perfect White- nefs:, and then diflblve it in warm Water to extract the Salt, filter that Water, and then evaporate it o- ver the Fire ; then you'll have remaining at the bot- tom of the Veflel, a White Salt. To take away all Foulncfs from this Salt, diflblve it again in warm Water, then e tin over a gentle Fire ; take it off the Fire, i tit into cold Water, and you'll find it will leave on the furface of the Water a thick Froth, which you muft skim off with a Skim- mer that has little Holes no bigger than a fmaU Pins Head: PuttheVefli on the Fire, and evapo- rate the Water as before, then take it ofFthe Fire, and call upon it frefl . ater, and skim it well as before. Of the Art of Olafs. I 5 3 before. Reiterate this Procefs till you find no more Froth \ then Evaporate the whole over a gentle Fire till it tr dry, and you will have a Salt of Tartar well purified, which is not fo fufil as the other, be- caufe it is free from all that Un&uofity which caufes the Fufion. Keep this Salt of Tartar in a VefTel well flopped, and nfe of it in Cryftalwith your Colours when you fet them to melt. Altho' this Salt of Tartar be very fine and pure, yet it is not that of the Philofophers, which has far more Virtue, and opens more powerfully the Metals and Minerals where it is employ'd, tho' it be of the fame Nature as this, and extracted from the fame Principle. The Philofophers have moreover another Salt of Tartar extra&ed from Metalline Matters ^ and this lal> is far more Excellent than any others. We will treat thereof at large in the Treatifc we have promifed, where we will explain the Virtues both of the one and the other, as well in Medicine as in the Bufinefs of Metals, and fhew fe- veral very Curious Effects performed by their means. CHAP. XCIV. To make a Past for Oriental Emerald. E have already fhewn the way of tinging Cry- ftaland Glafsof Lead, of a very fair Eme- rald- :olour, but not to make a Stone that fhall imitate a true Natural Gem, which may be nfed in Rings, or otherwife, which now we come to do. There I 54 Of the Art ofQlafs. There are divers forts of Emeralds, but at prcfent, they are all diftingnifhed into either oriental or Oc- cidental, the Orientals are more hard, and the o- thers left. Wc will fhew feveral ways of Imi- tating; the Emerald more or lefs full, which will be all Beautyful. This is the firft. Take two Ounces of natural Cryftal prepared, as wc have fhewn in Chap. 92. and 4 Ounces of common Minium or Read-Lead, povvder'd and Scarccd, add 48 Grains of Verdigreafe well pound- ed and of a pood Colour, with 8 Grains of Crocus Mortis prepared with Vinegar as wc have fhewn Chap. 15. Mix the whole well together, and put it into a good Cruciblf that will refill the lire, in it you mull leave an Inch empty. Then cover the the Crucible with an Earthen Cover, lute it well, and dry it, then put it in the hotteft place of a Potters Furnace where they make their Earthen Veflels, and let it ftand a> long as their Pots. Being cold break the Crucible and you'll find with- in a matter of the Colour of a very fine Emerald. If you afterwards fet it in Gold, it will furpafs in Beauty the true Oriental Emerald. If it happens that your Matter is not enough rc- fin'd and purified, you mult put it in again a fe- cond time in the fame Furnace, where it will be purified as much as needs be :, which you may know by lifting up the Cover, if the Matter appears fhi- nin if it is not fo, lute the Cover on again, and put the whole in the Furnace. You may take notice once for all, that you muit not break the Crucible, before the Matter be throughly baked and purified, for i; you do, and fo arc obliged to put the Matter into a- nother Crucible, the Fait will be painted and full oi Bliltei ■.. I Of the Art of Glafs. 155 If you cannot eafily come to a Potter's Furnace, you may make one your felf with little Charge, wherein you may put twenty Crucibles at once, each of different Colours, foone Baking may ferve for a great deal of Matter. You mu ft make ufe of dry and hard Wood to heat the Furnace, as we have (aid before in baking Glaft, and continue the Fire twenty four Hours, in which time your Matters ought to be baked and purified enough, but for more Surety you may continue the Fire fix Hours longer, and they will be certainly ba- ked enough. Your Matter being thus rightly baked, you may polifh it at the Wheel, as we have laid :, and fet it with a Foil in Gold, as is done with true Gems, and you'll have a brighter Emerald than the Ori- ental. CHAP. XCV. Another deeper Emerald-Colour. f~TpHAT which makes Emerald deeper than the X precedent, proceeds from the fmaller quantity of Cryflal cmploy'd in it, with more of the other Materials, which make it more fair, but alfo more brittle. You mult Bake it at leait fix Hours longer than the precedent, to take away that Imperfection which Lead ufually gives. The Dofe of this Pair, is one Ounce of Natural Cryflal prepared, as we have fhewn, lix Ounces and an half of Red-Lead, feventy live Grains of Verdigreafe, ten Grains of Crocm Manis made with Vinegar, the whole pulverized and well mixed together*, then follow the Method we have jfhcwiij in the preceding Chapter, which would 156 Of the Art of Glafs. would be too tedious to repeat here, and on every occafion, fo we will avoid it \ only obferving to let your Mai ter (land longer in the Fire, as we have laid, and you'll have an admirable Oriental Emerald- colour, which being fct in Gold with a Foil of the fame Metal underneath, will be inexprcflibly fair. CHAP. XCVI. Another Way to make a fairer Vafle for Emeralds. THIS Parte will be as brittle as the precedent, for thc Reafons we have faid ? for you muft take (even Ounces of Minium, to two Ounces of Natu- ral Cryflal prepared : To which add full eighteen Grains of Verdigreafe, ten Grains of Crocm Marti*, the whole pulverized and well mixed. Then pro- ceed as we have ihewn in Chap. 94, and you'll have an Emerald fit for all fmall Works, but not fo hard as the former, by reafon of the great quantity of Lead in it. Wherefore you ought to keep it longer in the Fire, that the pale Colour of the Lead may vanifh. CHAP. XCVII. Another fairer Paftc for Emeralds. THE Colour of this Pafte will furpafs the other; in Beauty, if the Workman takes care. Take two Ounces of Natural Cryital prepared, fix Ounces of Minium in Powder, and eight Grains of Verdi- greafe alfo in Powder, mix the whole well together, then put them into a large Crucible covered and wel luted Of the Art of Clafe. 157 luted, in the fame Furnace as before. Moreover do all as in Chap. 94, and you'll have an extraordinary fair Emerald-colour. CHAP. XCVIII. Another very fair Emerald-Colour. THIS Stone will be far harder and finer than the precedent, becaufe it contains lefs Lead. To make it, take four Ounces of Natural Cryftal, pre- pared as in Chap. 92, the fourth part of an Ounce of Red-Lead, and the fame quantity of Verdigrcafe, the whole pulverized and lilted fine, which put toge- ther in a Crucible well clofed and luted, in the fame Furnace as before, proceeding as in Chap. 94, leaving the Crucible in the Fire thirty fix Hours. After which, if you will you may caft your melted Mat- ter into a Marble Mould heated, putting it near the Fire to cool gentlv, and you'll have a very fine Eme- rald. CHAP. XCIX. To make a Pafle for an Oriental Topaz. ^THHE Topaz, of the Ancients, is the fame which JL the Moderns call a Chyfolite, whereof we fhall treat in C hap. 1 o 1 , and their ChryfoUtefk&X. which Mo- dern Jewellers call a Topaz , which is a Stone of a Golden-colour. Such arc the Oriental Topaz's which are the moll hard of all Stones next the Diamond. Their Colour is like Water tinged with Saffron or Khiibarb, but finning and [Hire. There are fome found 158 Of the Art of Glafi. found in Europe, but as foft as Cryftal, and approach fomewhaton Black with a Golden -colour , if there is any one found of the Colour of pure Gold, it is ex- traordinary, and not diftinguifhable from the Orien- tal ones, but in hardnefs. To imitate the Oriental ones, take two Ounces of Natural Cry Hal of Chap. 92, feven Ounces of Red- Lead in fine Powder and fcarced , mix the whole well together, put them into a good Crucible, wherein you leave an empty fpace of about an Inch deep, for fear the Matter mould run over in Baking, or ftick to the Cover of the Crucible in riling, and fpoil the Work. Then proceed as in Chap. 94, obferving the fame Circumltances of Time and Fire, and you'll have an admirable To/waL-coloiir. CHAP. C. Another fine TorpXL-Colour. f""]pAKE two Ounces of Natural Cryftal prepared, JL as we have fhewn :, two Ounces of Native Crm.abar, two Ounces of iALs liftum, the whole pow- deredj four times as much calcined Tin alfo pulveri- 7.ed, put the whole in a Crucible well covered and luted, into a Furnace as betore, wherein let them Hand twenty foi r or thirty Hours at a Fire not too violent, and which (hall always retain the fame de- gree of heat, for this Powder will ealily melt. Then you 11 have a fine To/w^-colour'd Palfc. A very fine Tear refemblance to thofe which our Art of Cu . ive receh d •, and this coftly Colour is c- qually eftimable in both :, and befides, the Employ- ment Ox thi latter admits only of Gentlemen, by who in alone Inch Priviledges arc enjoyed without de- rogation from their Nobility, as we have fhewn in Chap. 3. The grand Prerogatives of thefe two Gentile Arts, are Arguments which may ferve eaiily to convince us that they have nothing in the practice of them either Mean or Vulgar, but have in them always fomething of Elevation and Sublimity beyond all other Occupa- tions : And 'tis obfervable, that fuch as wrought in the tirlt, enjoy'd the Priviledges of Nobility, and thatluch of the Nobility as Exercife themfelves in the latter, may do it without prejudice to their Birth. Now to make Enamel of a Purple-colour, you mull take four pound of Principal Powder, as prepa- red in Chap. 148. add to this two Ounces of Manga- nefe of Piedmont, prepared as we (hall direct ill Chap. 1 64. put thefe into a White glazed Earthen pot, al- lowing it large enough to bear with the Ebullitions and railing of the Metal : When it's throughly melt- ed, caft it into Water, dry it, and put it again into the pot to refine } then confider whether it be well e^ nough coloured, and accordingly make it up into Cakes, and keep it for life as before. p 4 chap; 21 6 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CLX. Another Purple Enamel. WE will give you another Way to make Enamel of this Colour, nolcfs delicate than the for- mer, for all manner of Goldfmiths Work. Take fix pound of our Principal Powder, three Ounces of Manganefe of Piedmont prepared, fix Oun- ces of thrice calcined Scales of Copper, as we have before prefcribed, reduce all thefe to an impalpable Powder, and let them difTolve and refine in the White glazed pot in your Furnace :, afterwards caft the Metal into Water, dry it well, and return it in- to the pot to refine over again :, examine the Colour, if it be right, take it off and cake it up for ufe as before. CHAP. CLXI. Jo make Enamel of Violct-coloar. THIS Colour as it is the neareft to it, fucceeds the Purple, and is a mixture of Red and Blue, 'tis worn by the Fathers of the Church Militant, for their proper Livery, as being altogether Heavenly, and by which the Chara&er which they bear is belt figni- fied. To make it, take fix pound of principal Powder, as in Chap. 148. two Ounces of Manmnefe of Piedmont prepared, and forty eight Grainsof thrice calcined Scales of Copper, make 'em all into a very fine powder, Of the Art of Glafs. i i 7 powder, and being well mixt put them together into your White glazed Earthen Pot in the Furnace, let it melt and digeft, then caft it into Water, and dry- it, put it again into the Pot, and let it refine very well j try its Colour, and if 'tis agreeable, take it and cake it, and you'll have a very fine Violet-co- lour'd Enamel, proper for all manner of Goldfmiths Work of that fort. CHAP. CLXII. The Way to make Yellow Enamel. YELLOW is the Colour of Gold, ^nd may there- fore deferve all its Commendations, which are fo extraordinary great, that they require a whole Volume to contain 'em - but we'll onl/ fatisfie our felves to intimate, that it bears the lkenefs of the firlt and more perfeft Body, which rouls under the Heavenly Arch : And can there be any other fo great Companion ? 'Tis likewifethe Symboleof true No- bility, and of all excellent Caufes. You may make this rich Colour with fix pound of Principal Powder, three Ounces of Tartar, feventy two Grains of prepared Manganefe, the whole redu- ced to an impalpable Powder, well mixt and put in- to a glazed Earthen pot large enough to difpenfe with the Ebullition and railing up of the Metal , let it ftand in your Glafs-houfe Furnace to melt and in- corporate j after call it into Water, dry it, and leave it in the pot again to refine very well •, then try the Colour, and if it be fufficient, make it up into Cakes as before dire&cd, and you'll have a very ta- king Yellow Enamel for all forts of Metal but Gold, which by its refemblanceit would only dull andfpoii the n8 Of the Art of Glafs. the Beauty, unlefs it were placed among other Co- lours, as the Goldfmiths already are very well ac- quainted withal. CHAP. CLXIII. The Way to make a Cryftal-Ground for our Red Enamel. THE Red requires a Chryftal more lafting than any of the former, therefore we will give you a Compoiition here fufficient for that purpofe. Take twenty four Pound of Salt of Pohenne, Ro- chetta y or Soda prepared as directed in Chap. 5. and fix. pound of Frit, as in Chap. 6. thefe mixt and finely powder'd, mull be ftecpt in Water to bring the Mafs into a Body like Parte •, and then make it up into fmall thin Cakes, lay them on Tiles in a Lime-kiln, or Potters-Furnace for fix Hours to calcine, or near the Glafs-houfe Furnace Vault, or on the Upper Vault, taking fpecial care that they don't melt, let them re- main there for three or four Days, or until they be very well calcined. This done refolve them into an impalpable pow- der, adding thereto four pound of Calx of Lead and Tin prepared and calcined according to directions in Chat. 148. and Chap. Si. four pound of White calci- ned Tartar, prefcribed in Chap. 5. and elfewhere. Thefe being all mixt and very finely pulverized, put them them into your glazed pot at the Glafs-houfe Furnace to melt and refine - 7 thence throw the Metal into Water, and again (when dry) into the pot to melt •, call it a fecond time into the Water, and dry it, let it melt and refine over-again in the pot for fome Hours, and 'twill be fit for ufc. Confider Of the Art of Glafs. ' i \ 9 Confider always the Lead which is among the ci- ther Ingredients, and be very careful that you let none or it remain in the pot when you throw the Matter out into the Water, for it will be apt to pre- cipitate to the bottom, and this for feveral Reafons cifewhere given, too tedious and needlefs to be here repeated. CHAP. CLXIV. An Excellent Preparation ofEufiblc Mangancfe to be ufed in making of our Red Enamel. WE have already given fufficient direction to prepare A fanganefe of Piedmont, in Chap. 1 8. for tinging thefe Matters, of which we have already difcours'd, but for Red and Rofe-colour Enamel, there arc fome more exquilite Ingredients and Prepa- rations required, which we think proper to give ac- count of here, before we fpeak of the Enamel it felf. Any other than Manganefc of Piedmont, will not ferve your turn, for that only is fit for our ufe to contribute to the Fairnefs and Life of the Colour \ take therefore equal Quantities of this Manganefc and Salt-petre, as much as you pleafe, and let them rever- berate and calcine in an Earthen pot in your Furnace twenty four Hours , take it off* and walh it well in w r arm Water to feparate the Salt-petre, dry it well, and the Mafs will be of a red Colour : To this add an equal quantity of Sal- Armoniack, grind thefe on a Marble with diftilled Vinegar, as Painters do their Colours j dry it, and reduce it to Powder, putting it afterwards into a fcrong Matrafs or Bolt-head of Glafs, big-belly'd and long-neck'd, there to fubli- mate io.o Of the Art of Glafs. mate about twelve Hours } break your Matrafs, mix all the volatile and fixed parts together, adding the fame quantity of Sd-Armoniack, as there are Flowers, and take care to weigh them before Com- pofitioir, grind, pulverize, and fublimc as before, repeating this until your Manganefe remain fufible in the bottom of the Matras, and this is that which you mull preferveto tinge Cryftal with, and make it rud- dy and diaphanous, or tranfparent as a Ruby. CHAP. CLXV, The Way to make a Fixt Sulphur, to be ufedin Compofi- tions for Enamel. THIS Fixt Sulphur fervesfor feveral ufes in Chy- miftry, and very convenient for obliging young Artifts. Now, tho' it be not fo unavoidably necertary for making Red Enamel, yet we will not omit it here, be- caufe it contributes to our prefcribing two forts of ways for it, as well as to fatisfie the more curious Goldfmiths. Put Flowers of Sulphur, as much as you pleafe, into a Glafs Gucurbite luted at bottom,pouring there- to Oyl-Olive as much as will drown the Matter by two Inches, fet the Cucurbite on a violent Sand- Furnace, for a full Hour, then take it off, and pour in ftrong Vinegar, and the Sulphur will foon preci- pitate, and the Oyl afcend on the Surface of the Vi- negar, decant this from the Sulphur into another Velfcl, and put in more frefh Oyl as before, do thus thrice, and you'll have at length a fixt Sulphur to make ufe of for Enamel. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. f 2 2i CHAP. CLXVI. Another fixt Incombitfiible Sulphur. THERE is yet another way for fixation of Sul- phur for the fame ufe, and feveral Chymical Operations, wherein it has very great Vertue. Make ftrong Lye of Quick-Lime and harfh Oak- Afhes, put therein Flowers of Sulphur until the li- quid Surface be four Inches upmoit - 7 boil it for a con- fiderable while over the Fire, this will cleanfe and purge the Sulphur from its Unctuofity and Corrup- tion, and qualifie it for your purpofe ; feparate the LyC from the Sulphur, and drying it, you'll have it white, fixt, and inccmbuftible, exceeding proper for the Goldfmiths to make ufe of on Gold. We cou'd prefcribe feveral ways more to make Sulphur fixt and fufible, but thefe two already given are fuificient for our purpofe \ we referve them there- fore for fome other place to be difcovered among Matters more excellent, and of greater Curiofity, for the Advantage of fuch Perfons who Study the im- provement and profounder parts of Chitniftry. CHAP. CLXVII. To Extra?} Spirit of Saturn, an Excellent Ingredient for Enamel and Glafs-xvork. WE think fit topropofe all the Preparations pro- per for making a Red Enamel, before we fliew the way to make it, becaufe the Ingredients to be &di Of the Art ofGlafs. be ufed muft firft be provided, or we can't proceed regularly to our Bufinefs. "Among the reft, this Spirit of Saturn is not to be laid aiide, which tho coniidered here as ufeful only in Enamel and Glafs-work, may have other Vertues familiar to the Learned ; but for our Bufinefs 'tis fuch as does very nobly' heighten and much improve the Matter for our Work, and for any other not imme- diately relating to us here, we pafs over in filence. Reduce good Litharge, as much as you pleafe, to an impalpable powder, andfetit in a glazed Earthen Vcflel over a ftill Fire ; add to this good diftilled Vi- negar, till four Inches above it, mix 'em well toge- ther, and then let them fettle until the Vinegar be- come Milk-coloured, which will be in a little time j decant this Vinegar off gently, and pur onfrefh, con- tinuing to do thus until it admits of no more colour- ing , then put all the Milk-coloured Vinegar into a glazed Earthen Veffel, and let it ftand until the Lead precipitate to the bottom , from whence pour off the clear Vinegar, which will be at top, and that Milk-coulour'd Sediment which remains, is what we call Spirit of Saturn, tho improperly, and that which we'll make ufe of for the Enamel and Glafs. If it do not precipitate well to your liking, and that the Vinegar at top be not very clear, caft among it fome cold Water , if that won't do, and that your Vinegar ftill continues muddy, fet all the Water and Vinegar together over a gentle Fire to evaporate, and thus you'll have the more Spirituous part of your Vi- negar a Sediment in the bottom of the VefTel, which is exceeding ufeful for Glafs-work^ keep ittogether with the reft of the Saturn for ufe. This Noble Preparation which we call Spirit of Saturn, does indeed contain it, but you muft have skill to extract it thereout ; to fay that 'tis all Spirit of Saturn is untrue, for 'tis that wherein the Spirit iS Of the Art of Glafs. a a} is contained, and from whence it may be more caiily and better Separated, than from the Mafs of Lead, I propofe tHs firft flep towards extracting it as fuch, whereby the Curious may fucceed with finall trou- ble. CHAP. CLXVIII. The Way to make Enamel of a Blood-colour Red. SINCE we have given a finall Elogy to every other Colour, 'tis unjufl for us not to continue the like on this, which is a true Symbolc of Blood, by which the Glory of the Martyrs, who with fo much Generality and Courage fheel theirs for the Faith of Chrift, may be reprefented as well as of thofe many Brave and Heroick Perfons, who have interpoled for the Prefervation and Support of Church and State, 'tis therefore an Illuftrious Badge of Eminent Cou- rage. Thus Alexander, Hannibal, Scipio, and very many other Great and Noble Princes, chofe this Co- lour for their Livery, and for their Shields. To (lain Enamel of this Colour, take ten pound of common Frit, mentioned mChap. 1 2. add thereto fix pound of Glafs of Saturn, prepared as inChap. 82. the whole made into a very fine powder, mull be put into a glazed Earthen pot at the Glafs-houfe Furnace, to melt, boil and refine ; after this call thereon pow- der of thrice calcined Copper, as in Chap. 34. at dis- cretion, ftirring it all about that they may incorpo- rate together with powder of red Tartar, until the Mafs become red as Blood, obferving whether the Colour be too pale, and if fo, continue to put in more of thefe Powders of Copper and Tartar, until it be perfectly ftained j and thus you'll have a delicate deep a 14 Of the Art ofGlafs. deep Sanguine Enamel fit for all manner of Work you can defire to apply it. CHAP. CLXIX. Another Blood-colour Enamel. THIS Enamel will be very beautiful, and may ferveinftead of the Rofe-colour Enamel here- after prefcribed. To make it, put ten pound of Frit for Cryftal, Chap. 6. and fix pound ofGlafs of Saturn before men- tioned, into one of the Glafs-houfe Furnace pots, let it melt and purge well ; after this call it into Wa- ter, dry it, and return it into the pot , when 'tis well melted again, throw in at feveral times, five or fix Ounces of powder of thrice calcin'd Copper, ftir- ring the whole with the Iron Crook to mix and incor- porate them well together, and alfo a like quantity of powder of red Tartar, ftill ftirring it , this being well boil'd and refined, obferve whether the Colour be perfect, if not, add equal parts of the Powders of Co^er and Tartar, according to your Judgment, as much as you find neceflary, to bring it to a perfe- ction , let it remain to boil and purifie, trying it a- gain and again, until you find it compleatly co- loured. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 215 CHAP. CLXX. Another Red Enamel of a very Splendid Ruby-colour. r 1PHE Beauty of this Enamel is very fiirprifing, jL and of as lively a Luftre as the Ruby it felf, which it communicates to all the Work wherein 'tis ufed. For this fine Effect we muft have recourfe to the fufible Mangancfc in Chap. 164.. add twenty Ounces thereof to each pound of Cryftal ground, mentioned Chap. 163. let the whole be well purified, then try the Colour, and' according as you find it, add the greater or lefier quantity of Manganefe, or Cryfral ground refpectively, until it be brought to its juffc degree of perfection, as a tf/^y, and which ought to be very admirable. CHAP. CLXXL Another Ballas-Ruby-colour Enamel. r'HE fame Manganefe muft be had to make this A fine Colour } put ten Pound of Cryftal ground, m Chap. 1 63. in a glazed pot to melt and purge at the Glafs-houfe Furnace ; throw the Matter into Water, iry and melt over again - do thus thrice, and when the Mafs is afterwards well melted, tinge it with the rufible Manganefe as before, and 'twill become Pur- ple-colour'd.Add to it at eight times impalpable Powder of Atom to bring it to a Red. Be very care- ful that the Alom do not blacken it, but rather make Q. it 2>>6 Of the Art of Glafs. it Yellowifh, and the Manganefe diffipating 'twill be tome Red, and fo make the Colour moil perfeft an juft of a fine Ballas-Ruby. CHAP. CLXXII. Another Enamel of a Rofc-colour for Gold. NOTHING is fairer and of greater Gaiety tha this, for all Work where it may be ufed, an therefore we'll give yon feveral ways for its Prep; ration. Take ten Pound of Cryftal ground, in Chap. \6 melt it at the Glafs-houfe Furnace in a glazed Poi add to it at four times five Ounces of red calcine Copper, as in Chap. 33. ftirring the Metal every tim then put into it Crocus Martis 1 Chap. 26. and Mangi nefe as before prepared , then let it alone to clean for fix Hours, and if the Colour is not true, put i by little and little more Crocus Martis^ until come to your liking, and be of a fine Rofe-colour. CHAP. CLXXIII. Another very fine Rofe-colour. AMONG our Rofe-colour Enamels this feen the fineft \ to make which, take four Pour of Cryftal ground, of Chap. 163. let it melt in glazed Pot at the Glafs-houfe Furnace, caft it afte wards into Water, and melting it over again, ad by little and little an Ounce and half of CV//,v, prep; re Of the Art of Glafs. nj red as mChap. 148. ftirring the Metal every time to incorporate, then let it alone for a little while, until you perceive it of an Afh-colour :, when it comes to that forbear putting in any morcG?/.v, left you make it too white \ then refine theMaft, and after add to it Minium two Ounces, purge, refine, and throw it out into Water, and putting it into the Pot, let it ftand to melt and purifie over again about eight Hours, then put in an Ounce and half of red thrice calcinM Copper, and as much crude white Tartar, with a Dram of Blood-ftone, and the like quantity of fixt Sulphur, in Chap. 165. thefe pulverized very fine and mixt together, ftir the Metal and incorporate them very well together :, afterwards fee if ihe Co- lour anfwers your expectation ; if it be too deep, add a little more Aftwganefe to weaken it, if it be too pale, improve it with fome more of the laft Compo- lition of Copper, Tartar', Blood-Hone and Sulphur, until it be to purpofe : And thus you have an Enamel of an exceeding fair Rofe-colour. CHAP. CLXXIV. Another Rofe-colour Enamel. PRACTICE has already experienc'd fo many ways to bring this fine Enamel to the moll advanced Improvements, that 'tis impoflible to expect any greater ; and for fuch as wou'd make it, they may proceed boldly thus. Set fix Pound of Cryital ground, as in Chap. 163. in a glazed Pot at the Glafs-houfe Furnace to melt and cleanfe ; then call; into it at four feveral times in- termitting, four Ounces of Cdx 7 as prepared of Q^2 lead a a 8 Of the Art of Glafs. Lead and Tin, in Chap. 148. ftir the Matter very well at each time until it incorporate, then let :i all purge for a while, and car! it Ladle-full by Ladle- full into Water, and again put all into the Potto melt and refine anew •, after this add to it an Ounce and half of red Copper pulverized and calcined, as h\ Chap. 33. which will tinge the whole of a deep Colour, but caft it in at three Intervals, and ftir it very well to incorporate •, two Hours after, add to it at thrice, an Ounce and half of Crocm Martis, given \nChap. 24. mix it well as before, and let it remain to refine about three Hours, then throw on it fix Ounces of Tartar calcined, as in Chap. 57. Chimney- Soot vitrified one Ounce, Crocus Mams again one Ounce and half pulverized, and all wellmixt at four feveral Intermiflions, and Quantities, ltirring the Metal always with the Iron-Crook, left it fwell or boil over : After this let it repofe and purifie about three Hours, ftir it again and try the Colour, if it be red as Blood it's right, if not, add at difcretion, a little more of each of thefc Powders of Tartar, Soot, and Crocus Anirta, until the Colour, be full and true, and fo let it ftand for a whole Hour, and try it again 3 if you find it perfcel, proceed no further, but keep it for ufe, 'tis very proper to apply to Gold for Ena- mel. CHAP. CLXXV. Another Splendid Enamel of a Carbuncle-colour, ^TOT to particularize any farther on the Car- \ buncle, which we have fufficiently enough difcourfed of already, we will mew how to imitate the Colour afcribed to it with Enamel, and which will Of the Art of Glafs. 229 will be of a wonderful fine Beauty, as has been often experimented. Now the whole Secret of tfiis Ope- ration confifb in calcining the Gold perfectly, and bringing it to an abfolute and jufl finenefs, which muft create this precious Colour. Take very pure Gold, and for the better affurance refine it your felf, and diflblve an Ounce of it in three Ounces of Aqua Regality as directed in Chap. 55. let the Solution diftil over a gentle Fire until the Gold precipitates, and thus repeat an Exhalation and Cohobation fix times, and the laft time take out the Gold, powder and put it into a Crucible covered and luted, on a Reverberatory to calcine ; let it remain until it become of a very excellent and Scarlet Red, whir-* will not be without a conliderable allowance *>fmanv Hours. This done ; take of our Cryftal ground, and melt a quantity of it in a glazed Pot at the Furnace of the Glafs-boufe, and being well purged, throw in a twentieth part of the Powder of Gold, in propor- tion as the quantity of Metal, ftirringthe whole ve- ry well , let it alone for fome time, then try it, and according as you find the Colour, put in more Pow- der until you bring it to a true tranfparent Carbun- cle-colour. We have given another way to calcine Gold in Chap. 115. no lefs fufficient than this, together with a way to make a fine Carbuncle, and this rare Colour may as well be given to the Stone as the Enamel by the Directions for preparing the Gold in either Chap- ter, the Curious may chooie which they will, they |)eing equally fufficient. ^ 3 C H A P, 1 ^0 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CLXXVI. The Way to calcine Copper for making Vitriol of Venus, without Corrofivc. WE promifed in Chap. 45. to fhcvv this fine Ef- fay, which is certainly the Nobleft Prepara- tion can be made of Copper, fo the Learned may take notice of it : If the Caput Alortuum of Vitriol has many excellent Vertnes for tinging of Glafs, this Vitriol it felf, or rather Spirit, mull have far greater and more extraordinary in Matters of a more fublime Nature : A famous Philofopher, very eminently re- commendable and Judicous, was never weary of dwelling on the Praifc of this hidden Treafure, and extolling its Vertues to the highefr. Tho this Vertue be known to many of the Learned, yet we may boldly fay, 'tis unknown to very many indifferently fo,who as foonasthey have run over the Writings of fome Sage Virtuofo, pretend to be ac- quainted with all the Secrets of Nature, and which they undertake to difclofe and unravel as foon as they can force 'em to any fenfe conformable to their weak Capacity, tho never fo different from the Author's meaning, to which they are altogether Strangers, and this gives us Authority enough to condemn them for truly ignorant. Nature is veiled, and her Vertues not fo plainly difclcfi.d to all the World, fhe Tias thofe fecret Re- clufes for them as can be opened by no other than her own Key, which can't be match'd, and therefore not to be found in the Hands of every Man \ befides that, one mult be lead by the fame Genius as he that forged it, before one can truly find and diicinguifh it, and we Of the Art of Olafs. 1«J'I we may allure our fel ves that none but the Wife are in pofTeflion of this rare and precious Trcafure. Th( greateft of thofe who have writ on this Art, have 1 1 ways held this Key as the laft Secret ; all the profound Arguments they have alledged, and Pains they have been at to fcreen thofe obfeure Avenues, were defined to make them inacceflible to the Bafe and Unworthy,and prcfcrvethcfc All-Divine Secrets from being prophaned by the Hands of fuch as won d abufetlicm. This Sacred M) itcry does not only confift ( as ma- ny fanfie) in the making of Gold and Silver, which is Ambitiouiiy iliggefted by the meer Avarice of the major pait of all Mankind, but is indeed the meaneft Excellency thereof:, for Health, which it contains, is beyond all the Treafure in the World ; be- fides, the Knowledge it affords us of anOmmpoten- cy in the true God, and of all the other Molt Holy Myfteries of Religion, wherein it gives an opportu- nity to make a perfect Difcovery : Are not thofe much more fublime and eminent Vermes which lead us to a Bleffed Eternity ? Whereas on the contrary, all the Traniitory Wealth on Earth has nothing in it but Impofture, and ferves only to precipitate us in- to the Bottomlefs-Pit. We'll leave this lofty Subject to be difcourfed on by the Learned, and go on to the calcining of Cop- per, which is the firft Preparation to be made mma- kingthe Vmidtf. Venw without Corrofive, which is kiwwn to very few, and whereof we have already given an Elogy. Take thin Leaves of red Copper, and put them into Crucibles, ftratifying 'em lay upon lay with Powder of common Sulphur, filling yonr Crucibles until all the Copper Leaves be put in, as m Coap. 22. then cover well and lute the Crucibles, let tne lute dry, and put them into the Furnace of Chan. 52. coa-t (1 4 Uamn- 1^1 Of the Art of Glafs. tinuing a good Charcoal-Fire for two Hours , after- wards let them ftand and cool, then take off the Crucibles, and you'll find your Copper calcin'd and blackifh, inclining to a deev Purple Powder \ fearce it, and to each Pound add fix Ounces of Powder of Sulphur, mix ind put them into a round Mat-bottom Earthen Pot, ftrong enough to bear the Fire, lay up- on the Furnace a ftrong Earthen-Difli, fill it with ve- ry live Coals, and place your Pot thereon with the Copper-, when the Pot grows hot, and the Sulphur takes Fire, ftirring it with your long Iron Crook, left it mould flick to the Pot, or become concrete, continue thus till the Sulphur be all confumed and fmoaks no more \ take the Pot hot off the Fire, and empty the Copper out with an Iron-Ladle \ pound it well in a Brafs Mortar, and fearce it all finely, and you'll have a blackifh Powder, reiterate this Calcina- tion thrice, with the like proportion of Sulphur as before, and the third time let it remain until the Copper become Red and Yellow \ then take it off} and pound it in a Brafs-Mortar, and fearce it finely, pounding what remains over again, until] all be fear- ced, and you'll have a very well coloured Calx of Copper, moft effectual and proper for extracting this fair Vitriol of Copper, whereof we will give the Pre- paration in the next Chapter. CHAP. CLXXVII. To make Vitriol 0/ Venus without Corrofive. THOSE who make Vitriol of Venus, have not all one and the fame method, molt of them diflblve the Copper in difti lied Vinegar, Spirit of Nitre, or fome other Corrolive, for our part Water alone is the Of the Art of Glafs. 233 the Diflblvent, or rather Agent to extract the Tin- cture, as we fhall (hew. Take Glafs Cucurbits as many as willferve your tarn, to contain all your Calx of Copper, and put fix Pound of fair running Water to a Pound of Calx y into each Cucurbite •, place them on a moderate Sand- Furnace for four Hours, to evaporate until one third of the Water go oft^ let the Furnace cool, and af- terwards decant the remainder of the Water intoo- ther Glafs VefTels, and dry the Sediment in a Crucible on the Furnace *, let this Water fettle for two Days, and then you'll find in the bottom of the VefTel fmall Grains of Copper of a blackifh Colour } you mult filtrate, or ftrain the Water, and preferve all the Grains together, to add to the former Sediment, ha- ving firft well dried them, and keep the Water. Take all thefe Sediments, and to each Pound add fix Ounces of Powder of Sulphur as before, putting it into your flat-bottom'd Earthen Pot to calcine as in the former Chapter ; take care to ftir it well as long as the Sulphur fumes, and it ftands over the Fire, elfe it will ftick to the Pot and not calcine ; take it off and powder it immediately in a Brafs-Mortar, fearce the Powder, and you'll find it black • mix this 3gain with Sulphur proportionably fix Ounces to a Pound, and put it to calcine anew, ftirring it very well as before directed ; let it ftand a while on the Fire to alter the Matter from a Ruifet to a Yellowy then take it offand pound it inftantly in a Brafs Mor? tar before it cool, and then fearce it all finely over. Put a Pound of this Powder with fix Pound of Wa- ter, into each Cucurbit, and thefe Cucurbits on a ilow Sand-Fuinace, where let it ftand four Hours to the confumption of one third of your Water, which decant into other Veflels ; let it fettle two Days, then filtrate thefe Waters, and pour them among the former, gathering the Sediments that remain in the bot- 234 Of the Art of Glafs. bottom, and mix them with thefe in the Cucur- Dry the remaining Sediments as before, and repeat the calcination anew with the fame proportionable quantity of Sulphury then extract the Tincture, fil- trate and mix the filtrated and tinged Waters with the former, exaftly obferving the Order already taught, and continue to do thus fix times, fo will the Copper remaining In the bottom of your VefTels, be- come as it were a foft impure Earth deprived of all its bluenefs, which throw away as fit for nothing, for all the Vertueof the Copper is contained in the Waters ^ put thefe all carefully together to extract from them this precious Pltriol of Vtmu^ as hereaf- ter directed. CHAP. CLXXVIII. The Way to extract a fair Vitriol of Venus from our our Coloured Waters. OF all the Preparations to be taught for this rare Work, this isthemofteafie and vulgar, there being no more required, than to evaporate and cry- flalize the Matter } but as we are to leave nothing in the Dark, we refolve to explain every circumftance thereof for the benefit of our Readers, and fuch as wou'd know it. We have faid you mull mix together all your co- loured Waters, now we will tell you wiiat muft be done with them } you muft have a low Glafs-Cucur- bitthat will hold two * Paris Pints, or more, which put into a moderate Afh or Sand-Furnace ^ put therc- * London Quart i m Of the Art of Glafs. 1 3 5 in three Pound of the Tincture to evaporate gently, and put the reft into Glafs-Bottles fet round your Furnace, fo that they may be heated, and ready to fill the Cucurbit as faft as the Exhalation confumes its Tincture, which may be done with a Glafs Ladle, or the Bottles thcmfelves, left the Waters being cold might caufe the Cucurbit to burft, and fo all would be loft. Reduce ten Pound of this by evaporation to two and half, or three at moft, which will be a very high Tincture, pour it into two or three glazed Earthen VefTels, and place them all Night in a moift cold place, and you'll find the Vitriol at bottom, and flick- ing to the fides of the Velfcis, like little long Icicles, which will have the true colour of Oriental Eme- ralds, pour all the remaining Waters into the Cu- curbit, and dry the Vitriol that it may not flick, pre- ferving it in a clofe Veflel. Place your Cucurbit again on the Furnace to eva- porate anew at the confumption of half the Waters, and cryftalize the ftrong Tincture as before. Thus whilft any Water remains evaporate and cryftalize until all be confumed, to the end that none of this may be loft, whofe Vermes are infinitely ufeful, not only in the Art of Glafs, and the Mctallich, but in Phyfick too, for the curing of many Chronick Di- flempers, which we pafs over in filence, as foreign to our Subject, and continue to prefcribc the reft of this rare Work, to conceal nothing from the Curi- ous, but give them entire fatisfaction. CHAP. 1^6 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CLXXIX. The Method of drawing the Spirit of the Vitriol of Ve- nus which hat a wonderful Blue, and how to feparate the Caput Mortuum for tinging of Glafs. THE Caput Mortuum of Vitriol of Vtnm^ which wc prefcribe to tinge Glafs of a Sea-green, and whereof we difcourfed in Chap. 45. has ingaged us to give this moft excellent and hidden Secret of Na- ture, which the Philofophers have never explained but by ambiguous Riddles, and veiled Parables to conceal the Knowledge thereof from the Vul- gar. We confefs, 'tis not without fomc regret wc con- defcend to it in this Ungrateful Age, wherein very few deferve to be inftru&ed, or truly admire, and fo perfectly love the Myfteries of Sage Philofophy, as to imitate the Vcrtue and Charity of its devoted Profeflbrs} 'tis however in confideration, and for the fake of this fmall number of Votaries that we have explained and delivered many excellent things in this Book, which we might (but out of regard to fuch) have laid afide (as foreign to the An of Glafs) but our defire to pleafe them has promoted the opening thefe intricate Paths, and leaving them in a condition to be enlarged by our fmall Difcovery under the ferious Speculations, and fmart ilfiies of their own Wit. Now to finifh our precious Eflay, you mult take a Pound of this Vitriol into a Glafs Retort ftrongly lu- ted, as directed in Chap. 52. the lute being dry, fet the Retort in aSand-Furnace,fitting to it a very large Receiver, as directed for Aquafortis in that Chap- ter ; Of the Art of Glafs. 237 tor-, this done, kindle the Fire, and continue it gen- tle for four Hours to prevent a too excefllvc heat, which would drive out the Spirits impetuoufly, and Jo burft the Receiver, whereof great care mufr be taken not to fpoil all: As foon as the Spirits afcend like white Clouds, improve your Fire by degrees, until they difperfe and your Receiver clears again and cools, aud all the Spirit comes together: Then let the Fire go out of it felf, and after twenty four Hours, imkitc the Joynts, take away your Receiver, and put the Liquor it contains into Glafs-Bottles ffopt very rlufe with Glafs Stopples to prevent Air, which if they could draw, would difperfe it all by Exhala- tion. This choice Liquor has that Noble Blue which affords us wonderful Tinctures, and other ineftima- ble Operations, as well as fuch furprizing EfFe&s in Fhyfick, as cannot be equalled. The ftrength of this rich Liquor may be known by its very penetrating acid fmell, and if we were not afraid to prophanefo fublime a Myftery which Perfons much more Sage and Confiderate than we, have kept fo fecret : We would enlarge more on its excellent Qualities, and difperfe thofe Obfcuritics, but we mould look upon our felves unworthy of the. Light we have been able to acquire in this moft im- portant Matter, if we abandoned thofe Treafures to the ravage of the whole Earth, which ought only to be pofleft by the Sacred, Wife, and Studious Mem- bers of the Hermetick Science and Philofophy. But to return to our Caput Mortmtm of this preci- ous Vitriol, which has occafioned us to give its Pre- paration, and is what we make ufe of for this fine Water-colour, or Fgmarine on Glafs, you'll find it in the Retort, out of which the white Spirit was di- ftilled, whereof we have difcourfed already ; to get it you mult break the Retort, then reduce it to Pow- der, with a mixture of Z*fer 7 as divefted in c/7^.45. and 238 Of the Art of Glafs. and fo tinge ycnr Cryftalof an admirable Sea-green- colour. We were miilaken in Chap. 45. in faying that the Caput Mortuum mn ft be expofed to the Air before you do pound it with the Zaffer, for that is not alto- gether incumbent in tinging of Glafs, tho this expo- iing of it cannot but add fomcthing to the luftre, for it draws thereby with a certain Magnetick Property, the occult Spirit of the Air, and fo from a Black, of which it was before, becomes of a pale Blue-colour, and partly aflumes what it loft by Diftillation and Ex- traction of the Spirits, fo youmayfave a great deal of time and pains by this Preparation, to your no fmali Advantage, in expediting the Matter. Such as fhall comprehend the Vertues of thofe things we have (hewn in the four laft Capters, ought to be fccret, for many will read thefe things, and not apprehend, or only Laugh at them, whether it be that the Divine Power, for Reafons beft known to himfelf, will not let them difcern, or that they confide in a falfe Prefumption on their own Know- ledge, as beyond all other Mens. God has neverthe- lefs not confined to one only Wit, the whole Know- ledge, or all the fublime Excellencies of Nature, but on the contrary, to declare his great and unbounded Charity, permits it to be communicated to many for his greater Manifeftatlon and Glory \ yet he referves thofe more important Secrets to be revealed to his Faithful Servants, that fuch as would be acquainted with the fame Myfteries, may apply to this Father of Light, who alone can infpire them with fufficiency enough for penetrating into thefe which they could never do without his Afliftance. Now the true Method thereof is obvious to all the World, a Holy and Regular Life opens the Paflage, and continual Study and Application guides usj through ? Of the Art of Glafs. 239 through •, but wc muft add to thefe an upright Inten- tion of making good ufe hereof, that we may not wander^ a Love for our Neighbour conformable to the Will of God, to bring us to a fafe Port, an ex- tended Charity to the Poor, to lay open for us the Gate of Heaven - 7 and in a Word, an unlimited and immenfe Love for this Omnipotent Creator, Eternal^ and hnomprehenfible, to Hand us to his very Throne : This is the prevailing Attractive, which all the Ju- dicious Philofophers made ufe of to draw down this Divine Intelligence, and which I moft heartily wifh to all that would imitate them. The End of the Sixth Book. O F 24.0 OF THE ART O F GLASS- BOOK VII. Containing the Way to Enamel in all Sorts of Colours on Gold and other Metals : The Order of the Fire and Furnace : The Preparation of Colours for Ponrtraying with Enamel, and how to do it. CHAP. CLXXX. THO this Undertaking depends not altoge- ther on our Art of Glafs, being no more than an Application of Matters delivered in the Sixth Book ^ however we refolve to lay down this Manner of Enameling and Pourtraying on Metals, to bring this our Work to an higher perfe&ion. The Of the Art of Glafs. 1 4 1 The Ancient Works of Enamel on Metals, were only of Black and White, with fomefew Tinges of Carnation, or Flefh-colour, as may be feen in the Linage Enamel , in Francis the Firffs Time it became more improv'd, and they made life of Lights and Shadows, but the Enamel on Gold was of no better I Stuff than that on Copper, and all the Works of it . on Gold, Silver, and Copper, were of Tranfparent \ Mattery fuchas wrought it on thick, couched each Colour by it felf, as is done now a Days in Enamel- ing fome particular Pieces of Relief, and not other- wife. Since then they have found out the w r ay of Ena- meling with opaque, and thick ftuffj and the Art of compounding the Colours, is much more improve- ing and handfomer than that of the Ancients, as is viiible in all our Modern Works j but we mult with- out all Exception, own the fair Works upon Gold, reprefenting Pourtraitures, and entire Hiftories, fo neatly, and to the Life, and coveted as much as Pi- cture done in Oyl, over which it has the advantage of Natural Luflre and Varnifh, which is never tar- nidied, to be the Invention of this latter Age, and the Improvements we owe to the Study of the French therein. All forts of Enamel arc not to be promifcuoufly employed on all forts of Metal ; Gold which perfect- ly bears with as well all the Opaque as Tranfparent, cannot agree with clear Purple, its Yellow mightily changing the Colour thereof, and produces but a ve- ry ill Fancy \ on the other fide, this Purple is very fine on Silver ; fo the Egmarine, the Azure, and Green, all other Colours, as well clear us Opaque, dilagreeing therewith, and Copper fuits with every thick Enamel, but cannot endure the Limpid, unlcfs prepared for it beforehand, as fhall be directed in due place. R Obfcrve 24^ 0/ the Art of Glafs. Obferve that good Enamel mull; be hard £ lading, fuchas is foft being full of Lead, and fubj to change Colour, eafily becoming fullied and fo of the clear Enamel fome is harder, fome fbfti the hardeft is always belt, however even of th there is choice •, fome lofe colour in the Fire, Co are more or lefs lively and fparkling, but if you c ploy conftantly fuch as we have prefcribed in < Sixth Book, you'll never be expofed to thofe Inc< veniencies ; for the Ingredients being perfectly cle fed, will endure all degrees of Fire, any change Colour or Quality not enfuing. CHAP. CLXXXI. Of the Furnace for Enameling and Pourtraying. TH£ Enameling Of Metals, as well as the louring of the Stuffy cannot be effe&ed wi out Fire, and is wholly different in this point fr Painting with theufual Colours in Oyl, which r be dried in the Air only, without other help. It would be very hard to believe the fire wc not fpoil the mixture of the Colours, if our daily perience which we made, did not vouch the contra however care muft: be taken not to let the Work h too much time, but draw it out as loon as you fin polifht. The Fire muft be Rcverberatory, or rathei SupprefTion, and never to be under the Stuff; 'tis fame as is ufed for cleanfing of Metals, whethei Mints or Goldfmiths Shops, which is very familia all the World. ■P- 2 43 ^A The mouth, of the. Ttu'hacc £ 'The. Cover C *4n iron. Pa&L D The enamel to he meltej. JE The Crate-r r The inner part of* the Tuituisc Of the Art of Glafs. 043 You muft have a Furnace round or fquare, either of Iron or Earth, it's no great matter, how (or whether of thefe) it is, which mult be hollow in the middle, to contain the Work with a good Charcoal- fire all about, arid over it, to make it melt the bet- ter •, artd you mult have it fo as to beableto take your SturTout, and put it in again, as occafion requires : Vou may, for better conveniency, make ule of a Goidfmith's Muffle •, 'tis a fmall Arch made of Cru- cible Earth, in the fhape of half a Crucible, cut length- wife,and they place it on the Area or Floor of the Furnace, the Opening of it lying juft againft the Mouth of the Furnace, to put in and draw out the Work eafiiy •, and for more conveniency they place a fmall Grate over it, which muft: not touch it, for fear of breaking it j and on this Grate make a good Fire, and fo round about the Muffle, to heat the hollow very well, under which they put the Work to be Enamel'd and Painted - and the ElTays, or Tri- als they have a mind to make on a little Iron- Shovel, to draw the eafier out •, but for making Ef- fays of Ingredients for Enamel, it muft be a little Blade of White Enamel, which ought to be provi- ded purpofely for that ufe CHAP. CLXXXII. The Way to Enamel Gold. WE have already faid, that Gold, Silver, and Red Copper may be Enamel'd j now to make true Work, you muft ufe only pure Goldj becaufe Silver makes White Enamel appear Yelldw* and Copper rifes in Scales, and makes Vapours ; for tho all Enamel (ticks to it* yet it is but very irtiperfe&ly, R Z and 1 44 Of the Art of G lafs. and may be eafily divided and peeled off again •, be fides, the Colours are fo wretched on it, and lofi much of their Charm and Luftre by the Impurity o that Metal. Therefore if you would have good Work, le Gold only be your Subject, and of the pureft, if yoi employ clear Enamel, becaufe on impure Gold the) grow dull, and become imperfect , that is to fay there appears with this a' certain obfeure and Cloud] Vapour in the Enamel, which deadens and takes a Way the Life of its Colour. The Gold Plate ought to be rifing, and when it i forged very even, the Goldfmiths apply white Ena> mel over and under it, tho it is to be Wrought but or one fide ; but this is ncccflary for twoReafons : Firft Becaufe the Work is neater and fairer for it : And a- gain, Becaufe if it were only EnamePd on one fide the Fire would fwell it, and fo make it rife, and thai in Bubbles •, becaufe it is always as it were torment- ed, efpecially when the Pieces are great, and th< Enamel carelelly laid on ^ this makes it produce Bli- fterings, which disfigure the Work } the French Chy- mifts call fuch Vcgeter^ but their Goldfmiths Petit, Oeuillets : This disfiguring of the Work, you maj avoid, by laying Enamel on both fides of the Plate of Gold, and thicker over than under, this wili keep it equal and even on both fides, the firft la^ of White Enamel remaining imooth in this conditio on, ferves for a Field to place all your other Colour^ on as we will further difcourfe of in the Art of Pour-i traying. Oyf of Spike is ufed for diflblving thick and opaqud Enamel before it can be applied •, for the TranfpaJ rent you need ufe nothing but fair Water, as wj (hall (hew in Chap. 185. and then 'tis couched flat an bordered with the Metal, and fometimes we don'l border at all, the Field being all Enamel, but this is trouJ Of the Art of Glafs. 045 ^roublefome, bccaufe the Limpid Enamels as they fnelt, often mix, and fo coafounid the Colours, (which conftantly happens when the { Pieces are nail. Red Enamels are not fo,uaiefs by chance, and come generally Yellowifh ovt or the Fire; affoon as 'tis ap- plied to the Gold, it alters the Colour ; one may foon bring it to a perfecl: Red Enamel, by turning it at the Mouth of your Furnace, when you are taking it out from the Fire •, and then it is that the Work* men fay they make it Red, and give it its compleat Colour. Gold, as we have already faid, admits of all forts of Enamel, clear or opaque, bright Purple excep- ted, which is altered by the Yellow-colour of the Gold, and does not take fo good effedt there, as on Shiver, en which it ought frill to be ufed. The Way of working every fort of Enamel, is alike:, not to make any ufelefs Repetitions, we will fatisfie our felves only to advife you to employ all thofe Ena- mels prefcribed in the Sixth Book, which have every illulrratingand convenient Property to bewimedfor in this Work. CHAP. CLXXXIII. To Enamel on Silver* WE have already taken notice in our former Chapter, that Silver agrees not with all forts of Enamel, as Gold. We repeat it here again to pi e- ventthe ufe of any bat filch as lerve to produce per- fect and agreeable Effects. You are to make leair. ufe of White Enam A on ilver, bccaufe there it becomes Yellowifh, auiun- R 3 pleating., 1^6 Of the Art of Glafs. pleafing, but nothing can fuit better with it, than bright Purple, Green, Blue, and Egmarine, be- cause the Whitenefs of the Silver is then clearly emi- nent, and gives its juft fplendour. The Work and manner of Enameling on Silver, is no way different from that of Gold, in forging the Plates evenly to prepare 'em tor the Enamel, you may make ufe of White on the uoder fide, fince the Enamel there ferves only to qualifie the Rifings and Difturbings of the Metal in the Furnace,which would caufe unevennefs, or difagrcements in the furface, and prevent its becoming juft and handfome. We need not repeat again that way of placing the Enamel on your Plates of Gold or Silver, and fo to put them into your little reverberatory Furnace fpo- ken of in Chap. 1 8 1 . to melt, and as foon as polilhed to be taken from the Fire. CHAP. CLXXX1V. To Enamel on Copper. THO we have before touched upon the way of Enameling on Copper, yet left the Reader fhould too flightly apprehend it, as not in order, or a diftinct Chapter, therefore we are obliged to enter it here to avoid Imperfection. The lefsufe is made of this Metal in this Work the better, for the Enamel never fticks to it perfectly, but is cafily fcaled, divided, and broke off^ which ne- ver happens to Gold} belides, the Copper is fo im- pure, that its Fumes deftroy the Beauty of the Ena- mel fo much in the Furnace, that they quite lofe their Charm and Splendour by the Malignity of thofe Va-' pours. Tho Of the Art of Glajs. 247 Tho the Copper receives eafily all thick or dark Enamel^ it can't be brought fo well to endure the clear and limpid ; now if you would make ufe of thefe laft, you muft firft lay a lay of Green, or Black, and thereon a Leaf of Silver to receive the Enamel fuitable for that Metal mentioned in the for- mer Chapter •, fo that in the main 'tis much better to make ufe of Silver for the Tranfparent Enamels, fmce the Copper is fo apt to foul, and the charge in cither much the feme. In Enameling on Copper, you muft take a Plate ot red Copper forged fmooth, and even applying your Enamel of what Colour you defire above and under the Plate as before > then put this into the reverbera- tory Furnace, and when it receives its polifhing, draw it out. CHAP. CLXXXV T To prepare the Enamel for the Metals, BEFORE you apply your Enamel on the Metaj, you muft give it this little Preparation, which is the eafiefh and beft approv'don by the Goldfmith;, we will inftance it in White Enamel, becaufe that is more generally made ufe of than any other. Take White Enamel of tfie Siyh Book, Chap. 1+9- pulverize it very fine, pour o.n it a little Ac^a fortu, and let it afterward^ purifie and refine in a fmall Glafs Cucurbit. Warn it afterwards often in Fair- Water, dry and kee p it in a clofe V elfel for ufe. To make ufe Qf it, firft pound a quantity thereof in a Stone Mortar, wetting it with a little Water, and fo fpread it on the Plates, and into \hc furnace with it as before. "R4 Thu ^ 248 Of the Art of Glafs. Thus do with all your clear and tranfparent Ena- mels, and you'll have all your things in a readinefs to go on with your Work as you- think convenient. C H A P. CLXXXVI. To prepare the. Colours for Painting on Enamel. ^TOTHI^ T G can be more fplendid than the 7. \ on Enamel, and for this nft mu ft be chofea the livclieft and moft Noble Colours, and fuch as will ea- fily thrifts and melt. All the.fe aiTumed throughout the Sixth Book, are as equally fufficient for this, as for Enameling \ if you grind them firft on your Marble with the belt Oyl of 9 p ih\ or mix 'em together with the other Ingredients for that purpofe > as we fhall give a fuller account in the next Chapter, and of all the Matters to be nfed with calcined Enamels, which iervc to make up the Paint for Enamel mixing them well together as Pain- ters do on their Pallets : When you want fome Co- lours of Enamel, you may with Blue and Yellow make a good tair Green \ a Bine and Red mixt, will produce a fine Violet; a Red and White creates a Rofe-colour:, a Black and White forms a gallant Gray, and fb or others. Every Workman has his own Secret, and peculiar way oi" Working, but \\\:>\\ or them make ufe of Tora-lic for varniihiim their Colours, which has an ill effect, becaufe of too much Lead, which is not per- fect! v p> rgedoiT:, this leiicnsthe Life and Splendour, aid it always continues as it were tarnilhed, cloudy, and dull. But our Enamel being well refined, will produce Work fo fine and agreeable, that ? tisnot poilible to find Of the Art of Glafs. H9 find any thins; fo illuftrious and accomplitdit •, and fuch as for their one private diverfion, would work herein, and have not the conveniency of a Glafs- houfe, may eafily he furntfhed, hy proceeding, to make one according to the directions already Notwithftanding the fufficiency of our Enamel for affording all forts of Colours and Tinges in painting on Enamel, we will yet prefcribe other means for this, no way infer iour thereto, to anfwer the Advan- tage' and Curiofity of thofe who Work at this Excel- lent Art. CHAP. CLXXXVII. ■ ■ T To make JVhite for Painting on ? Enamel. HE belt Workmen, for the molt part, ufe the White Enamel .ground, which they, can ma- nage with addrefs enough to heighten and illuftrate their Lights, which. is necefTary to be done to all their Colours, as in Miniature : But as it is difficult to pre- fcrve the Ground juftly for improving thofe other Colours, and Ordering the Compofitions (all one as in Carnation) you muft take of our Cryftal ground prepared with Tin and Lead purged and refined as mCmp. 158. or rather of our Milk-colour Enamel in Cvap,\ 59. which is the faired can be made \ cleanfe it with Aymfonis, walh, dry, and grind it after- wards with Oyl of Spike. Or you may prepare another White Ground with- out Lead, thus : Take very pure Tin calcined, as in the.Chapter aforcfaid, .and let it vitriikiii a Glals- houfePot, with eight times as much Cryltal Hit, as we have directed the Preparation in Cqap. 6. pulverize thefe 550 Of the Art of Glafs, thefc very fine, and proceed precifely according to Prefcription for Purification, &c. in Chap. 1 58. CHAP. CLXXXVIH. To make a Black for fainting on Enamel. TWO the Black Enamels prefcribed in Chap. 1 55. and thofe fucceeding it may ferve to Paint on Enamel with this Colour, without any other Prepa- ration than grinding it with Oyl of Spike •, yet we will add here another Black no lefs excellent and fine, arifing from equal parts of Black-Enamel, and Pere* grine well calcined, mix and reduce them to an im- palpable Powder, and then apply Oyl of Spike, and you'll have a Colour which will take with great faci- lity on the Enamel. CHAP. CLXXXIX. A Yellow for Taint on Enamel. WE will only make ufe of our Enamel, prepa- red in Chap. 162. mixt and purified with Aqua fonts, and after warned in clean Water, as in Chap. 185. dry and grind this Powder with Oyl of Spike on your Marble, and "'tis fit for ufe. With this Yellow and a Blue, as we have already hinted* may be made a fair Green ^ but thofe Enamels defcri bed in Chap. 153. and the fucceeding, are fo juft and fine, that 'tis needlefs to ufe any other for that purpofe \ this Preparation for the Yellow here laid down is fuf- ficient alfo for it, without any further trouble. CHAP. Of the ArtofGkfs. 25 r CHAP. CXC. A Blue to paint on Enamel. THE Enamels of this Colour afligned in Chap. 1 Toble Art of Limn- ing. CHAP. a 5 2 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CXCI. A Red Taint for Enamel. THere can nothing exceed the Perfection of our Enamels of this Colour, taught in eight feveral Chapters of the Sixth Book ; the like may be faid of our Blood-colour, Rubies, Rof and Carbuncle, which is the mofr exalted Ingredient for Enameling Metal, or making Paint on Enamel ; andthofe who pra&ife this fine Art, ufeno other than that of the Glafs-houfe, or fuch as they make accordingly. Now this Red Enamel is prepared as the other Colours with Aqua- fortis to purifie it, wafh'd, dry'd, and ground with Oyl of Spike for your ufe. There is yet another tolerable Red, which they Paint with on Enamel, in which is employed calcined Gold ; but this would be much more improved, if inlread of their Rocai'llc they made ufe of our Matter, made of Cryftal and Suturnus Glorificatm in Chap. 113. or of our principal prepared Powder prefcribed all along the Sixth Book, for thefe are exceeding well pu- rified, whereas the Pocaillc has too great a Surcharge of Lead, the Impurity whereof always renders the Work defective. See here their way of calcining Gold, w r hich is not near fo fine as that we have given Chap. 1 1 5. and as there are an hundred feveral ways, fo every Man makes ufe of his own as molt excellent, and thinks it better than another's. One takes an Ounce of fine Gold in very thin Plates, thefe dilTolved in eight Ounces of A^m-fortis^ and regulated with Sal- Armomach^ or old itrong Salt, in a fmall Glafs Matrafs, this is put into a Glais-Cu- curbit, Of the Art of Glafs. $53 tnrbit, wherein was already pour'd eight Paris Pints of Spring- Water, and fix Ounces of Mercury, the Cucurbit is placed on a ftill Fire, and after four and twenty Hours the Gold defcends to the bottom in a light Land-red Powder, then the Water is poured off leifurely into an earthen glazed Receiver, or Pan,' and the Powder gathered and dryed by a moderate heat, and with aShamois Skin they feparate the Mer- cury from the Gold, and grind this Powder with twice its weight of Flowers of Sulphur together, and then put all into a Crucible over a fmall Fire, where the Sulphur will communicate it felf with the reft, and then evaporating they find the Powder fomewhat ruddy, which ground with Rocaille, is what they make ufe of on the Enamel. We own this Calcination to be tolerable as to the Gold, but as for mixing the Calx with the Rocai!le y without melting them together to incorporate is dis- putable : We believe that in grinding them together with Oyl of Spike, they may in fome fort incorporate as other Colours, but can never fo perfectly unite } befides, the Cryftal Matter does not fo well receive the Colour of the Gold this way, as if it were done by fufion. Others make Red inclining to Vermilion, which they ufe in Painting after this manner. Take Vitriol calcined in two Crucibles well luted together,and fet for an Hour over a How Fire } then purge it with Aqua-fortis, wafh it in fair Water, and grind it with Oyl of Spike as before, and fbmake ufe of it for Ena- mel. All Red Enamel which is good, ought to be hard, and not eaflly confumed in the Fire j for that which is otherwife, contains much Lead, and foon becomes dull and fullied, and is not of fo killing a fubftance, which the Workmen ought to be cautious of, o To j>54 Of the Art of Ghfs. • Tofinifhthe Preparation of Egttntfi and before the manner of painting 'em is prefci ibed, take no- tice, that all the Colours before mentioned,which are not pure Enamel, ought to be incorporated with a Cryftalline Matter, fuch as we prefcribed in Cbap. 148. to the end they may vitrifie the better, which elfc they'll not eafily do, tho molt Workmen make ufe of their Rocai)le, whether to avoid the trouble of making (or that they are ignorant how to prepare) a better Matter ; and this has obliged us to give feve- ral ways very good and true for their purpofc to make fine and perfed Work by^ CHAR CXClt. The Way to Palm on Enamel. ripHIS Art is revered by all Nations, 'tis fo fine \^ and fo excellent,that the firft and Nobleft Per- fons of the World pra&ife in it, as we have faid elfewhere : It is certain that the Art of painting on Enamel is modern, but no lefs eftimable for that, fince its effects are fo wonderfully beautiful, fo infi- nitely lafting, of fo Natural a Glofs, and their Splen- dour never to be defaced. If it were poffible to make large Works of Enamel, as is done in Picture, they would be ineftimable be- caufe of their Luftre, and fo far furpafs what Anti- quity has had fuch great refpeft for, and which thefe latter Ages ftill carefs with extraordinary efteem. This way of painting on Enamel, feems much more difficult than Limning •, Practice however convinces us, that they are equally eafie, and we can with as little trouble reprefent any Hiftory on Enamel, as in Limning; the difference lies only in preparing the Colours^ Of the Art of Glafs. 255 Colours, which is not done the fame way *, for we dry and varnifh our Enamel-paint by Fire, whereat that in Limning is done by the Air. To paint on Enamel, you muft have a Plate of Gold enamel'd with White, on which delineate and pourtray your Defign. This done, draw it over a- gain in dark Red : The Piece being perfe&ly done of% and the Lines compleat to the Subjcft, fet the Tablet, or Piece in the Muffle, on a reverberatory Fire, to fettle as before dire&ed. Your Tablet being taken out, apply the Colours in a juft order as in Limning, with this difference on- ly, that here you make your White Ground ferve for filling, where that Colour is required to let off the heightnings and luftre of the Lights as is done in Miniature ^ and becaufe it mightily contributes to the heightening thereof in the other Colours as to im- proving their Lights, we have given a moll: excellent ReceipUn Chap. 1 87. which very excellently ferves upon thisoccafion. When the Piece is thus finifhed, put it again into the Furnace to fix the Colours, and as foon as you perceive it vafnilh orpolifh, draw it out leaft the Colours mix and fpoil each other. You may take out the Work again, and revife it as often as you pleafe, only putting it ftill into the Furnace until it receives its juft Glofs, &c . This way of renewing and reviling the Tables, is done in Limning with Oyl ; and the Painters obferve that the Pieces muft not be handled until they are well dry'd in the Air, fo thole in Enamel muft be let alone until they receive their perfection from the Fire. This is all to be obferved in Painting on Enamel j it remains only for us to {hew how to prepare your dark Red for tracing the Defign * you may have it thus. Takt * 56 .OftheArtofGlafs. Take theG*p#r Mortuum which remains in the Re- tort, after the Aqna-fortis is made ot your Pi>™/ and Nitre, grind it with Oyl of Spik^ and fo you have the dark Red ready for your ufe ; or you mav make it with Cram Munis, ground with Oyl of Spike. The End of the Seventh Book. o F 157 O F T H E ART O F GLASS. BOOK VIII. Containing the Way to make China, or fine Earthen Ware \ how to Enamel, Paint, and Gild them. CHAP. CXCIII. POrcelaine, Fayence, China, or fine Earthen - Ware, is cnamePd with our White Stutl^ which we have already prefcribed for Metals-, and its Painting the fame, and of fuch Colours as we have propofed for Enamels in the foregoing Book, and this obliges us to difcourfe thereof in this our eighth Book. S The 158 Of the Art of G lafs. The Cuftom of enameling on Ware, is of greater Antiquity than that on Metals, for in the time of Porcenna, who generoufly undertook the Reftau- ration of Tkrqmh to the Roman Government in the ConfulatC Q&Valer. Publicola and Horat. PulviUm Ann. Mund. 3444, five hundred and four Years before the coming of Jefus Chrift,or thereabouts, the practice of enameling on Ware was ufed in the Eftates of that Prince *, and what gives us very good reafon to be- lieve this is the Name Porcelaine, which has an Affi- nity to Porcenna, tho altered by the corruption of Time, fo it is alfo called fayence from Fayence in the Dutchy of Vrbin, where in the Time of Michael Ange, and Raphael Vrbain, this Art was pradtifed. And as the Secrets of Nature arc daily more and more difcovered, fo has time employed the Invention of Man to improve this, and make it more excellent, not only condefcending to enameling, but proceed- ing alfo to Painting and pourtraying thereon feveral Curiofities, to which at length is added the Orna- ments of Gilding. Thefe Pieces of Ware are of a very general ufc 0- ver all the World, as for Ornaments over Chimney- pieces, on Cabinets and Tables, or Boards. The choiceft come to us from China, and next to thofe are clone at St. Clovod and Rouen ; but there are very good made in Holland, at Savonm in Italy, and feveral other places in France. The painting and enameling on thefe, is what we are properly obliged to take notice of in our Art \ however we fhall flightly touch upon the Compoliti- on and Molding the Ware, and for this we will pre- fcribe fine and delicate Methods fufficient enough to anfwer the Satisfaction of fuch as employ themfelves in this Art, and of thofe Perfons whofe Curiofity leads them to enquire after things, whereof they are not alrcadv informed. C H A P.i Of the Art of Glafs. 259 CHAP. CXCIV. The Fnrnacefor making tof 'China, MUST be large,withan Opening proportioned to the Veflel you are to place therein ^ of thefc there are feveral forts, but the moft commodious muft be made as follows. You may fhape this Furnace round or fquare, but thefquare is bcft, becaufe of the Openings it muft be made of good Brick and filch Stuff as can moftly en- dure the Fire, of what bignefs you pleafe, with three Divifious } the loweft for the Afhes muft be a Foot high, that the Air may be communicated through its Opening to the Fire } the middle Story is for the Fire, and muft be underlaid with a very good Grate to fe- parate it from the under Story, with an Opening for the Fuel, and be vaulted above about a Foot in heighth : According to the Size of your Furnace this Vault mult be made like that of an Oven, and have an Hole in the middle of the fame fhape as the Furnace, round or fqilare, and proportioned to its bignefs, through which the Flame may tranfmit it felfto the uppermoft Story, where the VeiTels are put to bake in :, this laft Story is to be at lealt two Foot high, and its Opening fourteen or fifteen Inches, to put and draw the VefTels eafily in and out j the top muft be vaulted too with fuch a round or fquare hole, and over that a Funnel, for the conveniency of the Flame and Smoak which it draws out. All the Opening, efpecially the two uppermoft, mult be of ftrong Brick, or Crucible Earth, or ra- ther of Iron, well luted within lide, which muftfhut and open calily, and be very exa£t and fit, that the S 2 Fire «6o Of the Art of Glaft. Fire mav not fuck in any cold Air, which might break theVeilcls. This Furnace will fervealfo for many other ufes, as to Melt, Reverberate, Calcine, Cement, and feve- ral forts of Works in the Laboratory of Cbimifiry \ becaul ' degr Fire may be' found by Lp of the lower Opening, and the Funnel of the Chimney. You may elfe for Baking your China, make ule of the Furnace hereafter deftribed in. Chap. 102. where wedifcourfeof Painting on Glafs, putting thereinto your Veflt'lof Cruqble-Earth for Baking the Ware in, and then cover'd, over with a vaulted Coverlid, with a hole at top to let out the Flame and Smoak of the Reverberatory Fire ; for this reafon there will be no occaiion in this fort of Furnace for any other Open- ing, becaufethe Baking Veffels with your Ware, are Fut in a top before the Coverlid is laid on, and fo the ire circulates about it, and it becomes very Red, whereby the China-VJare is Baked, as is done in Ba- king of Pipes. CHAP. CXCV. To make your Stuff for China-Warc. Hp'HE Compofition for this rauft be very fine, be- J_ caufe of the Ware, and not fuch as is ufed for ordinary Veffels, we will therefore prefcribe the Manner of making it, to prevent the unfuccefsful Attempts of fuch as may be ignorant. For this you mult take of Shells of every fort which are White and Tranfparent, grind them well on a Marble, then fearce arid reduce them to an im- palpable Powder. To Of the Art of Glafs. a6i To make your Pafte of this Powder, firft diffolve an Ounce of very white Gum-Arabkk in a Pail of Watery when 'tis well diflolved and mi \'t with the Water, diflblve therein about a quarter as much Qnick-Lme as your Powder weighs, then ftir and mix it very well, and afterwards put in the Powder and ftir all together, and knead it as they do Mortar } of this Stuff" form your VeiFcIs according to the diffe- rent forts you defire, let them half dry, or more, jn the Air, before you poliih them with your fniooth Inflrument of Copper, or Iron for that purpofe, and fo leave 'em until they dry throughly : Being very well fmoothed and dried, glaze them over with your White Enamel-) prepared as we'll dlr <\\a the next Chapter, and fo fet them in the. Furnace to Bake and finifn, wfyere having kept theiU a convenient time, let the Fire go out or 'its fel I the Furnace is cold, take cm out and paint them and put them in a- gaintoBakc a fecond time, obfefving what directi- ons we have alread , ^''-cn. concerning thefe Matters, and when the Fir e is gone out, and the Furnace cole-, yon have the Ware in perfection ready to take oat for uFe. You may ma' c your tfew-Ware alfo of pure Earth *, Jet it not be red tho ? but White or Gray :, you may try the fuiFciency of it after 'tis prepared, by Baking fomc Beforehand, and when it comes out of the Fur- nace found and uncraeked, 'tis good and fit for your purpofe. The Preparation confifts in drying it well, and re- ducing it to a very line Powder:, then pitt it into fair Water, wherein has been already diiFolved a little Gum-Arabick j but molt of thole that make it, employ only Water without Gum ^ after this you may ii ike your Dimes, fet 'em to dry, Poliih, Dry, Glaze, Bake, Paint, and finilh them as before , all which, S 3 thofe 1&1 Of the Art of Glafs. thofe who work at them know better than I can ex- prefs it. CHAP. CXCVI. How to Enamel the China. FOR this take of our Milk-white Enamel Chap.i 49. grind it very fine, as Painters do their Colours \ put the Powder afterwards into a Glafs-Cucurbit, pouring fome A^ua-forti* thereon , let itdigeft a lit- tle tocleanfe off its Impurities, and become fine and tranfparent ^ then pour off the Aqua-jorti$, warning the Powder in Water over and over again, grind it afterwards with a little Gum-Water on your Mar- ble, and fo glaze the VefTels with it within and with- out, dry them in the Air, and Bake them as before in the Furnace. Or you may heat the VefTels to a Rcdnefs in the Furnace, and melt the Enamel •, when it is in a perfedf. Fufion, dip the fmaller VefTels therein, and pour of it on the larger, for they will take no more on them than will ferve them, Tet them by turns in the Fur- nace, flopping it very well to avoid the Air : Bake, cool your Furnace, and finifh them as before, then take out the Difhes, Paint and Bake them over again, obferving all our former Directions. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs: 263 CHAP. CXCVII. To paint the China. THIS is done as the Enamel difcourfed of in Chap. 192. but much moreeafily, the Figures being only juft daflit over in comparison to them - 7 however you muft grind your Colours with Oyl of Spike on the Marble, as we have faid already, and fo paint on the Dimes Story, Landfcape, or any other Fancy, but you muft never expeel: to have them thereon fo compleat and handfome, as thofe painted on the enamePd Plates, becaufc the former are fi- nifht ftanding, and fo enlarge in length or breadth, whereas the other are done on flats., and lying \ be- fides the Difhes are for the moft part round, and not fo cafily painted ^ for if they cou'd be as neatly done as the Enamel, they would be exceflive dear. CHAP. CXCVIIL To Gild China. YOU mult firft grind fome Shade-Earth on a Marble, with Linfecd-Oyl^ prepared as mall be fhewn in Chap. 200. with which trace out your Fi- gures, which muft be two whole Days a dryings af- ter this apply very thin Leaf-Gold, and with a (harp Graver, fhape the Figures, and then put the Diihe^ in an Oven, asfoon as the Batch of Bread is drawn out, let the Heat be no greater than one's Hani ma endure, elfe the Velfels would crack h l ea V e them i;i S4 it 064 Of the Art of Glafi. it for two or three Hours or more, if the Oven be not too hot j you may elfc make ufc of our own Furnace, by giving it the fame moderate degree of heat, as experienced Perfons' are well acquainted with. CHAP. CXCIX. Another Way. THIS is much more handfome and lively, befide* that it cannot be effaced 5 you may with it gild Veflels entirely, or border, or give them any luirrc you think convenient for Ornament, and it will look as well as fine Gold. You muft firft wet over the Places you would gift" with Gum-Water lightly, then apply your Leaves, and fo let them dry, this is enough for plain Gilding : but if you would have it carved, or figured, yoi muft make ufe of a Steel-Graver, and afterward? "bath the Gold with Water, wherein Borax Tia' been diflolved, powdering it in the mean time with Cryftaline Powder, or Milk-white Enamc reduced to a very fine Powder; then fet the Dill on a Reverberator^ Fire to melt and be polifht thus you'll have as fine a piece of Ware as cm be. CHAP Of the Art of Glafs. a 6 5 CHAP. CC. The Way to prepare Linfced-Oyl fir Gliding of China. ITisbut juftwe fhould diicharge our Promi fc of prefcribing this Preparation. Take a Paris Pint 0+ Linfeed-Oyl in an Earthen Pot which will hold about two Paris Pints, put this on a Fire, and when it begins to boil throw in twice the biguefs of a fmal) Egg of Gum-Ariihick pulveri- sed, ftir ;; : 1 well until it be diilblvcd, then put in an Onion of an ordinary li/c, and the like weight of Garlick cut final! ; when the Oyl boils well, and fwellsup by the force of the good Fire which muft be underneath, pour it out into another fuch Pot, and fo in and out of each Pot to the other until all be very well mixed; then put it on the Fire again, ad- ding half an Egg-fhell of Powder L of Majtick, and ftir it very well ^ as foon as it boils again, it will foam and have a great Froth which muft be fcummed off^ and then take it ofFthc Fire and brew the Ingre- dients together with the two Pots as before, continue to do thus with it, or ftir it on the Fire until it rife no more. This done, take a very dry Toaft of White Bead to takeoffthe Greafe(the Oyl itill boiling) and wiien you put intheToaft, you muft at the fame time put infome Pin-Duft^ ftir all well together and let it ftand for twenty tour Hours alter wards, fl rain the Oyl through a Linen-cloth, in which is fome very fine Sand, the better to lilt; ate it, and take off the Greafe, and fo you'll have it pure and clear, which Bottle up for your life. Or ^66 Of the Art of Glafs. Or you may (both ways being good enough J firfl mix with the Oyl two Ounces of Gold Litharge pul- verized, adding the Gum-Arabick as foon as it be- gins to boil, andtopurifie it let it filter through a Linen-cloth full of Sand, while it's hot, into a Glafs- Bottle, wherein is already half an Ounce of fine Camphire Powder, making the Bottle very well un- til the Oyl be cold •, afterwards lay it in the Sun for fifteen Days, and it will be entirely purged, and the longer 'tis kept will be the better. This is all we have to fay at prefent about China- Ware, until we have further enlarged our Know- ledge in the Matter, which we have not much ftu- dy'd, becaufe we did not intend to treat of it } how- ever we afterwards thought it incumbent on us fo to difcourfe thereof as an Art dependant on ours } and we hope the Reader will take this in good part, until we may give him fomething more at large. O F 167 OF THE ART F GLASS. BOOK IX. Shewing the Method of Drawing all forts of Story, or Fi- gttre, on Glafs, in Paint, Gilding, Marbling, &c. CHAP. CCI. THE Art of Painting has been ftill fo Noble and Excellent, that all thofe great Perfons, who have practifed it, were always diftin- guifht among the moll eminent of their Age ; thofe celebrated Pieces we have of it in our Days, to the Ornament and Admiration of all Europe, has fetled fo great a Veneration for their Memory, as will eter- nize it to Poflerity. The >68 Of the Art of Glafs. The Dorians, Corinth' an. ^ Ionian s, and Romans^ were the People that paid the moll efteemto this No- ble Art, for which they conceited fo great Opinion and Delight, that they lookt upon the famous Pain- ters of their Time as Demi-Gods, and ranged them among the fir ft and moll Learned Men in the World. The Ancient; did not only pay a Deference and Honour to the Nobility and Iliuftrious Birth of Great Men, but to their Worth and Vertue too : Hence the Athenians erected a Statue in Memory of zs£fop y who was but a poor Slave : Would they have done it i; : this eminently IngeriiouVFellow had not pollefled fo many excellent Parts ? No, 'twas. not for the f is Picture which was too deformed and i ; ill or Charm 'cm, but to convince Poftcrity how to Glory is not fhut up from the meaner Perfbns. Can there be any thing more EaKiiig, or complcat, than the Natural Imitations which iifue from Paint- ing ? Has Nature anything more considerably admi- rable? Do we not fee her difplay'd in the Pourtraits •of thofc Excellent Mailers, who with fo much Art and Delicacy have expreif. all whatever fhe has pro- duced in this fublunary inferiour Orb, fo that 'tis 'riot poflible to fee them without admiring, or to ad- j mire them without Aftonifhmenf. What wonderful Fancies too have they drawn from the Superiour and Heavenly ! They, hay.e ,fo lively fliewn thcRifingand Setting Sun, Night and Day, the Face of Heaven fomctimes Calm and Serene, and again darkned with Clouds, the^Thuhdcr Showers, Storms and Seas raging, with all tlieir Wrecks, ana in the Microcofm, or little World of Man, they have cxprcft his Joy, Sadnefs, Smiles, Tears, Plc'afufe. Diflatisfaction, Life and Death \ in fhort, all the Alterations which Creatures are liable to, whereof the enumeration would be very tedious, TU Of the Art of Glafs. 269 This fine Art, as well as that of Glafs, does not leften the quality of its Positioners, the contrary whereof happens in all other Arts \ for Princes, and many of our Monarchs, have granted the Privilege of Nobility to feveral Mailers thereof, to intimate to Pofterity the extraordinary Efteem they had for them, upon the Excellency of thofe Incomparable Pieces which their Pencils had produced. Though painting on Glafs be very ancient, 'tis yet much more modern than that of Painting on Wood, or Cloath, as being of no longer ftanding than this Art of Glafs-work : The firft who painted on Glafs, did it only in Dlfiemper^ that is, in Co- lours mixt with Glue, but this not abiding the In- jury of Time, they invented the way of doing it with Fire-Proof Colours, which are incorporated with the Glafs, by Baking and Melting them toge- ther \ and as foon as this Secret wasdifcovered, eve- ry Body took delight to practice the Draught of Fi- gures, and entire Hiftories thereon for Ornaments, whereof we have frill fome remaining Pieces on old Church Glafs \ but thofe Figures before the Year 1 500, had not half the fufficiency of B.ifc, or Reliefs as is required in Painting. Thofe who would rain Work in handfome and lively Colours, made ufe of Glafs-Frit, tinged in the Glafs-houfe, as well for Carnation as Drapery, whereon they drew the firft Lines of the Vifage, and other Parts of the Body in Black, and fo Shadowed ? em with Strokes and Dafhcs. But Painting having lince received an Improve- ment in France, tljofe Works became more perfect, and in fo fhorta time with inch advantage of making fair and molt exquiiite Pieces, as are even at this Day the Admiration of the Learned, of which, all the Honour mult beafcribed to the 'French, who were the 2 7° Of ^ e Art ofGlafs. the firft Difcoverers of this great Perfection in the Art. We might eafily aflign feveral ways of this Paint- ing among the Ancients, but fince they are out of Practice, and the latter Methods much more excel- lent, we fhall fatisfie our felves in prefcribing only fiich as may fuffice,and gratifie the Curioilty of thofe who love this Art. And not only the Method of Painting, but alfo how to prepare the Colours, to bake and finifh 'em in the Furnace •, of this we'll give a fhort Defcripti- on in the next Chapter \ that Secret of ordering the Fire, which is the Life and principal Agent of all the Works, with that of Gilding, Marbling, &c. as will be fhewn in the Sequel of this Book. The moft part of Ingredients ufeful for this Ser- vice of Painting,will alfo tinge theGlafs well enough, and we will make ufe of thofe mentioned elfewhere, to avoid ufelefs Repetitions on the Subject. CHAP. ecu. A Furnace for Painting the Glafs^ and Setting the Colours. WE have mentioned this Furnace in Chap. 1 94. but did not take notice of its Form, or Ap- purtenances, becaufe the Bulinefs which obliges us to fpeak of it there, is very different from this. This Furnace mull be Square, of good Brick, two Foot high, and fo much every way, and have three Divifions ^ the undermoft for the Afhes, muft fee fix Inches high, the middle one for the Fire muft be fix Inches high, and have its Opening five or li x Inches broad, and four deep, with a good Iron- Grate. Of the Art of (jlajs. iq\ Grate, and three fquare Bars of Iron acrofs to flip- port the Earthen-Stove hereafter defcribed : The uppermoft Divilfon muft. be a Foot high, with a lit- tle Opening about the middle before of four Inches high, and two wide, to put in and draw out the Ware a Baking, to fee if it be well done. In this uppermoft Diviflon mufl be put the afore- faid Stove of good Fire-proof Crucible Earth, the Bottom an Inch and half thick, and from thence up to the Brim ten Inches full \ it mufl be fquare as the Furnace, and have two Inches room from on all fides, that the Fire may flame round about it to Bake the Work, and therefore placed exactly in the middle of the Furnace \ there mult bealfo in the Fire-part of this Stove, an Opening juft againft, and of the fame Size and Form as that of the Furnace, for the conveniency of putting the W;ire in and out. Take this Method of diftinguifhing the Furnace in all its parts, and to lay down a clearer defcription thereof, obferve, The Letter A is the Afh-hole for the Afhes that tall from above through the Iron-Grate \ and note, That the wider the Opening is, the more violent will the Fire be. The Letter B is the Fire-place. The Letters C are three Square Iron-Bars to fup- port the Pan for the Ware. The Letter D is the Opening of the Furnace and Pan, through which the Ware mult be conveyed in and out. The Letter E is the Earthen Pan, wherein all the Painted-Ware muft be Baked. The Letters F are two half Lids of Potters Earth for covering the whole Furnace above : As foon as the Stove is full of Ware, they muft be well clofed and luted together,to prevent the Air coming in any where but bv the four fquare holes at both ends of the Lid, 2 7 ^ Q/ ^ e -Art °f viajs. Lid, and the two Semicircles in the middle, which make a round Hole for a Chimney •, when the two half Lids are clofed, thofc five Holes are for letting out the Smoak and Flame of the Furnace. CHAP. CCIII. To make White-Ground for Palming on Gkfs. NOW to purfue our Work, we will begin with the Preparation of all the Colours to be ufed in Painting. Glafs •, for before we proceed to pre- fcribe the Rules, how to work the Materials mult firft be confidercd. The White is compounded of feveral Ingredi- ents : The firfb are fmall White River Peble-Stones heated red over a Fire, in an Iron- Ladle, and thrown afterwards into an Earthen-Difh full of cold Water to calcine them, and this muff, be repeated feveral times, until they be prepared :, afterwards being dried, pound them with a Stone, or Glafs-Peflle in a Stone-Morter, and fo grind them upon a Marble to an impalpable Powder ^ then mix a fourth part of Nitre with it, and calcine them in a Crucible \ then pound and grind them again, and calcine them a third time over a fmaller Fire than your former, and fo take them off for life. This done, when you would Paint with it, add equal parts in weight of G7/>, a fort of Talc found among Plaftcr-mold baked on the Coals to a White- nefs, and reducible to Powder, and Rocai/le, where- of we have already fpoken, grind them all three very well together in a hollow Plate of Copper, with Citm-Arubick Water j thus have you your White in good condition to Paint withal. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 373 "^^^ CHAP. CCIV. To prepare Black for painting on Glafs. AS this Colour cannot be omitted in any fort of Painting, fo in this •, the manner of ufing it is much the fame, and the Preparation eaiie. You mull grind Scales of Iron from the Smith's Anvil-Block, for three Hours on the fhallow Copper-Bafon, or Plate , add to this one third of the fame weight of Kocaille, with a little Calx of Copper, to hinder the Iron from turning Red in the Fire j grind it to as impalpable a Powder as you can bring it to, and fo keep it in a clofe Veilel for ufe. CHAP. CCV. To prepare a Yellow Paint fir Glafs. THIS Colour requires a more coftly Preparation than the precedent, becaufe it cannot be well done without a tenth part of prepared Silver, as we mall fhew hereafter. Take fine Silver in Plates from the Copple, ftra- tifie 'em in a Crucible, with Powder of Sulphur, or Nitre, the firft and laft Lay being of the Powder, and fo calcine them in a Furnace , this done, call it out, as foon as all the Sulphur is confumed, into an Earthen-Bafon of Water, and afterwards pound it in your Stone-Mortar until 'tis fit for the Marble, and fo grind it with fome of its Water wherein it was cooled, for fix Hours ; then add nine times T its 074- Of f ke Art of Glafs. its weight of Red-Oaker, and grind them together for a full Hour, and 'tis done and fit for Painting ou Glafs. CHAP. CCVI. To make a Blue for painting Glafs. JTPHE whole Secret of this Preparation, depends JL on the calcining the Ingredients, and goodnefs of the Crucible: Take two Ounces of Zaffer, two Ounces of Mimnm, and eight Ounces of very fine White Sand ^ put all thefe into a Bell-metal Mortar, and pound them very well, and fo into a Crucible covered and luted over a quick Fire for an Hour \ then draw off the Crucible, and pound them again as before : This done, add a fourth of its weight in S. It -peter powdered, and having mixed all very well together, return them into a Crucible covered and luted, which place again in the Furnace for two Hours at kail, continuing fuch another Fire as the former : The Crucible being off and cool'd a fecond time, grind the Mafs as before, and fo put it into a Crucible again, with a fixth part of Salt-petre^ and let it remain on the Fire for three Hours ^ then take off the Crucible, and immediately with an Iron-Spa- tula red hot, take out the Matter left it fhould flick, being very clammy and hard to be emptied. 'Tis convenient to have flrong Crucibles for this Calcination, becaufe it remains fo conliderable a while in the Fire, and they muft be luted with an extraordinary lute :, you may ufe that we have given directions for in Chap, i ^9. adding Powder of Borax y to the Powder of Glafs vitrified, which helps the Fuiion of the Glafs, which we have omitted there , but Of the Art of GLf). 175 hut the greateft ftrefs lies in Baking the Crucible af- terwards in a .fmall Fire, to cement t he Pores, and make the Earth compact as Glafs, which would be very much furthered, if you threw on it a confidera- ble quantity of Salt as it comes our of the Fire, this would glaze it, and capacitate it for retaining the Spirits in the Fire. CHAP. CCVII. To make Red Colour for Glafs Painn THIS requires as much caution as the Blue: You mult take Scales of Iron, and Litharge of Silver, of each a Dram, Feretto of Spain half a Dram, Rocaille three Drams and half; grind all thefe for half an Hour on a (hallow Copper-Plate, in the mean time pound three Drams of Blood-Stone in an Iron-Mor- tar, and add it to the relt \ then pound a Dram of Gum-Arabick in that Mortar to an impalpable Pow- der,to take off the remains of your Rlood-ftone^vA. fo add it to the reft, grinding them ftill continually, left the Blood-ftonc be fpoiled. The belt manner of grinding thefe is to pour Wa- ter by little and little on the Ingredients as you grind them, neither wetting them too much, nor too lit- tle, but juft as much as will keep a good Temper as for Painting: Afterwards put all into a foot Glafs, and fo drop on it through a fmall hollow Cane of Wood, or with your Finger, as much Water as will bring it to the conliftence of an Eggs- Yolk buttered, or a little more, then cover the Glafs to preferve it from Duft, and fo let it Hand three Days to fettle. After this, decant the clearelt and purelt of the Co- lours that rife at top, into another Glafs, without T z diitui - «j6 Of the Art of Glafs. difturbing the Sediment ; and two Days after it has fettled anew, pour ofFagain the pureft of the Colours as before. This done, fet it in the Body of a broken Matrafs, or Bolt-head, over a gentle flow Fire to dry eafily, and fo keep it for ufe. When you have occafion for it, take a little fair Water in a Glafs, and with it moiften as much Co- lour as you think convenient, that will be excellent for Carnation ; as for the Fxces, which are very -thick dry 'em too, and you may moiften thefe in like man- ner with Water for Drapery, Timber-colonr, and fuch other as you think convenient. CHAP. CCVIII. To make a Purple-colour for painting; of Glafs. THE Preparation of this Purple- colour, is ex- actly like that of the Blue, for this Reafon we need not ufe any tedious Repetitions : You mult take an Ounce of Zajfer, and an Ounce of very pure and clean Perigeux, two Ounces of Minium, eight Oun- ces of very fine white Sand, pound all thefe in a Bell- metal Mortaiy and reduce it to an impalpable Pow- der ; put it afterwards into a good Crucible well covered and luted, in the Furnace ^ keep a very •good Fire to it for an Hour, then draw it out, and as foon as it is cold, pound the Mafs over again in the fame Mortar ; to this add a fourth part of its weight of Nitre, mix them together, and put them into the Crucible, and fo proceed as directed in Chat, 2c6. until you have a fine Purple-colour. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 377 CHAP. CCIX. To make a Green Paint for Glafs. THE Change of the Ingredients makes this Colour, but the Method for incorporating them is the fame as the former : Take two Ounces ofdx£x uftum^ of Chap. 35. to this add two Ounces of Minium, and eight Ounces of very fine white Sand, pound thefe together in a Metal Mortar to an impalpable Powder, and put it afterwards in a Cru- cible luted and covered into a Wind-Furnace, giving it a gocid Fire for an Hour ; after this draw it off, and let it cool, then pound it again, adding a fourth part its weight of Nitre in Powder, grind and mix them well together, putting them afterwards into the Crucible, luted and covered, in the Furnace, for two Hours, and io forth as in Chap. 206. Thus you'll have a very fine Green. CHAP. CCX. Of other Colours in general for Vdntirjg on Glafs. WE have dire-fted how to make the firil Matter- Colours for Painting on Glafs j now we proceed to fhew what other depends on them with* put enlarging on thefe Preparations. The Red in Chap. 207. ferve for Carnation, bu; there ought to be one part of Feretto of Spain, as in Chap. 21 . in the Compofition, and another of Rocaillc^ ' T $ of 278 Of the Art of Glafs. of which we will give the Preparation in the next Chapter •, grind thefe on your Copper Plate, imbi- bing the Powder with Gum'd Water, until it be made fit for ufe. The Red Faces there alio mentioned will fervc in Drapery, and to defcribe Timber-work^ Trunks of Trees, 'Hair, Brick, and fuch other things ; you muft take an Ounce of Fcretto of Spain iwChap. 21. as in the former Compolition, an Ounce of Iron-Scales, two Ounces of Rocaille, grind them well together up- on the Copper-Plate, moiftening them with Gum- Water, till they be brought to the proper confiftence, neither too thick nor too thin, fo you'll have a Red inclining to a dark Yellow, very fit for ufe. There be fcveral more made ufe of in this, as well as in other Painting, but are compounded of the prin- cipal Colours, as we have intimated in our Difcourfe of Colours for Painting on Enamel, mCbap. 186. CHAP. CCXI. The Way to make Rocaille. ALL Habcrdafhcrs of Small-Ware, fell this Ko- caille, which are Grec;i and Yellow Grains, whereof they make Beads, and fell them to the Coun- try People ; much alfo of thefe Trangtims are ex- ported to the Indies, to Africa, and the adjacent pla- ces, where the Inhabitants wear 'em about their Necks, and on their Scarfs, Bracelets and Waft- belts. It is ufed alfo in Painting on Enamel and Glafs, veryfrequently, though ill qualified and full of im- pure Lead. We have already taken notice ot this before, and tho to avoid this they make choice of the molt Of the Art of Ckfs. 079 moft clear and tranfparcnt Rocaiille, and fuch as is leafl charged with Colour, yet ftil 1 'tis very far from being fufficient} 'tis true, it contains lefs l.ead,how- ever even that which frill remains is likewife impure, and not at all purified. We have directed fuch as work in Enamel, and we cannot avoid it alio here to advife you infread of Rocaille^ to make uie of our Cr y Jlalliue Matter made with Saturnm Glorificati&t, Chap. 1 1 2. or fuch other- like Ingredients, as we have prefcribed, which are perfectly cleanfed ^ however to pleafe every Body, we will give a Preparation of this Rocaille, and how to compound it, which is very eafily done : Thus, To make the Yellow Grains, you muff take a Pound of fine white Sand, three Pound of Minium^ mix and pound them together very well in a Mortar, and put the whole into a ilrong Crucible covered and luted, dry the lute, and put it afterwards into the Glafs-houfe, or Wind-Furnace, where the Fire is violent, to reduce this Matter into Glafs, as that oiSatum, made in Chap. 82. having thus tiniflied the Rocaille, make it up into Grains, or any other Shape you pleafe. The Way of making the Green, is quite contrary to that of the Yellow : Put three Pound of fme white Sand to every Pound of Miniiim^ and it will be very compact. This Stuff will alter its Colour, and become a pale Red in melting ^ and thefe are the Compofitions and way of making this RocallU, which molt Workmen ufe : Thus you fee there can be no preparing it without Lead, which makes it fo mil of Impurity. T 4 CHAP. a8o Of the Art of Glafs. «— —— — — ■— — — i — — — — i i ■ i , i i , , , . I CHAP. CCXII. The Way to V-aint on Glafs. THE Painting on Glafs is of fuch fine EfFe&, as becomes the Admiration of the Learned in all Noble Arts : Nothing can be more wonderful to the Sight ^ befides, its continuance, and refilling all the Efforts of every Seafon, and badnefs of Weather, for fevcral Ages, tho this laft Excellency was un- known to the firfr. Practitioners, and referved for this latter Age, however the Honour is due to them, fince they made the firft Secrets and Difcoveries in this Art, and 'tis much eafier to improve, than form anew Invention. If Glafs were malleable,and difcharged of its Na- tural Frangibiiity, nothing could equal the Paint thereon :, 'tis not to be tarnifhed, but always main- tains its primitive Beauty and Splendour, without any obirruction to the Tranfition of Light ; and there may as fine Fancy be done on it, as on Limn- ing, there would certainly be nothing on Earth fo rich or precious as Glafs, whether Painted, or Tin- ged, if it had this principal Perfection of Malleabi- lity, which many Learned Men have ftudied for, and daily find ; but fuch is the Corruption of this Sinful Covetous Age, that thofe Wife Seniors of this Art, do rather chufe to pafs for Ignoramus's, than run the Rifque of Perpetual Confinement, by expofing i'o fine and delicate a Secret, which would incur the Envy of the Great : and this they take care wifely %o avoid. We have already taken notice that fuch as for- merly Painted on Glafs, were both Painters and Glafs- Of the Art of Glafs. *8i Gjafs-makers, and that fuch Gentlemen as were of them,received neither IefTening in Birth nor Quality, as in cafe of other Arts, for this Prejudice is exemp- ted in the Art of Glafs, and our Kings have that E- fteera for the Curious therein, that they have grant- ed them fuch ample Privileges. Now to proceed to the Manner of Painting on Glafs, which is the Subjed of this Chapter, where- in arefeveral Particulars to be confidered, which we will endeavour to diftinguifh as well aspoflible. Firft chooie fuch Glafs as is ufually called Glafs of Lorrain, tho there be fuch and as good made at Ne- ver s • for this fort of Glafs receives the Colours bet- ter than any other, becaufe 'tis bell compact and a- ble to refift the Fire \ 'tis very eafily known -, 'tis not altogether White, but of a Whitifh Yellow. But to proceed. You mult have the Original you Paint by, ready drawn and proportioned, on ftrong Cap-Paper,in all its Colours and Perfection ; for your better advan- tage in Pattern, lay it on a Table, and fo choofe your Pieces of Glafs to be Painted, and take care to fit them fo to each other, as they may joyn eafily after- wards without any prejudice to the Draught from displacing them, and ib confounding the Figures and Pourtraits, or from the Lead which muft joyn them afterwards, by obfeuring any parts of the painting •, then mark out each piece on the Tablet, by No. 1 , 2, 3. for better diftin&ion, and fo trace them over with the Black given in Chap. 204. with a Pencil, as we fhall further fhew , do this very exa&ly, neither too llightly nor too thick, and folet itirand two Days to dry, before you paint it. ' Then having all your Colours in readinefs, fo as directed in the foregoing Chapters, fill your Pieces off with Colours, for which ufe the Nib of the Pen- dl 3 cipeckily ux^arnfttion y where you muft be very exact ; a8a Of the Art of Glafs. exact. \ you muft alfo be very Circumfped and Expe- ditious, and take a great deal of care not to blot or blur the Tracings, and chofe rather to paint on the other fide of the Glafs. All the Colours, except Yellow, may be applied on the fame fide, and that you muft do on the con- trary fide, becaufe it is apt to mingle with the other Colours, and if near the Blue, will compofe a Green \ fo that for want of fuch precaution the whole Work may be fpoil'd \ if the Yellow tranfmit it fer:~ perfectly through the Quarre, it is as well as if it had been done on the fame fide :, and take notice by the Way, that the other Colours have not fo ready a Tranfition , becaufe they confift of a Groller Body. The Yellow ought to be very equally and juftly laid on in a greater or lefTer quantity, as you'd have your Shadows ^ obferve this too in the reft, efpeci- ally to lay them on as quick as pofiible, as we have already faid, particularly the Azure, Green, and Purple require the moft exa&nefs of any. Now to fez offand heighten the Lights, in piling a Beard, defcribing Hair in Drapery, or othcrwife, ufe the Handle, or But-end of the Pencil, a fmali pointed Stick, or Quill, wherewith take off the Co- lours in thofe places you would Enlighten, which is ealily done. Such Works as are done in Gri faille you muft paint after this manner : Trace your Piece with Black, and let it dry for two Days entirely, do it over very lightly and equally with a Wafh fo thin laid on, as not to efface the firft Lines, and let it dry for two Days } after this run it over again with the lame Wafh where you find it convenient to give a fc- cond Tinge, and let it dry two Days longer : Then to give it the Lights ^ and convenient Heightnings, take the fliarp But-eud of your Pencil, or pointed Stick, Of the Art of G lap. 083 Sticky or Pen, as before, and take off the Colour of the firft Wafh, in the molt neceflary places, and fo your Work will he finifhed. To make this Wafh is eafie : Take a fmall Pewter Cup, or other Veflel, and put therein a quantity of black colouring;, then diflblve Gum- Arabic k pow- dered in its weight of Wine, and throw this on the Black in the Pewter-difh, or Saucer, that it may be very clear, and not eafily dry'd, and that you may have your Wafh for painting Glafs in Gri faille, or Gray. CHAP. CCXIII. How to order your Glafs in the Furnace after Fainting, and 1 manage the Fire. AFTER your Glafs is fully painted, and the Draughts perfectly finifhed, the difficulty will be to Bake the pieces, fo as to give it a confiftency with the Glafs., by penetration, which may be thus done. You muft work with the Furnace mentioned in Chap. 202. and its Stove of good Crucible Earth, to contain all the Work, which muft be ^ratified on this manner. Take good Quick-lime well digeftcd,fcarccd, and finely pulverized ; and for the better fecurity let it digeft thrice in a Potter's Furnace, and fo powder and fearce it ; then make a very even lay thereof, a- bout half an Inch thick, on the bottom of your Stove, and then a lay of pieces of broken Glafs, and afterwards another lay of Powder, and fo another of Glafs, then another of Powder; the reafon of ma- king this Stratification of powder and old Glafs, is {o prevent any injury from the violence of the Fire, which a 84. Of the Art of Glafs. which will be very fmart under the Stove; thisdon* upon the third Bed of powder, lay a lay of paintec Glafs, and fo continue S. S. S. each lay of powdei and Glafs being equally or evenly made, untill al the pieces of paint are put in, or the Stove full, anc upon the laft lay of Glafs lay the uppermoft of pow der fomewhat thicker than the former } then covei the Furnace with its Shrowds of Earth, joyriing anc luting them well together, all round with the bef lute, fo that it may admit of no refpiration, bu through the fire holes, or the Opening of the Fur nace, whilft you draw out the proofs or Tryals yoi make, as we have hinted elfewhere. Your Furnace being thus ordered, and the lut< dry'd very well, begin to heat it gently with fom< Charcoal on the outflde of the Furnace, at the en 3rance, and fo by degrees, and very leifurely ira proving it, left the Glafs fhould be broken, or th paint fpoil'd •, continue thus for two Hours, the: thrufl the Fire in further, and let it remain ther for an Hour, putting it in by little and little unde the Stove, where leave it for two Hours longer, the increafe the Fire by degrees for two Hours, and i continue to apply Fuel until the Furnace be full c Charcoal, and you perceive the Flame convey it felf through every hole of the Cover - keep it thu very violent for three or four hours, fhutting th Door of the Furnace } you muft be very cautiou and circu,mfpec% during the whole Work, from th firft two hours that the Fire remains at the En prance. Obferve from time to time to draw forth you Tryals, or pieces of proof in your Stove, to fee i the Colours be melted and the Yellow qualified, yoi may perceive how the Work goes on by the fpark iing of the Iron-bars under the Stove. Of the Art of Glafs. 285 As foon as you find your Colours almoft done, im- prove the Fire with fome very fmall Billets of dry Wood, they mull be very little for eafe in putting them in, and to prevent Smoaking, and to make the Flame environ and reverberate over and roundabout the Stove, which muft be continued until you have finifhed, this will be in twelve or fourteen hours; then let the Fire go out and the Work cool of its felf, and fo take it out, and 'twill be finifhed. CHAP. CCXIV. Another Way to Paint on Glafs. TtiO the former way be very fine and halting as can be, yet we will here lhew another more eafie, and altogether as effectual. Take very White Glafs, varnifh it very thin on one fide with a White Varnifh, then having before made choice of fome fine Imprefs, or Cut, on Paper, juft fit for the piece of Glafs you defign to paint its Fancy on, dip it in Water, and letting it foak and dry a little, clap the Picture-fide thereof to the Var- nifh-fide of the Glafs, as exactly, plain, and evenly as poiTible, and fo let it dry throughly ; afterwards rnoiitcn the Paper on the Blank-fide, and with a blunt Graver draw off and trace the Lines of the Picture, which will afterward remain perfect and diftin&ly on the Varnifh-fide of your Glafs Quarrc. This Draught is for the xModel you muft paint your Fillings in, and obferve that the Tracings and Strokes of the Pidure are to ferve you in Shadow- ing, which cannot be rejected without difadvantaee to your piece. The 286 OftheArtofGlafi. The manner of painting on Glafs, is quite con- trary to that of Limning, or Painting on Cloath, or Wood ; for in this the paint being but on one fide, is plainly vifible on the other 5 here the Settings oil* are firftdone, then the compound Colours juft run over, and fo continuing until perfected \ whereas on Linen, &c. the Settings-off, or Heightnings, are the laft ftrokes, and their Ground-colour, or fnft, isthat which we end withal, and make our laft lay with in all pieces done on Glafs. We do not fhew the Way to make up the Colours, nor how to mix and finifh the Artificial ones,for that relates immediately to the Art of Pairitingffi which fe- veral pieces are extant, and not to this Art of Glafs , and thefe noted herein are the fame as in the other Art of Painting on Cloath, and not very uneafily pre- pared. You muft alfo paint on Glafs, juft as in Miniature, with Water-Colours, laying your Picture under- neath it, as before, and this will fhew finer than if done in Oyl ; beiides, the Colours dry in a mo- ment. Your pieces being thus done in Oyl, or Water- colour, may receive a very additional and improving Beauty, by over-laying all the Colours, except the Ground, with Leaf-Silver, which will appear very glorious and lively on fuch as are transparent j to wit, Lakes, Verditers, &c. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 187 CHAP. CCXV. 'The Manner of Gilding on Glafs* WE promifed to fhew this Way of Gilding on Glafs after we had done with Painting, and this we will difcharge here. Take any Glafs you pleafe, and moifteningitover where you defign to gild, with Gum-Water, apply your Leaf-Gold, and fo let it dry } cover the Glafs Over with any piece of hollow Glafs, and fet it on an Iron-Plate at the Mouth of the Furnace to heat gen- tly, and when 'tis well heated, move it in further, and in a very little time it will be red hot j then with- draw it, and let it cool ilowly at the Furnace Mouth. Thus if you have laid your Gold well on at firft, you'll find it fo well communicated to the Glafs, that 'tis impoflible for any Tryal to endamage the Gilding. And after this method you may do with Globes, and give them a wonderful Beauty, which no Dun% nor injury of Time can alter. CHAP. CCXVI. Another Way to Gild Glafs, THIS fecond Way is altogether as fine as the T ~]pIS impoflible to give all the Preparations for X the Lapis-Laztdi in one Chapter, they are too tedious for that purpofe, and can't be fb confined without Confufion^ this we intimate to juftifieQur divifion thereof into feveral Chapters. For moiftening and grinding your aforefaid Pow- der of the Stone, take a Pound and half of running Water, and put this into a new Earthen-Pot, add to it an Egg-fhell full of raw Honey, boil it until it have no more Scum -, take the Pot offi and keep this Hydromel, or Liquid for ufe in Bottles, as we fhall give occafion for hereafter. This done, take four Scruples of the beft Cum- Dragon, grind it on your Marble, with fomeof the Hydromel, and then put it into a Glafs ; add thereto as much Hydromel as you find convenient, to bring it to a Violet-colour, fo cover it, and prefer ve it for ufe : This Liquid is good for your Powder of Lapis- La^nliy 304 Of the Art of Olafs. Lazuli •, if the Colour be too Violet, add the lefs hereof, if otherwife the more, as your Judgment, or Experience fhall direct. Put half a Pound of Powder at a time into a fmall Porphyry, or Marble VelTel, the larger the Mortar theworie, for you'll lofc more, and be longer a grinding \ pour leifurety by little and little thereon, fome of your Violet Liquid, grind thefe together for a full Hour, fall wetting it } you may ufe three or four Ounces of Liquid to the half Pound of Pow- der, and you'll have it very good , you mint take care of grinding it too long, for then it will lofe its colour. When 'tis thus ground, dry it on a Marble or Flat-ftone, where the Sun does not come at all, co- ver it well to preferve it from Duft \ when 'tis dry, 'twill Powder eafily between your Fingers, if it be rightly done \ if fo, let it alone on the Marble, but if it be clammy, or flick, take it off, for it has ftill fome uncluolity of the Honey in it, which niiifl be cleanfed away by a Cement. Your Lapis being thus dry, walh it well before you put it to the Cement, for which you muft ufe a glazed Earthen Bafon round above like a Bar- ber's, and well glazed within, put your Lapis there- in, and pour thereon fome of the mild Lixivium in the next Chapter, as much as will rife above the Surface four Inches •, walh the Lapis very well with your Hands, and then let it fettle, and 'twill preci- pitate: The Liquid being clear'd again, decant it into a large Copper, or Earthen-Veftel, then let the Lapis dry in a Shade in the fame VcfTel 'twas warned in, and fpread it afterwards on the fiat Marble, or Porphyry, and there let it lie until quite dry : Thns 'tis prepared for mixing with the Cement, of which we will give the Preparation in Chap. 23 i . and thofe nextfucceeding it. CHAP, Of the Art of Glafs. 305 CHAP. CCXXIX. To prepare a mild and a ftrong Lixivium for the Lapis-Lazuli. WE have promifed to give this Preparation here,andthe manner of making hereof,which we will (hew, together with another ftronger, to warn the Lapis withal, when 'tis mixt with the Ce- ment, as hereafter directed. To make thefe Lixivium*, take ten handfuls of Vine-ftallv-Afties well fearced , put this into a large Vetfel that will hold thirty Pound of Water, with a Faucet at bottom •, prefs the Afhes very well, and put to them twenty Pound of warm Water •, when 'tis funk to the bottom, open the Faucet, fo as it may only drop into an Earth en-Velfcl , when 'tis all come out, Hop the hole, and ftrain this Lixivium through a felt Strainer, and fo keep it in a Glafs, or glazed Pot well covered : This is the ftrong Lixivium. Again, pour in on the fame Ames, the like quan- tity of warm Water, and do as before, fo you'll have an indifferent ftrong Lixivium, which keep as the former. Do this a third time, and you'll have the mild Lixivium mentioned in the preceding Chapter. Thefe three arc very ufeful both for moiftening, and to draw the Powder of Lapis-Laudi from the Cement ; wherewith it mull be mixed, as we (hall fhew in the fucceeding Chapters, which Separation being fometimeshard to perform, We are obliged to haverecourfe to thefe Varieties of Uxiviims ftron j X g**1 3 06 Of the Art of Glafs. ger, or weaker, as wc find them convenient for the purpofe. You may yet make another Lixivium to take away the greaiinefs of the Cement, thus: Boil CalxoiTar- tar, as much as you pleafe, in clean Water, fora- bout a quarter of an Hour, and keep it for ufe as the former. Thi* is excellent for warning the Lapis- \jcudl with \ it ftrcngthcns and improves the colour thereof, is good for the Itch, ScHrvcy, &c. and to take away the Witherings in the Fair Sex. CHAP. CCXXX. The Form of the Glajfes for preferving the Liquids in, which are employed on the Lapis-Lazuli. THERE always remains fome of your colour in the Waters, or XJxivwms, wherein the Lapis- Lazali is prepared throughout all the Procefs ; you muff therefore have a very large Veflel of Brafs, or Earthen-Ware, glazed and polifhed very well at bot- tom, wherein mull be three Holes } one in the mid- dle of the fide, the next a little lower, and thelaft about two Inches from the bottcm \ flop thefe Holes without-lide very clofe to prevent leakage. Then pour all your Waters into this ; tho you then perceive no colour at all, yet after ten Days you'll have it at bottom, whither it will defcend gently } and to get it, you muft go artificially to work, firft opening the firft Cock, or Hole, and let out the Wa- ter above that, before you open the other two j and thus you may get the colour without muddying, or lofing any by the Waters, which mix with the reft. CHAR Of the Art of Ghfs. 307 CHAP. CCXXXI. To make ftrong Cement to mix with Lapis-Lazuli, to feparatc the finer and better Stuff" from the other. ONE cannot fo eafily part the finer Lapis-Lazuli from its grofler parts, without making ufe of this Cement to unbind the parts : Take four Ounces of very pure and clear Fe?ricc-Turper.ti?:c ; fix Ounces of Rofin of the Pine, [\x Ounces of Grecian-?kch y three Ounces of very good Ma/lick, three Ounces of frefh Wax, an Ounce and half of Linfecd-Oyl clean fed, as {hall be directed hi Chap. 233. Put the Turpentine into a new glazed Earthen-Pot, very clean, to diffolve over a flow Charcoal-Fire, and continue ftirring it with a Wooden-Spatula, throw into this by degrees, the Rofin of the Pine, in final 1 pieces, and ftir it (till very well - 7 thus put in fuc- cefiively the Pitch, the Maftick in Powder, and laft of all the Wax fliced fmall, ftirring all continually about to mix and incorporate: Take great care of your Fire, leaft the Cement fhould blaze, or burn* all the Ingredients being hot of themfeives, and combuftible : Having well incorporated them, pour in the Linfeed-Oyl, ftirring it us before, and fo let it boil gently for a Quarter of an Hour. To try whether the Cement be enough, drop fome of it ofFthe Spatula into a Veflcl of cold Watei ~ 7 - if it fpread 'tis not enough } but if it do not, 'tis iufliciciitly boil'd } fotake it off. Or elle you may wet your Fingers, and take a drop thereof, roul and draw it out in length \ if it fnaps and breaks of it felf, 'tis a fign that 'tis enough \ take it offand pour it boiling hot into an Hypocrajs-Bag ftceped before X 2 in 3o8 Of the Art of Ghfs. • in hot Water •, take care to let it go all through into a Vellcl Of told Water } and tor the better fecurity, fquecze it along from top to bottom with two flat Sticks,thatnone may remain in your Bag} afterwards work it well with your Hands, till all the Water be drained from it, and becaufe being hot it may flick to your Fingers, you may anoint them with fomeof thcLinfced-Oyl. The Cement being thus prepared, keep it in a VeiTel of cold Water, fhifting your Water every Day, or every fccorid Day, and by this Method you may keep it for ten Years. CHAP. CCXXXII. To male a weaker Cement for fef&kting the Colours of Lapis-La/uli. THIS fecond Cement, which is the fofter and milder, ought to be firft employed on the Powder of Y.a\U-Laz.ull :, it draws the colour much quicker and better than the ftrong Cement, which ought not to be ufed till after the milder, the whole Secret of feparating the Colours, confuting in ufing the Cements, for without a due care hereof, it can- not be done pcrfeft. To make this Cement, yen muft take four Oun- ces of very pure Turpentine , four Ounces of Rofin of Pine, fix Ounces of f7rroa»-Pitch, one Ounce of frefliWax, fix Drams of Linfccd-Oyl purified, mix and incorporate them fucceflivcly as before \ obierve only that this is fooner done than the former, be- caufe 'tis weaker, and will give the colour fooneft , therefore you mull manage accordingly. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafi. 309 CHAP. CCXXXIII. To purific Linfeed-Oyl. THE ufe we have for Linfeed-Oyl in our Cement, obliges us to give this Preparation, and vvav of purifying it, as we promifed, whereby 'tis made more fit for our purpofc. Take good and clear Linfeed-Oyl, of the colour of Saffron^ and put it into a Glafs, ihaped like an Oxe-horn, with an Hole at bottom to let out the Water, which you mud mix with the Oyl, letting them fettle until the Oyl rifes all up- moft ^ then open the Hole, and let the Water out, and the Oyl remain behind } then fhake the Oyl again, with more frefli Water, let it fettle, and the Water run out, as before j do thus eight or ten times, till the Water comes out as clear as it went in, and fo the Oyl will be pure and fit for your ufe ; keep it well ftopt in a Glafs-Bottle. If you can't get Linfeed-Oyl, you may ufe Oyl of Bitter-Almonds, without purifying, for it needs none - 7 but take notice, the Linfeed-Oyl is heft of any, tho cheaper than t'other. CHAP. 3 i o Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CCXXXIVY How to incorporate the Powder of Lapis-Lazuli with the fttong^ or weaker Cement. WE have given in Chap. 228. the way to pre- pare the Powder for mixing with the Ce- ment, to extract the Colours \ we now come to fhew how to mix it with the Cement, in order to extract the Vltra-marive from them for Painting. Take a Pound of the Powder, and the like quan- tity of Cement afligned in Chap. 231. obferving al- ways to take the firft that was workt with the Hands ^ cut the Cement final!, and the pieces being a little wet, put them into a glazed Earthen-Pot, o- ver a Fire of red-hot Ames, to melt, and take care it docs not boil •, if it firjuld, you mult prevent the the damage which it might caufe,by putting in fome Linfeed-dyl. The Cement being thus melted, anoint all your Spatula over, from the Handle downwards, with the fame Oyl, and fo put in the Powder by ve- ry little quantities, and taking a great deal of time, that they may the better incorporate:, and be fure to ftir it all the while very well with the Spatula, fo as to make it all alike, until it become like an Oynt- ment, or Salve \ then off with the Pot, and throw the Stuff" boiling hot into an Earthen-Bafon of cold Water, and at that very inftant take off' all that flicks to the fides of the Pot \ when 'tis cold enough to be handled, if it appears well coloured, 'tis a figu you have work'd it well : This done, rub your Hand with Linfeed-Oyl, and work it as they do a Paftc of Bread, or Dough, for one Hour, that it may be throughly Of the Art of Glafs. 3 1 1 throughly compact. The longer you work it, the better and eafier the colour may be drawn \ after- wards make it up like a Loaf,or Brick,and fet it in an Earthen-Dim to dry, pouring thereon fome frefh Water :, let it fteep for fifteen Days, the longer the better for extracting the Vltra-marine. CHAP. CCXXXV. To Extratt the Ultra-marine. NOW we come to take out the Vltra-marlr.e, from its Confinement to make it appear Tri- umphant, and in its full Glory. Take therefore the Loaf of Cement and Powder, warning it in the fame Water extraordinary well with your Hands \ weigh it to know the quantity of Oyl it requires, and put it into an Earthen-Bowl, or Difh, very fmoothly glazed, rubbing ririt the Bot- tom with your Linfeed-Oyl - then pour in Water fcarce warmed, until it arife two Inches above the Matter ^ let it Hand in this condition a full quarter of an Hour (or lefs in the Spring-time 5) pour this Water afterwards into the Veiled mentioned Chap. 23CV adding more warm Water to your Matter, and fo 'twill foften : Continue thus whilft there remains any Tincture thereon ^ by this means all the fubltance that is good for any thing, will be ieparated from the Cement, which cannot be done otherwife. Whilft it is imbibed in the warm Water, you mufc move and roulit gently round with two Sticks, or Spatula's of Box, or any other well polilhed Wood rounded at the ends fmooth like a Wallnut } let thena be about an Ell long, and art Inch thick. Whenever you perceive the Matter flick to the bottom of y ir X 4 Difh, 5 i a Of the Art of Glfas. Difh, rub your Hands with Linfeed-Oyl, and itir ir about lcifurely fo as to colour the Water, which you mu ft put along with the former, in the mean time holding up the^Matter with your Staves, left it mould ftickto the VefTel. Take notice that a little fteeping at firft will tinge the Water very much, and when the Cement is juft yielding its colour, it will difcover certain Bluifh Streaks on the Water, like the Sun-Rays, and then you mull ftrain this Water out among the other, through a Searce, that the grofler part of the Ce- ment may remain - y afterwards pour in by little and little the frefh warm Water, itirring the Cement ealily, that it may not dilate too much, and give its colour all at once. After you have thus ftir'd it a- bout five or fix times, clofe and amafs it anew, by which means you'll fee how much 'tis diminiined, and what quantity of colour it has given. If the Lapis be good and right, you'll find it will the firft Steepings yield about four-or five Ounces of V!tra-mari>:c, which keep apart by its felf as the belt and fincft colour, tho it appear grofler than the others of this fort, by reafon of the Gold-coloured Vein;, which are peculiarly therein. For thefecond, whereof you'll have three or four Ounces, you mult follow the ProcefTes aforemen- tioned, this indeed will be finer than the o- ther, but not fo good a Colour \ keep it alfo by it felf. Draw off a third, and this will be ftill finer than the former, but paler and more bright co- loured. You muft ftiil purine the fame Directions to extract it, letting your Water be but half luke- warm, and take care to manage the Cement dex- troufly with the Spatula's, and fo preferve the Co- lour apart. You Of the Art of Glafs. 5 1 3 You may extract a fourth Colour after this rate, butthe Water mufl be hotter, and you muftprefs the Cement very well with the Spatula's to fqueeze out the Colour, and if nicer Water will not do, make life of the mild Lixivium of Chap. 229. this laft Colour will be Grayifh, or Afh-colour'd, and of no great value, and therefore not at all to be mixt with any of the reft. Obferve here that you can't take up lels than eight Hours full, to extract the Colours, nor than ten or twelve to allow the Water for fetling, and if you perceive the Colour does not come out free e- nough with the warm Water, add a third part of our mild Lixivium, and if that does not do, ufe all Lixivium, but let it be cold, and when that fails too of effecting it fufficiently, you mufl make a Lixi- vium of Vine-ftalk Afhes, and this being ftrained, iet it boil for half a quarter of an Hour, until it be fharp enough to bite your Tongue 5 and then let it fettle and grow clear} this is your laft fhift for extracting your Colour, and with this heated, wafh vour Cement very well, and fet it afide : The whole deiign of all this trouble, is only to ferve for obtaining the greater quantity of Vltra-ma- rinc, and this confifts in the goodnefs of the La- pis Lazuli and the Cement, which the Circumfpecti- on and care taken in all their Preparations muft advance. C H A P. 314 0/ the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CCXXXVI. The Method of cleanfing the Ultra-marine when 'tis fe- farated from the Cement. AFTER you have extracted all your Colours out of the Cement, and the Water quite fetled and feparated from them, pour on fome of the mild Lixivium before prefcribed, and fo warn them with your Hands (but don't rub it between them) thus you'll take away all the Greafe of the Cement -, af- terwards waih it three or four times in fair Water, and let the Waters fettle well before you put them into their proper Veffels. You may elle another way purge the Vlna-marine, thus. Take the Yolksiof Pullets-Eggs, that have been fed only with Corn, and not with Greens, prick thefe with a Pin, and fo moiftenthe Colours, knead- ing the Mafs with your Hands, and warning it after- wards with your mild Lixivium^ until the \Jxivwm falls off clear again. This done, wafh them three or four times over with fair Water, letting the Wa- ters fettle well before you put them into their Vef- fels. This la ft way of purifying the Vltra-marinc^ is mighty effectual ■-, but here is another help to be u- fed with it, which is a very great Secret, and per- formed thus : After the Colours are quite waihed ac- cording to former direction, as well as poflible, you muft call therein by little and little, a Bulfs-Gall, rubbing it by degrees with your Hands :, fo warn them often in clear Water, and you'll have the Co-* lour in full perfection. C II A R Of the Art of Glafs. 5 1 5 CHAP. CCXXXVII. To firain off the Ultra-marine already Waflit and Purified. IT is neceflary to firain off the Vltra-marinc, and the reft of the Colours, that if any Greafe , or Unftuofity of the Cement remain , it may be taken quite away, for thefe Colours require a Perfed and Extraordinary Purifica- tion. For this Purpofe, take a fine Searce, and pour thereon the laft Waters, with which you warned the Vltra-marinc, and fo firain them afterwards through another fine' Searce, and a third time through Red Quintain, or Crape } but you mufl ob- ferve when you firain them, to let them fland till you perceive them limpid and clear, and fo foak off the Water dextrouily with a Spunge, and be fure not to firain them promifcuoully all toge- ther. This being done to all the Waters, let your Co- lours fettle in their proper Veflels, and dry in the Shade} when dry, put them into little Leather- Bags j tie thefe clofe, rubbing and prefiing them with your Hands ^ this will make them very fub- tile, and when the Bags arc opened, they'll fhew much fairer than before. CHAP. 5 1 6 Of the Art of Giafs. CHAP. CCXXXVIII. To CorreB the Colours jits t before prepared. FEW Perfons, unlefs fuch as are very curious of their Work,make any ufe hereof,becaufe of the time it takes up, tho it would turn very much to their account } for one Ounce of this Colour cor- rected, will go farther than three that are not. If you would make your Colours jufc before pre- pared, much finer and effe&ual than they are, mix them again with a ftrong Cement, and let them re- main therein for three Days , afterwards proceed according to the Jaft directions, to ieparate them a- gain } reiterate this over again, and you'll have them exceeding good, and tho they diminifh fome- what in weight, yet that Lofs will.be repayed confi- derably in the Beauty and Value. C H A P. CCXXXIX. slnother Way to make Ultra-marine, and draw off the Colours with more Expedition. ^~^ H I S Method of making Vltra-marim, \> much more ready than the former •, and Experience will fhew whether the Colour be a gainer or lofer thereby. Take a Pound of Lapis hamuli, calcine it in a Crucible, and quench it afterwards in Vinegar, fp let it dry, and then reduce it to a very fine Pow- der j grind it on a Porphyry, with fair Water, and fo Of the Art of Glafs. 5 I J fo fet it in a glazed Earthen Veflel in the Shade, un- til it be dry j if yon find it coagulated all in a Mafs, you mult Powder it again. This done, make a Cement of three Ounces of Greciax-fytch, four Ounces of Rofin of the Pine^ three Ounces of Maftick, three Ounces of Fran- kincenfe, two Ounces of Oyl-Oiive \ fet thefe over a How Fire in a frtiall Earthen Pot, into which pour firft the Oyl, and when that's hot, put in the Rofin, then the Pitch, then the Incenfe, and lait of all the Maftick, flirring them continually with the Wooden Spatula, and let them boil a little. Having made the Cement, get another Earthen Veflel, and put thereinto the Lapis Lazjth\ and pour on it the Cement hot, flirring the whole together with the Spatula very leifurcly, until they perfectly incorporate ; let this Hand a whole Day, and when you would draw off the Colours, pour thereon boil- ing Water, ftirring it very fmartly. When it begins to cool, pour it out, and Co put in more hot Water } do thus till the Water begins to draw off' the Colour, and fo continue until it be quite extracted \ you may diftinguifh the Waters, and fo fet them apart, and obtain the Variety of Colour, as in the former way. If your Colour feems to be clammy, or nafly, you may correct it thus. Add thereto Tartar diilblved in Water, as much as will drown it, and let it re- pofe for one Day at leafl, fo warn it in warm Wa- ter, and you will by that means have it very correct, ^nd well purified. CHAP. 3i8 OftheArtofGUfs. CHAP. CCXL. Another Way to make Ultra-marine. C~1 RANTING the two former ways to be fuffici- T ent, we will however here give a third, which we believe may as well be plcafing to thofe who are not fatisfied with the other ; as to fueh Perfons as have a Curiofity for thefe forts of Work j and thus we propofe to proceed. Not to difcourfe of the Ways to try the goodncfs of the Lapis Lazuli, which we have mentioned diffi- dently already, you mull break it into grofs pieces- as finall as Nuts, then fet thefe in a Crucible into the Furnace, till they redden with heat, and fo caft them into cold Watery do thus fix or feven times, and fo reduce them to impalpable Powder in a Por- phyry-Mortar well covered over, left the Powder which is very fubtile, mould difperfe away into the Air, and then fearce it with a fine Scarce alfo co- vered. After this, take of Rofin of Tines, ordinary black Pitch, Maftic\, frefh Wax, and Turpentine, o Teach three Ounces, of Incenfe, and Linfeed-Oyl, each one Ounce, melt all together in an Earthen Vcflcl, ftirring them very well, that they may mix *, this Stuff being well incorporated, caft it into Water, and keep it for ufe. To each Pound of Lapis hamuli, add ten Ounces thereof, and fet them to difiblve in a Pot over a fmall Fire, firft melting the Cement, and then call- ing on the Lapis Lazuli by little and little, otflfcn ing fuch an order in this, and continually ftirring the Mafswitha Stick, that they may mix infeniibly to- gether j Of the Art of Glafs. 3 1 9 gether •, afterwards caft the Mais into an Earthen Veflel of cold Water, and anointing your Hands with Linfeed-Oyl, mould it up into a number of Cakes, or Rolls, which leave in cold Water for five Days, fhifting the Water every other Day. This done, put them into a large and very clean glazed Earthen Veflel, pouring on them fome clean hot Water \ when that cools, pour in more hot, and do thus till the Paftilsfoftcn with the heat of theWa- tenThis doue,put them into hot Water,and let them be until it receive a Bluiih colour ^ ftrain this Wa- ter to referve the groffer pieces, and fo put it into another glazed Earthen Veflel very clean, adding more to the Paftils, which ftrain through a fine Scarce afterwards among the former j continue this until all the Colour be extracted, and no more re- main behind. Your Water mult be only warm, otherwife it will occalion a Blackncfs in the Colour, which is to be taken care of, and imports very much. All your coloured Waters being in the Veflel, you may cleanfe them of any Un&uofity, by repofing them for twenty four Hours, in which time the Co- lour will flick to the bottom j then you may pour off the Water gently into another Veflel, and it will carry off the Greafe along with it •, ftrain it after- wards into the Veflel where the Colour is again, through a fine Scarce, and all the Greafe and Nafti- nefs will be left behind ^ do thus thrice, ftirringthe Colour very well every time you return the Water to it, that the Filth and Greafe may afcend from it, and it will always flay in (training on the Searce be- hind the Water. This done, let the Colour precipitate entirely, and fo pour off all the Water very leifurely, for fear of difturbing it •, dry this Colour, and you'll have delicate Vkrx-marine. If 3ao Of the Art of Glaft. If you would imitate this Colour at little charge, make ufe of our Blue-Enamel, after the fame man- ner, and inftcad of the Lapis Lazuli, obferving with- out exception, the like Regimen and Prefcription jufl: now delivered in every refpect, and by this means you'll have a very pretty agreeable Colour to Paint with, and for tinging of Glafs. Many other Ways might be given here for making Vltra-marirte, befides thefe we have already laid down, but becaufe the principal part of the Prepa- ration is in every one the fame :, we look upon thefe as fufficient, and that it would be but needlefs to re- peat any more. That the Lapis Lazuli may be made by Art as fine and good as the Natural, which is gotten from the Mines, we allow, and mould freely aflign the Me- thod for it, if there were a fcarcity thereof in France, but iince we have of it in abundance, 'tis much better to employ the time in working the ufuai way, than fpend it unprofitably by taking a more tedious Method. C H A P. CCXLI. To male German-Blue. NOTWITHSTANDING we have in the pre- ceding Chapter fhewn how to imitate very nearly the Vltra-marine Blue, with ordinary Ena- mel, whereof we have given the Preparation in Chap. 193. yet we will ihew too the Way to make German-Blue by Art, which is a Colour very fine and convenient to Paint withal. Take four Ounces of Mercury, or Quick-Jilver, fix Ounces of Flower of Sulphur, and a Pound of Sal- ArmoriiacJi ; Of the Art of Glafs. 31 1 Armoniack\ pound thefe very well in a Stone-Mor- tar, till all the Mercury be quite fupprefs'd, and no longer precipitable, then put the Mafs into a Glafs Jtody, the bottom luted up to the middle; fet this on a very flow Afh-Fire, let it Hand uncovered until all the moiihire be. exhaled, then head it very clofe, and ib improve the heat by degrees, until you bring the Mafs to a Sublimation ; and thus you'll havea very fine and delicate Autre, or German-blue, which reduce to very fort Powder on a Marble, or Porphi- )\ keeping it afterwards for ufesin Painting. The End of the Tenth Book. ... Y OF 1 3ii g O F T H E ART GLASS. i BOOK XI. Wherein the Manner of imitating all forts of Pearl /'/ Jhewn^ and done fo ejfeElually, as to give them an equal Splendour and Beauty with thofe which are Naturally produced in the Sea. CHAP. CCXLII. ALL the Ancients who have treated of theie- veral Sorts, and Properties of Precious Stones, have at the lame time difcourfed of Pearls, becaufe they claim a place among the firft and beft of Jewels, in refpeft of their Value, as well as their Beauty, and the fixt Quality which they contain, they having been at all times fought after, Of the Art of Gtafs. 313 after, for the Ornament and Pfeafure of Ladies, as they are at this Day \ for thefe Reafons we thought it convenient to give them a Place among our Works, that ffrom our Experience J the Curious might be informed how to make fuch Ar:ificially as fine and fplendid, as thofe which Nature forms in the Depth of the Ocean. We avow that the Produ&ion of Pearls, is very different from that of Precious-Stones, becaufe the latter proceeds from the Earth, and the former quite contrary, from the Shell-Creatures which are fhrouded in the Bottom of the Sea \ thefe receive their Nourifhment from the fame Liquid Subftance which crntributes to the Growth of the Shells, and this Slimy Subftance is refblvcd from the Watry Hu- mour of the Creature, by three feveral Procefles. The firft dries it by degrees, the next brings it to an hardnefs, and lafl of all, 'tis at certain times em- plyed by the Animal, for the Increafe of its Shell, and the place where this is effefred in the inmoft in* veloped recedes thereof. Now the firft Principle" of thefe, and all other Precious Stones, defcends from Above, to wit, the Univerfal Seed, which alone can give Birth and Increafe to all the Tenants of this vaft Univerfe j and thefe Precious Stones, as well as the Metals, are nourifhed in the Womb of the Earth , fo the living Creatures bear each other the Foetus within its Parent, &c. The Oriental Pearls are generated in the Fin% which contains them with the Mother as the Occident tal, or Weftem in our Oyfters, but the Beauty of thefe two, is very different, the Oriental being of a Silver White, and exceeding fplendid to the Occi- dental } the belt of thefe latter feldom arriving to any higher than the Colour of Milk. We will not here take notice of the particular Places of the EaSl^ where they are found, but only ixiform you, That Y i the 324 Of the Art of Glafs. the beft and moil beautiful come from the Per/Ian- Gulf, about the Ifle- of Ormns Bajfora : They are found in Furofe, not only in the Sea, but in Rivers, and Frefh Water :, we have them from Scotland, Si- lejia, Bohemia, Frifia, Lorrain,hc. in all which Pla- ces they are found very fine, only thofe of Frifia^ are very (mall. 'Tis thought the Fifh wherein the Pearl is genera- ted, becoming Sickly and Weak, and not able to di- fpoieof the Slimy Moiflurc for the Growth of its Shell, it remains in the Body thereof, and is dried: Hence the Birth of the Pearl, and fo by a continual fupply of the like Snbftaiice ilill coating it a-new, it beccmes large, juiras the Stone in the Bladder of Man, and other Creatures, engenders, and is fed by a Clammy Humour, which cannot be emitted by Urine, but remains behind, and fo hardens and be- comes a Stone : After the like manner the Be^oar Stone is bred in the Indian Goats of the Kingdom of Gohondea, and in the Galls of Wild-Boars in India, and the Hedgehogs of Malacca ; fo feveral other Stones, to which they give the Name of Bez^oar, are found in the Galls of Beeves, Deer, Goats, and o- ther Animals in France, and elfewhere, all which have great Vertues in Pbyfuk. How great and effectual thofe Pearls are in Phyfi- cal Matters, and what SuccefTes they reach there, is not to our Purpofe ; we only intend to fhew the way of imitating their Beauty by Art fo finely, and with fuch exaftnefs of Luitre, as not to leave it in the power of any todiftinguim them caiily from the true and Natural ones, they being made of the very fi- neit fort of Palte that can be, and the fame Stuff as the true ones. Poverty and Pride are two infeparable Compani- ons among our French ; fuch Ladies as make ufe of pure Pearl, are thefe that can afford if, and the lit- tle Of the Art of Gtafs. 3 3*5 tie Creatures that cannot reach the Price, but would however appear gay, are obliged to have rccouiTe to the Counterfeit, and content themfelves with I- mitation only of Nature : 'Tis fcrne Years iince the life of thefe latter was introduced in France, which now, not only the Puny Ladies, but thofe of Birth and Quality do wear ; this proceeded all from thai Fafliion which infenfibly reached ilill at the larger Pearls, which thefe Ladies coveted for Ornament \ and becaufe they could not be furnifhed enough with true, they made 11 fe of the Artificial; whence the Common Sort of Perfons received the Advantage to vie with Perfons of the Firfl Rank and Quality; which they don't fail to do, without Coiifideration of cither Eftate, or Condition, but only to conform wkh the Mode. . The Counterfeit Peaib, which arc ufually made, are juft the Colour of the Pafles, and of no Conti- nuance but for the prcfent ; they are done with a Compoiltion of Brittle Glafs and Wax a little melt- ed i and for Colouring, they ufc prepared Mercury^ Mouth-Glue, or any other Drug, to give them a Brightnefs, which foon Peels off, and Scales away, efpecially in the Heat of Summer : The Way which wp will give, is not only very good and folid, but .exceeding fine, being effected with Seed Pea :T, we ant thefe Pades to be much dearer than the for- mer, but conlider their Fiaenefs, and that they'll lajpb forever ; we (hall alfo fhew how to make the Counterfeits liner and harder :, and we arc perfuad- ed, that the Preparation of thofe we (hull aflign, will appear fo eaiie, and yet- produce fuch line Imi- 'tations, as /hall be very fatisfuCicry. ■ C H A P, 3^6 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CCXLIII. To imitate fine Oriental Pearl. THE Difference between thofe which arc at pre- fent wore by the Ladies, and fuch as we mall prefcribe, as to the Goodnefs, Hardnefs, and Fine- nefs of the StuffJ we have already endeavoured to clear. But before we proceed any further, take thefe re* maining Parts of the Fuaiace in Chap. 52. The Letter 0, is the Balneum MarU. P, The VeflTel for containing the Sand, or Afli- Fire. Qjy The Eyes, or Holes of the Furnace. .ff, Their Cover, which when they are fet on, draw in the Air, and incrcafe the Heat for Fufion *, the others are Crucibles. We did alfo intend to give the Defcription of a- nothcr Furnace at the clofc of the Fifth Book, as well for the Service of the Matters in that, as the Sixth Book : You may, however take it along with you here. A, is the Afh-hole \ you may add to it an Hovel, for fucking in the Air, which mull be luted to it ve- ry firmly. 2?, is the Infide where the Allies fall into •, this ought to be lofty tor drawing the Air. C y is the Grate^ and muft be of very ilrong Iron Bars. D, is 0/ the Art of Glajs. 317 J>, is the Opening through which the Crucibles and Fuel is put in, this ought to be of well temper- ed Iron, and luted within fide with very good Lute, at leaft three Inches thick. £, is the Chamber where the Works are Ba- ked. F, is the Coverlid of the Furnace, which is to be Vaulted firm, and made of the fame Earth. <7, is the Chimney, over which you may fet fe- veral Iron Plates one above t'other, for drawing the Air. H, is the Hovel, or fhelving place of Iron for the AfhrHole. /, are Funnels for the Chimney Plates, and the Hovel. K, is a Crucible. If this Furnace be made five or fix Inches thick, it will bear all degrees of heat, and lerve very conve- niently for Private Perfons, by making it of a fuita- ble largenefs inftead of the Qlafs-houfe Furnace : When you make your Fire of Wood, there will be no occafion for the Hovel of the Afh-hole. But to go on with our Pearl. You mult take two Pound of thrice diftilled Vi- negar, one Pound of Ven ce Turpentine, mix them together, and fb put the Mafs into a Glafs Cucurbit i fit to it the Head and Receiver, luting the Joynts ^ let them dry, and fo fet it on a Sand -Furnace to di- ftil the Vinegar j keep a gentle heat, left the Stuff fvvell up. Afterwards put the Vinegar into another Glafs- Cucurbit, wherein you rauft hang a quantity at dis- cretion, of Seed Pearl, ftrung on a Thread of Sil- ver or Gold, done about with a piece of very thin Silk^ thcfe mult hang in the middle of the Body, fo a§ not to touch the Vinegar ; This done, head Y 4 your 3^8 Of the Art of Glafs. your Cucurbit with a Blind Head, and lute it vei / well ) fet it in a moderate B. Maria well clofed, there to remain for a Fortnight - 7 the heat of the B. will elevate the Fumes of your Vinegar, and they'll continually circulate about the Pearl, and lb foftenand bring them to the Confidence of a Pafte, which being once performed, take 'em off and mould them up in what Form you plcafe, round, long, or Peaalike, and as big as you think fit \ do this with Moulds of fine Plate gilded within } you muft not touch the Pafte at all with your Hands, but altoge- ther Work it with a Plate Spatula, which will fill the Moulds, then bore them through with a Porkers Brittle, or Gold-Wire, and fo let them dry a little ^ then Thread them again with Gold-Wire, and let them in a clofed Glafs, which lay in the Sun, to dry them to a hardnefs \ fet them afterwards in a Glafs Matrafs, in a Stream of Running Water, leaving it there for twenty Days ^ and about that time they af- fume their frit folidity and hardnefs. To give them Tranfparency and Splendour, you muft prepare fome Mocury- Water, after the Rate we fhall prefcribe in the next Chapter. When you have taken them out of the laft Matrafs, wherein they were for twenty Days, as the Running Water, hang them in a Veflel of Glafs where the Alcrcnry- Watcr is, and fo they'll moilten, fwell, and afTumc their Oriental Beauty : This clone, fhirtthem out of this Water into a Matrafs clofed Hermetically, for fear that any W T ater mould be admitted into it, and fo clown with it into a Well, leaving it there for eight whole Days \ then draw it up, open the Matrafs, and you'll have them as fine and good as any Orien- tal Pearls vvhatfoever. This Method is a little long, but v\ ithal 'tis effe- ctual and fure 3 however 'tis not thus the Philofo- phers, 0/ the Art of Glafs. 329 phers, or Vtrtuofi Work, for they have another Way, much fhorter, having regard only to one Spi- rit; nor have I Experience enough in their Matters, to make a Difcovery thereof; and if I had, itcou'd not be done without difobli^ing them irreconcila- bly ; therefore take what I have delivered on this Important Subject, in good part; and be allured, that if yon were acquainted with that Secret which they fo clofely refcrvc, there could be nothing done more by it as toGoodnefs and Beauty in this WOrk, than by our prefcribed Method, which is very e- ffimable, and more precious than you'll imagine, whereof lcanafiign you no better, or other Argu- ment, than Experience, to convince you. CHAP. CCXLIV. To make Mercury-Water for giving Tranfparency ahd StUndour to the V earls. HAVING promifed this Secret of making Mer- cury- Water to compleat the Tranfparency, and Natural Luftre of your Pearls, which is a Mas- ter ib highly valuable, that a very conliderable Sum has been offered in our Prefence, for the Difcovery thereof, to a certain Perfo:i ^ yet we are free, that Ex- perience mould have its due courfc of informing the Ignorant, and mall, for our part, generoully acquit our Engagement. • You mult take Plate Tin of Cornwall calcined, let the Calx be very fine and pure, amalgamate one Ounce thereof, with two Ounces of prepared Mer- p«rywell punned ^ waffi the Am'gdfnti with Wa- ter, until the water remains clear and inlipid ; then drying the Amalgama throughly, put it into a Ma- trafs 33° Of the Art of Glafs. trafs over a Furnace, keeping fuch a degree of heat as is required for Sublimation ; when tl^ Matter is well Sublimated, take oft'the Matrafs^l^ let it cool, and fo take out the Sublimate \ to which add one Ounce of Venice Sublimate and grind them well to- gether on a Marble, fo put them into another Ma- trafs, clofe it very well, and fet it topfy-turvy in a Pail of Water, and the whole Mafs will refolve its felf in a little time, all into Mercury- Water : This done, filter it into a Glafs Receiver, and fet it on a gentle Afh-Fire to coagulate, and it will be brought to a Cryftalline Mafs \ take it oft, and with a Glafs Peftle and Mortar pound it very well to a very fine Powder, which fearce through a fine Searce, and put it into a well ftopt Matrafs in B. Maria, let- ting it remain till it refolve again into Water ; and this laft fhall be the Mercury- Water which you muft preferve to employ on your Pearl. CHAP. CCXLV. Another Way fo make thefe Pearls. THIS is an eafier way than the former, for by Baking them/as we fhall fhew)you very much fhorten the time which the Preparation would elfe take up ; however you muft not expeft them fo De- licate and Natural as the firft, the Caufe whereof is cafie enough conceived \ for thefe Pearl having en- larged themfelves in the Water, as we already no- ted, 'tis reafbnable to believe the hardning them af- terwards in the Cold, will be of a much more Na- tural Effect, than if done with heat. Take very fair Oriental Seed Pearl for this pur- pofe, and reduce it to impalpable Powder on <* Mar- ble . -^i----*^. — -wr— i'-« .a« -W '« - , " a i lii rri i r'- - t. , . ii i -' ^:Jk& »"' ■ ! Of the Art of Glafs, 331 ble, to diflblve afterwards in Mercury- Water, or clarified Juice of Lemons \ if this be not effeded quick enough, fet it in a Cucurbit over warm Afhes, and be very careful to take the Cream ( which in a little time will appear at top) immediately off, fo withdraw the Difiolution from the Fire, and let it fettle a little •, this done, pour it gently into ano- ther Glafs Body, andkeepita-part, you'll have the Pearl in a Pafte at the bottom, with which fill your gilded Plate Moulds, made to what bignefs, or form you think fit, prefllng the Pafte with the Silver Spa* tula, and fo fhut them up four and twenty Hours ; after you mult take and bore them through with a Porker's Briftle, clofe up the Moulds, and leave them in the Oven in a Pafte of Barly Dough, which being half Baked draw out and open, taking away all the Pearl, and fteep them in the Diflblution juffc before dire&ed to be kept a-part, putting them in and out feveral times \ fo clofe them in their Moulds and Bake them again with the like Pafte as before^ only let this laft be almoft burnt up before you draw it out \ thus you'll have the Pearl well baked and hardned. This done, draw it out, open all the Moulds^ take away the Pearls and ftring them on one or more Gold or Silver Threads j fteep them in Mercury- Water, given in the former Chapter, for about a Fortnight \ after this dry them by the Sun in a well clofed Glafs Body, fo you'll have very fine and fplen«< did Pearl. CHAP, 33 1 Pf f ^ e ^ rt °f Glafs. C H A P. CCXLVI. Another Way. THO this be a more common way than the pre- ceding, we will not omit it,, becaufe every one may have his choice to take that Method which beft fuits with his Apprehenfion, or Conveniency. You mud, as in the former, take very fair Ori- ental Seed Pearl ground to an impalpable Powder, and diflblve it in A Ilom- Water, then rack off that Water, and warn the Pafte of Pearl which remains at bottom, firft with fome diftilled Waters, then in Bean : Water, and fet it in B. Marht y or Horfe-dung, to digeftfor a Fortnight \ afterwards take out your Veflel, and the Matter being come to the Con lift en'. 1 . (A a Pafte, mould up the Pafte in, the gilt Silver- Moulds, as before directed, bore them with a Bri- ttle, ftring them on Gold or Silver Thread, and hang them in a very well clofed Limbeck of Glafs, to prevent the Air from coming in to fpoil them Thus dried lap them one by one in Leaves of Sil- ver, and fplit open a Barbie, as if you were to Fry him, and fo clofethem all up in his 'Body, mak Pafte of Barly-Meal, and Bake him in it, as you would a Batch of Bread, and no more, afterw^r^s draw it out, and let them dry. To give a Transparency and Splendour to thefe Pearls:, if you don t care for uling our Mercury- Water, inftead thereof, take the Herb Gran /; fqueczed in Water, put into this Water fix Ounces of Seed Pearl, one Ounce of Sott-petitr} an Ounce of " Roth-sillcm, an Ounce of Litharge of Silvei \ the whole being dilTolved, take your dried Pearls,, heat them Of the Art of Glafi. 333 them firft, and then cool them in this Diflblution - 7 thus do for about fix times at lcaft, heating and cooling them at this rate therein. If your Pearl fhould happen to fail of coming to a fufficient hardnefs, you may correct and make them exceeding hard by Baking them a fecond time after this manner. Take two Ounces of Calamy^ or Lapis Calamina-i ns, in impalpable Powder j add to this two Ounces of Oyl of Vitriol, and two Ounces of the Water of White Eggs \ put all thefe into a Retort, lute thereto a Receiver, and let them diftil, you'll have from them a very fair Water, with which, and fome very fine' Barly-Meal, make a Pafte, Coffin your Pearls in this, and Bake them in an Oven as before, they'll thus become exceeding hard, and recover their Natural Tranfparency. There are many other Ways very good to make Pearl with Oyls, which add to the Growth and Largenefs of the Seed Pearl, as much as you will have them, but all thefe Preparations being very te- dious, and our Book large enough already, we are. of Opinion, 'tis bed to let them alone for the pre- fent j belides, we have faid enough to hand the In- telligent Readers to thofe Secrets difcourfed off^ and taught them herein, referving the more enlarged and fuller Inftru&ions for the firft Edition we make hereof in two Volumes. CHAP. 334 Of f ^ e ^ rf °/ Ghfi. CHAP. CCXLVII. //air to blanch fine Pearl. THE Beauty of Pearl confifh entirely in the Brightness of their White Colout, fuch as are Spotted, or of a dark Yellow, being the leaft eftimable j you may however reftore thefe lait to a true Lufter and Whitenefs, by letting them foak and cleanfe firlt in Bran-Water, then in Milk-warm Water, and laft of all fleep them twenty four Hours in the Mercury- Water afligned Chap. 244. This done, firing and hang them in a well clofed Glafs Body, to dry in the Sun, as before. The BranAVater is made by boiling two good Handfuls of Wheaten-Bran in a Quart of Watery until the Water has drawn all the Strength thereof to it ; and thus you are to ufe it afterwards for cleanfing the Pearl \ you muft firing and lay them all together in a glazed Earthen Pan, and pour there- on one third of this Water, when they have foaked, until the Water be tolerably cooled, that you may endure the heat, rub them with your Hands gently to cleanfe them the better ; continue fo until the water be cold, throw out this cold water, and pour on another third part of the Bran-water ftill boil- ing, and fo ufe it as the former, throwing it away when cold, and then pouring on the remainder of the water, proceeding ftill after the former man- ner \ after this, juft heat fbme fair water, and pour it on them, to refrclh and take away the Remains of the Bran ; fhift this water, pouring on more frelh warm water \ do thus thrice without handling them, then lay themon a Sheet of very clean white Paper, to- Of the Art of Glafs. 555 to dry in a Shade, and laft of all fteep them in your Mercury-water, to bring them to Perfe&ion. CHAP. CCXLVIIL jinother Way to Blanch and Clean fe fine Peart, THERE are feveral other eafie ways to cleanfe and whiten the Pearl, which may fer/e en in- different oceafions, and for ordinary ufes. Pound Alabafler to impalpable Powder, and rub the Pearl with it very gently, this will cleanfe them, or you may let them remain in this Powder twenty four Hours afterwards, they be ftill much the better for it. White Coral has alfo the fame Effed as the Ala- baiter, ufing it after the like manner* Tartar calcined white, and diverted of all its moi- fture, as we have (hewn elfewhere, is very good for the fame ufe. Clary ? or Old Salt dhTolved, filtered, coagulated, well dried and ground, is as effe&ual as any of the former things, for cleaning and blanching of Pearl, by rubbing them therewith a confiderabletime } you may afterwards lay them up in fome Millet ground large, and it will contribute to them a Natural Brightnefs. There are feveral other ways to cleanfe and whi- ten Pearl, but thofe we have here propofed, are fuf- ficient. CHAP. 33^ Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CCXLIX. To make Counterfeit Pearly very like the Natural. THIS Receipt for making Counterfeit Pearl has a much more fine and folid effect than any now ri-days in life. Take Chalk well purified, and feparated from its grofsnefs and Sand,make Pafte thereof, and fo mould it up like Pearl in a Mould for that purpofe \ pierce thefe through with a Brittle, and let them after- wards dry before the Sun, or for more difpatch in an Oven, till they receive a juft hardnefs^ then (tring them on a very fine Thread of Silver, colour them over lightly with Bole-Armoniaih, diluted in water of Whites of Eggs, then drench them with' a Pencil and Fair water, and fo apply Leaf-Silver all over, and let them dry \ this done, burnifhtheiri with a Wolf's Tooth, till they fhine very finely. To give them the true Colour of Pearl, make a Glue of Parchment, or rather Vellom Shavings^thus. Wafh the Shavings in warm Water very well, and boil them after in a new Pot to a thicknefs, and (train this Glew. When you ufe this Glue, you mult warm it on a flat Veflel, then dip the firing of Pearl therein, fo as not to fill the interval Inches between each Pearl, but that every one may bedoneall over equally •, af- ter this let them dry \ if you obferve any Baulk, or Defect on them, you may dip them in a fecondtime j thus they'll afliime a finer and more tranfparent Whitenefs, and will have a certain Darknefs within, and Luftre on the outfide, which compleats and brings Of the Art of Glafs. 337 )rings them to the Natural Beauty of real fine } earl. You may after this manner do with Tranfpai ent teads of Alabafter, and very white Mouth-Glew, md it will add very much to their Beauty } but Leaf >ilver does certainly contribute molt of any thing :lfe whatever to their Splendour. Z OF 33 8 OF THE A R T O F GLASS. BOOK XII. To make Cryftal Loohng-gUfs : How to Grind, Polijlj, Diamond-Cut, and Silver them : To Make Glafs and Metal Mirrours, &C. T CHAP. CCL. I HIS is the Twelfth and laft Book of our Art of Glafs, which fhould have indeed fucceeded the Firft \ but we waited fomc Memoirs on the Subjecl, nor we have not yet found them ; this made us put it off^ and place it here : Befides, there is fuch a Coherency of Matters, in the Order of the Second Book, as we could not poi- iibly difpofe of any other way, without breaking their Of the Art of Glafs. 359' their due Courfe, and the Affinity and Connection theyhavc with each other, which the Reader may eafily perceive , but what matter is it where we place this, fo that it may be found among our Works \ and we deliver nothing therein, but what we have been familiar withal. That of Looking-glafles is undoubtedly the fineft and more admirable part of Glafs- Work j 'tis the mofl perfect Mailer-piece of all the Art. We pre- fume the Order we have given in placing it here, will be approved of, fince 'tis the Subject of the laft Book, and the Twelfth, which is a perfect Number, and comprehends all other in Sacred Philofophy. Twelve, the Number of Grace and Perfection, has been highly efteemed at all times for thofe Won- derful Properties afcribed to it} 'tis very much ce- lebrated in Holy Writ, and the Divine Plato has u- fed it with the lame Deference in his Works, if the Account which thofe, who were intimate with this Famous Number Twelve, have left of it, were not Foreign to our Defign, we could give the Curious fuch extraordinary Relations, as would create a Mighty Refpect in them for the fame. We already noted in the Firft Chapter, that 'tis about Two Hundred Years fince the Invention of Looking-glafles, and alfo how they were found out : Before thefe the Ladies made ufe of Steel, or Cop- per, or well polifhed Marble Mirrours, thefe have been in ufe for many Ages : We can by the help of Hiftory, look back on them as far as the Time of Oaiai King of Juda, which was about the Fourth- or Fifth Olympiad ■■> and as many Years before the Building of Rome 5 Seven Hundred and fixty four Years after this, our Cbrifiian z&ra commenced.. Now tho' the Tyriuns were very converfant in Glafs- work, yet they had not the Knowledge of making Looking-glafs. 7t i ■ Among 34-0 Of the Art of Glafs. Among all the Excellencies of the Art,nonc comes near this, nothing can be finer, or admit of greater Admiration, than to fee that all the Actions of the Beholder, are fo juftly and lively reprefented in thefe Gl alfes, that he has an opportunity of difco- vcring what is to be valued on him, and correcting what's amifs ; thefe Truths are too apparent for any to difprove :, for the Experience of them are at this Day to be made as ealily by the Meaneil as the Greatcfr Perfbns. Wc ihalldiilourfe but very briefly of the Metal for making thefe Glades ^ for 'tis the fame Cryilal we have prefcribed throughout the Firfr. Book, but we will enlarge on this Matter a little, for the con- veniency of making the Mirrours of Metal, &c. whereof we'll fhew how to compound the Stuffy and the way of working them. CHAP. CCLI. Tic Way 10 male Looking-glafs. ALL thofe who employ themfelves in the Art of CiLifs, do it always without derogating from their Quality, as we have noted in Chap. 3. which our Kings have always taken care to maintain. The Undertakers of the Royal Gla[s-A4annfaiiurc, infWwu, when they obtained their Grants of Pri- vjlcdges., did at the fame time require, That all Ferfonsof Quality, who mould aflbciatc in the Ma- nufacture, might do it without leffening their Quali- ty ; to which his Majcfly agreed with Exemption from their 7>/Zfe, and feveral other Privileges, as Quartering of Soldiers, &c. for all fuch, their Sub- stitutes, Servants, and Dome/licks. The Of the Art of Glafs. 34.1' The firft Grant of Priviledges to this Manufa- cture, bears Date in October \66%. in Favour of Nidriolas du Noyer, for Twenty Years, which was renewed by Letters Patent of the la ft of December 1683. for Thirty Years to Peter Bagnenx. The fecond Privilege for the Afariufaftttrs Royal of Large <7/*/},was granted Decemb. 1 4. 1 6$$. to ylbrahata T'Hcvart, for Thirty Years, with the Giving Pri- vilege of Nobility as the former : Thefe having fet- ledatSt. Gobi??, wzM'LaFere, did by Letters Patent of February 1693. obtain Exemption from the Taille.^ (or Subfidy on the Third Elhte, which is a conftant TaxJ and other Impolitions, as well for thcmfelves, as their Deputies and Servants. And to avoid all Conteft, thefe two Manufactures were united by Order of the Council of State, Mil j 9. 1695. and Confirmed May 1. following, under the Name of Fra?icts PLrftrier. How for making thefe Glafles, the fame Cryftal affigned throughout Book 1. isiufficieat} the Dif- ference is only inftead of Working it as you do there, to call it fiat and not blow, as in Chap. 3. to which we refer the Reader. The Manner of Calling the Metal, did not com- mence with the Invention of Looking-glafs :, for the Workmen at firil, ufed to take a piece of Metal ve- ry large, dipt and done on the Marble into Quarries as big as they'd have them :, thefe they fet after- wards on a Pallet of Iron in the Furnace, till they were in a Fufion, and fo fpread and united :, hence they took and put them into another little Furnace for that purpofe, S. S. S. with line fcarced Afhes to Bake :, this done, they raifed the Fire by degree-, aiid fo let it go out again, and drew off the dalles, working them after our manner in the next Chap- ter. Z 3 1 1 in 34-^ 0/ the Art of Glafs. Thus too they wrought their little Round Glafles, or Mirrours, firftftiaping them out of a long piece of Metal, by Circumvolution, end afterwards clip- ping them as the former, fo finifhed them in the Furnaces, and made them fit for Polifhing. Since that time having attempted to make them very large, they fell upon the Way of Calling the Glafs like other Metal on Sand Beds, fuel} as the Founders ufej and to perform it the better, they have a Roller of Metal to run over the Surface of the Glafs Metal for enlarging the Plate, and to fmooth and compact it withal. For fuch as would make them very large indeed, as are wrought at Afnran near Venice, and in our Royal Manufactures, they had a much better, and caller Method than doing them on Sand, viz.. in large Tables of well polifhed Copper, whereon they cafe the Metal, butthefe not having ftrength enough to abide the Heat, we have lince madeufe qf Iron, which will fufficiently perform the Effect. Thefe Tables whereon theGlailesareatfirft fight Caft to their proper Largcnefs, mud have their bottom funk as low as you intend the Thicknefs of your Glafs-Plate, and have a Conveniency to pulh it out, as foon as ever 'tis prepared thereon. Some make life of Marble ones with Covers, o- ver which they have a Plate, or Runner of Metal, to Hide and prefs it on the Glafs Metal, that the Glafs Plate may be the more compact- and even. Thus are large Glafles made, which are no lefs furprizing than pretty, and 'tis a very conliderable Improvement they are brought to at this Day, of making them fo extraordinary large for Mirrours : One would admire to what Perfection the Wit of Man may arrive at, and is capable of bearing from the advantage of Serious Application and Study in profound Matters. CHAP. Of the Art of Glafs. 34.5 CHAP. CCLII. To Grind, Polijl), and Cut the Looking-Glajs. AFTER you have it from the Furnace, you muffc lay it on Sand, in a convenient place to ftrengthen, elfe it will break in Working it ; then grind it on very fine Sand and Water. This time 'tis that the Workmen give it the firft Fafhioning} then they do it over again with Powder of Emery inftead of the Sand, and fo give it a feeond Improvement \ when they have done it enough with thefe two, they do it a third time with Trifoty inftead of Emery, this Polifhes the Glafs rer- fedtly j others give thefe Glafles a fourth Procels with Calx of Tin, to bring them to a very extraor- dinary Luftre and Poliih. The Diamond-Cut is done by Grinding the Cry- stal on Drift Sand and Water, as much as you think convenient. Thefe are thefeveral Methods for fiwftiing the Looking-glafs all to the Silvering, which mult be difpofed thereon, as in the next Chapter before it has the Quality of a Mirrour. 7. s C \) A P. 344 Of the Art of Glafs. CHAP. CCLIII. To File, or Silver the Lookhlg-Glafs. THE Glafs is not perfected, till it be Silvered ; for without that, it is impoffible it fhould di- ftin&ly fhew the oppofite Objects ; 'tis the Filing, or Silvering 'therefore which gives it its juft Perfe- ction. For this you mufr. have a firm well fmooth'd Ta- ble, much greater than the Glafs, whereon fpread one or more Sheets of very fine Tin, let them be as thin as Paper, and fo prepared, as not to have any Rumple, Furrow, or Spot, elfe the Glafs will be fpoil'd : Over thefe Sheets fpread good Mercury. quite covering them with it \ when the Mercury has foaked in well, place the Glafs thereon, and it will flick to them \ then turn it, and fpread Sheets of Paper on the Filing :, prefs it gently, fmoothing and ftroaking it with your Hands, to take offthe Super- fluous Mercury \ then dry it in the Sun, or by a foft Fire, and it will become perfect. But becaufe 'tis not fo eafie to file the Large Glaf- fes as the fmall, you muft have recourfe to a Tabic for the purpofc, with a Diamond-Cut riling Border, to keep the Sides of the Glafs firm, whereon you muft lay it, with the Backlide, (which is to be filed) upwards ; then lay on the Sheeted Tin very fmooth, and clofely , over thefe the Merc/ery^to difiblve them :, then with the 'Sheets of Paper cover all, and fo fmooth, and run it over with your Hands to take a- ivay the Surplus of the Mercury, and fo dry it as before, The Of the Art of Glafs. 34.5 The reft of the Work depends on the Framing them', and giving the fuitable Ornaments accord- ingly. CHAP. CCLIV. How to make Spherical Concaves, and Convex Glajfes, commonly called Burning Mirrowrs. BEFORE we difcourfe of the Metal Mirrours, we will fhew how to do fuch of Glafs: The life Df thefe GlafTes is to unite the Sun-Beams, and fo vindle a Flambeau, Wood, or any other Combufti- l«le Matter. By them Metals alfo may be diflblved in \ little time as eafily as in a Crucible on a Furnace, or at a Forge. The Whole Myftery of making them, is to have the Moulds of a Round Shape, otherwife they have but a very weak Effect on the Sun Beams ; the Moulds mult be fo exactly made, as neither fide fhall differ from the other. To make the Concave Glafs, you muft have the Mould Convex, and the Convexity thereof muft be made by a Sphere, according as you have it greater or lefs ; and 'tis from this Sphere the Convexity of the Mirrour muft be taken : As for inftance, Take a Sphere of what bignefs you pleafe, divide it equal- ly, and alfo one of the Hemifphercs in three equal parts, by Planes parallel to the great Circle, the Convex Segment fhall then be the iixth part of the whole Sphere, and the Meafure of your Mirrour : To do this you may have recourfe to the Works of Archimedes, John Baptifia Porta, Kir c her, and many other Authors, If 24-6 Of the Art of Glafs. If you would make the Mirrour a Convex Glafs, you mufl have the Moulds Concave, and thefe you may do two ways,thus : Take the two Concave Sides of the Mould, and doling them together equally, as the Founders do their Frames, pour in through the Mouth of the Mould your Cryftal Metal, letting it fill the Mould, and afterwards cool. Another way is, to take two Concave Mirrours, and joyning their Faces, folder them well all about, only leaving a fmall Orifice, through which you may fill it with fome Aqua V~u&, and fo flop the Hole, and frame them with Wood, or Metal : This fort of Mirrour, has a more ready Influence on the Sun Beams then any other} we'll fay fomethingof the Effect there- of when we come to fpeak of the Metal Mirrours, but upon the whole Matter you mufl; have thefe Glaffes all very well polifhed. Thefe Burning Glaffes may be made Parabolick, or Spheroidal, and fnch have ftill a better Effect than the Spherick: You mufl: proceed in Mould- ing them as with the former ; you mufl obferve a jufl proportion in doing them } for when they are too much raifed, they are hindered by their Deepnefs from having a good Effect ; and up- on tjiis depends the Whole Nicity of the Art. C II A P, Of the Art ofGlafs. 347 CHAP. CCLV. How to make Metal Mirrours, Concave Sphericks, or Parabolic ks, ufually called, Steel Burning Mir- rours. T'HE Authors cited m the former Chapter are very ufeful to be confulted on this occafion to demonftratc the Method, life, and Excellency of thefe Mirrours ; for which reafon we fhall fay but little on that Subject. The Moulds for them are prepared as in the for- mer Chapter, whether Concave, or Convex, and for fuch as are flat, they may be caft on Sand. The Metal of thefe Mirrours is called Steel, be- caufe it is of a very hard and bright Compofureand Temper, and the harder the Metal, the better the Mirrour, and the eafier to polifli :, the Whitenefs of it is very convenient for giving the Quality of Burn- ing, and not only for that, but feveral other Ufes ; if it be too Red, or Black, it alters the true Diftance and Colour of its oppoiite Objects ; you mult there- fore make them of this following Compofition. Take three Pounds of Copper, one Pound of fine Tin, half an Ounce of White Arfenick, an Ounce of Tartar : Firft, melt the Copper, then put the Tin in immerged in the Copper, elfc it will fume away in the Melting, and leave the Copper behind ; thefe two being well melted together, calf in the Arfenick y and Tartar : After this let all melt for two or three Hours, and fo Mould it. Some Perfons dofe with the former weight of Copper and Tin, half a Pound of White Arfcnick ; ethers inftead of Arfemckjpvit in a quarter of a Pound of 348 Of the Art of Giafs. of Antimony. Here is another way to compound th Stuff of the following Ingredients } and after that another Compolition much more excellent than ci- ther. Take a Pound of well refined Copper, melt it, then add three Pounds of fine Tin :, as foon as thefe are well melted, add fix Ounces of Red Tartar cal- cined, one Ounce of Salt -fctr e, two Drams d$ : Allom^ and two Ounces of Arfenick, let thefe melt for three or four Hours, that the Salts may evaporate, and the Stuff will be fit for moulding :, this Stuff is more folid and hard than the former, and much better to make the flat Mirrours for Looking. You fhall be fhewn how to polifh them in the next Chapter. We having promifed to affign a much more ex- cellent Stuff for Concaves than the former ones, will give it here t becaufe of the hardnefs and compaclncfs thereof, it is more capable of polifhing, and confe- quently much better than the reft. Take Plates of Copper one Pound, mince 'em that they may be put into a Crucible, imbibing them with I Oyl of Tartar ^ then powder a quarter of a Pound of White Arfemtk, and put thefe S. S. 5. as we have ihewn the Method clfewherryintil you fill the Cruci- ble •, pour on them afterwards Linfeed-Oyl to co- ver the Arjcmck and the Coppery head and lute your Crucible, and when the kite is dry let it on a Sand- Furnace, letting the Sand arife no higher than the Head j heat the Furnace very gently till it arriv a juft degree, and the Oyl begins to evaporate ; H' this time the Oyl will prepare the Copper for re- taining the Arfcnick, which mult enter the Copper as ealily as Oyl does Leathery fet it again on frefh Sand, and increafe the heat of the Furnace, giving it the fame degree as before, until the Oyl evaporate and boyl up j then take off the Crucible, let it cool, and break it ? you'll find your Copper of feveral Co- lours, Of the Art of Glafi. 5 49 >urs, and would be muoh better, ifinfteadof Arfe- nit k, you made life of Orpiment. Take of this Copper one part, of Latten two parts, melt the Latten on afmart Fire,and fopnt in theCop- per ^ when they are well melted, call the Metal Drop by Drop into a glazed Earthen Veflel full of Water, over which lay a Bufh, or Broom lor the Stuff to go through \ thus you'll have a Metal notto be touched with a Hie, nor Brittle, as good as any Steel for all ufes whatfoever. Take of this hard Metal three parts, and belt Tin of Cornwall, which has no Lead in't, one part j melt the Metal before you put in the Tin ; after thefe are well incorporated, you may fill your Moulds, &c This is the bell of all our Compofitions for ma- king of all forts of thefe Metal Mirrours*, 'tis white, hard, not Brittle, and veryeafily polifhed exceeding fine. CHAP. CCLVI. To PolijJj the Steel Mirrours. WHATSOEVER Exa&nefsyou ufe in Mould- ing thefe, they do never receive their true Shape and Perfection, until they are Polifhed and Burnifhed - in doing which, leaft you mould fpoil, or endamage them, you mult Work away the Out- iideat the Wheel, with the Sand-Hone, which the i'evvterers and Braliers make ufe of, and then apply the Handle, and Poliih them fufficiently by rubbing v\ ith Water. This done, take it off this Wheel, and put it on the Second, where rubit with Imery prepared, that it 5 50 Of the Art of Glafs. it may be finely polifhed, fo as the Scars may be! fcarce perceptible. Do this in an Oblique Line. •Then take it off this, and fet it on fnch another -J rub it with Blood-ftone prepared, and afterwards life Calx of Tin, working it for a long time, until it have its due Burn im and Perfe&ion, ftill doing it in the fame Obliquity. You muft keep thefe Mirrours from the Moiftncfs of the Air, and Steams ^ or if they mould happen to be endamaged by any fuch, you may reftore them by rubbing on them a piece of Deer, or Goats Skin, humouring the Oblique Line ; you muft not ufe any Woollen, "or Linen Stuff, for they fpoil thefe Mir- rours. Thefe Mirrours may be alfo polifhed with Lead Artificially melted, with Emery and Water, for the Firft Procefs } and very fine Emery and Lead for the Second-, and in the Laft, with Blood-ftone and Tin Drofs , thefe make a finer Burnifh than the for mcr i for the Mirrour is highly polifhed by the Tin- Drofs. This is all we refolve to give account of on thefe fort of Mirrours, for attracting and uniting the Sun Beams. There are many other, as Cylinders, Py- ramids, whereof we forbear to difcourfe, mice the Authors which have writ of them, have done it with much more fuffxiency than we pi eteud to. They afcribe the firft Invention of Burning Mir- rours to Tromethens, when he ftole the Fire from Heaven to carry to the Earth. Archimedes made ve- ry happy fife of them in defence of his Country, when he burnt the Fleet of Marcellns before Syracuje^ by placing his Burning Glafs on the higheft Turret in the City .whence proceeded fuch a mighty Confla- gration, as deftroy'd that vaft Flota in fpight of Neptune and the Waters. Vrodm too, a Brave and Famous Mathematician, burnt the Fleet of Vitdian, that Of the Art of Ulajs. 351 that came to Befiege Conftantinofk } which he pre- ferved by this Induftry. Many other Fine and Admirable Relations might be given of the Effects of thefe Mirrours, but they are too tedious : We (hall therefore here put an end to this Chapter, and confequently the whole Book, defiring the Reader to receive all in good part, and excufe the teller Faults of Impreffion and Phrafc, lince we can allure him the Dofes are juftly prefcri- bed, and the Preparations exact which we have a£ figned. The End of the Twelfth Book- AN • 553 A N APPENDIX Shewing how to Make GLASS-EYES Very Natural. TjH I S Secret is fine, and never was made publick before : The Eyes may be dontf fo curioufly, that the Niceft Examina^ tion can fcarce difcover them to be Ar- tificial. You mull have a lighted Lamp, and a long hol- low piece of Cryftal, as thick as the middle of a Pipes Shank; the Bore muft be pretty wide, and the Pipe about four Inches in length j let the Mouth- end be like that of a Trumpet, and the other wi- dened and turned outwards like the Breech •, this may be done by heating one end in the Flame of your Lamp, and whilft it is hot, turn it fo with a pair of Nippers. Hold this Pipe in your left hand (having before put a little Gotten into it, about an Inch or lefs from the Mouth, to hinder your Breath from being too A a vi*. ,54 An APPENDIX. violently blown on the Work •,) let it be between your two Fore-fingers and Thumb (as you'd make a Pen \) heat the Wide end in the Flame red hot, and fo wind long Thread White Enamel about the groffnefs of a Bugle } your Threads mult be red hot too, and folid, then they'll eafily joyn the Cryftal Pipe •, make by this Serpentine Winding a Convex of fuch Diameter, as when blown out will anfwer that of the Eye you would imitate. This done, keep the Work in the Flame till red| hot, and fo blow it out into an Orbicular Form, of a juft largenefs \ then heating a-new the top, pinch with your Nippers a fmall Hole, and fo turn it with the end of them round, of the bignefs your Eye muft be within the White ^ in this Hole wind pure Thread-Cryftal as fmall as fine Packthread, till you fill it up, taking away the Superfluity (if any) with your Nippers ♦, heat it in the Flame, blowing gently often \ by this the Cryftal will work Convexly, to give you the full fhape of your Eye. Upon this Cryftal (heating it again) you mufti wind Cryftal Thread fmall almoft as Horfe-hair,and| coloured as the Eye you'd imitate \ cover it once o- ver, and as foon as the Center fills, cut off the Thread with your Nippers, that no Surplus re- main : You muft hold it often in the Flame, ftill gently blowing to keep it in a true order. Afterwards with a piece of Black Enamel, aboud the thicknefs of a Duck-Quill, lay on the Black of j the Eye \ be very careful not to give any of thefeJ Threads or pieces of Enamel, too great a heat, nor, apply too much of this Black, for it will fpread - 7 therefore you muft proportion your Heats and Quantities very exactly, ftill continuing the Work. in the Flame, and gently blowing as often as you'd c it to its Shape : After this, cover the Cry- •o part o; the Eye with fome Cryftal of a folid piece, r ^LB.ur the Cntftat Pipe. „ J . the . Ilcut/i C . where, the Cotten t>iu/t be B . the widened* end of the Pipe BD.the qtaJj cue a makeinq E . the /ortne of t/ic ere ifftewtrvq hen' the /ninll coloured threads, niu/t be Arid otv An APPENDIX. 355 piece, about the thicknefs of a Goofe-. 5 9 Chap. 1 5. To purifie Salt of 'Tartar. 60 Chap. 1 6. General Remarks for all Colour s. p.6 1 Chap. 1 7- To prepare Zaffer. p.62 Chap. 1 8. To prepare Mangancfe. p.64 The Philosophers Magnelia. p.65 Chap. 1 9. Feretto of Spain the Mineral. p.67 Chap.20. //on> to make Feretto o/Spain. p.68 Chap. 2 1* Another extraordinary way t,p make Feretto of Spain. p.69 Chap.22. Another way to male it of Copper only, p.70 Chap. 23. A Second way to make it of Copper only, p.7 1 Chap. 24. To make Crocus Martis.. ibid, Chap. 2 5 . Another way to make it. p.7 3 Chap.26. To make it with Aqua-fortis. p.74 Chap.27. To make it with Aqua Regalis.. ibid. Chap.28. Another way. p.7 5 Chap.29. The best way to make Crocus Martis. p.76 Chap.30. To Calcine frnajl Copper Plates. ibid. Chap.31. Another way. P-78 Chap. 32. To Calcine it to a Red Powder. p«79 Chap.33. To make thrice Calcined Copper. ibid. Chap.34. Another way. p,8o Chap.35. To make Ms uilum. p.8i Chap.36. Another better way. ibid. Ch3p.37. The way to make Crocus Martis. p.83 Chap.38. Another way. « P-84 Ch2p.39. Another eafie way. p.85 Chap.40. The jzr/ Egmanne Colour for Glafs. ibid. Chap.41. Another Bluer Sea-green. p.87 Chap.4.2. Another with Cry ft al. ibid. Chap.43. v* J^f Egmariiie. p.83 Chap.44. Another. p.Sp Chap.45. Another finer than the rest. p. 9 3 A a 3 Chap. The INDEX. Chap.46. To make Emerald Colour in Glafs. Chap.47. Another finer. Chap.48. Another wonderful Green. Chap.49. Another Oriental Emerald. Chap. 50. To give Glafs a Tuvcoifc-Blue. ibid. p.91 p.92 P-93 p.94 BOOK II. Chap. 5 1 J I Wi? Defign and Contents of this Book.^96 X Chap.52. To make Aqua-fortis. p.98 To make flrong Lute. p. 1 o 1 A Furnace for fever al Vfes. p. 1 1 2 Chap. 5 3. To furifie Vitriol for making the Aqua-fortis fironger. p. 1 04 Chap. 5 4. To make Aqua Regalis. P- IO S Chap. 5 5. Another far fironger^ called Water of the two Champions. p. 1 06 Chap. 55. Another more eafie way. p. 108 Another with Sprit of Salt. ibid. The Sovereign Menfiruum of the Philofophers Chap. 5 7. To Calcine Tartar. Chap. 5 8. To make fair Chalcedony. Chap. 5 9. A Second fort. Chap.60. A third and last way. Mercury purified, Silver Calcined. Common Salt purified. §aj- Armoniack purified. p. 1 09 ibid, p.no p.113 p.116 ibid. ibid. p.117 ibid, POOR The INDEX- BOOK III. Chaptfl J I i HtDefign and Contents of this Book.]). I 2 1 Jl Chap.6-> . A Gold Yellow in Glafs.p. 1 22 Chap.63. A Granat Colour. pi 23 Chap.64. An Amethift Colour. p. 124 Chap.65. A Sapphire Colour. P-I2,$ Chap.65. A finer. ibid. Chap.67. A Velvet-Black Colour, p. 126 Chap.68. Another fairer> ibid. Chap.69. Another yet much fairer. P»I27 Chap.70. A Milk-white colour, ibid. Chap.71. Another fairer. p. 128 Chap.72. T^ Co/o«r o/'Lapis Lazuli /» G/<*/}. ibid. Chap.7 3 . A Marble Colour. p. 1 29 Chap.74. A Peach Colour. P-I30 Chap.75. A deep Red. ibid. Chap.76. Rock-Cry fial calcined, P-I3I Chap.77. To make Fearl Colour in Cryfial. P-I32 Chap.7 8. To T/^e Natural Cry fid of 4 Fiper Colour. p.133 Chap.79. To make in Natural Cryfial, the Colours of the Ruby, Topaz, Opal, Heliotrope, &c. P-T34 A a 4 BOOK The I N D E X. BOOK IV. Chap.8oT I ^HeDefign and Contents of this BooL^.i $6 JL The Philofophers Lac Virginis. p.i 37 Chap.81. To calcine Lead. p. 1 38 Chap.82. To make Glafs of Lead. P-I39 Chap.83. To Work this Glafs. p. 1 40 Chap.84. To give it a fine Emerald colonr. p.i 41 Chap.85. To give Chap.86. To give Chap.87. To give Chap.88. To give Chap.89. To give Chap.90. Togivc t a, fairer. p. 142 t a Topaz colour. ibid. tan Egmarine. P-!43 fdGranat. P» T 44 t a Sapphire. ibid. t a Gold colour, p. 1 45 BOOK V. Chap.9 1 F I "^HeDcfign and Contents of this Book.]), 1 47 The Original of Precious St one s, and Metals. p. 1 48 Chap.9 2. To prepare Rock Cry flal, P^S Chap.93. To make fine and pure Salt of Tartar, p.i 52 The Philofophers Salt of Tartar. J).T 5 3 Chap.94. Pajle for Oriental Emerald. ibid. Chap.9 5 . Another deeper. p. 1 5 5 Chap.96. Another fairer, P« T 5^ Chap.97. Another fairer, ibid. Chap. The I N D E X. Chap.98. Another very fair. P« T S7 Chap.99. Pafie for Oriental Topaz. ibid. Chap- 1 00. Another fine Topaz. P« T S^ Chap.101. An Oriental Cryfolite. P- x 59 Cnap.102. A Sky-colour Patte for Beryl, called Aqua- Marina, ibid. Chap.103. A PaFle for Sapphire. p.160 Chap. 1 04. Another Oriental Sapphire. p. 1 6 1 Chap. 1 05. Another deeper. ibid. Chap. 1 06. Pafie for Oriental Granat. p. 1 6z Chap. 107. Another of a deeper colour. p. 1 63 Chap. 1 08. Another fairer. ibid. Chap. 1 09. Obfervations for Pafies arid their colours. p. 1 64. To prepare the Crucibles. p. 1 6 5 Chap.i 10. To make Sulphur Saturate be ufed in Pafie for Gems. p. 1 66 Obfervations on the Sweet nefs of Sal Saturni. p. 169 Chap. in. To make very hard Pafies with Sulphur Sa- turni, and to give them all the colour of Precious Stones. ibid, Chap. 1 1 2. Saturnus Glorificatus, how to make it. P-I7I Chap. 113. To make Pafie for Precious Stones of Satur- nus Glorificatus. p. 1 72 Chap. 114. To make a very fair Carbuncle. p.i 73 The Opinions of fever al Autbors concerning the Car r b uncle. ibid- The Sentiments of our Author. p. I 74 Chap. 115. Another more Noblc^ called CarbuncillllS nocte Illuminans. p. 1 7 5 The Authors Opinion thereof. p. 1 76 A fine way to Calcine Gold. p.i 77 Chap. 1 1 6. To make Oriental Ruby. p. 1 78 Very fine Rubies of Queen Elizabeth of Aultria, and Mary de Medicis. p. 1 79 Chap.i 1 7. To make Balafs Ruby. p.i 80 Chap. The INDEX. Chap.i 1 8. To make Oriental Sapphire. ibid. Chap. 1 1 9. To make Oriental Emerald. "p. 181 Chap.i 20. To make Turcoife. p.i 82 Chap. 1 2 1 . To make Oriental TopaZ. p. 1 8 3 Chap. 1 22. To make Cryfolite. ibid. Chap.i 23. Another way of making all forts of Precious Stones much harder. p. 1 84 Chap. 1 24. To make a fair Emerald. p. 1 8 5 Chap.i 25. To make a Violet Sapphire. p.i85 Chap. 1 2(5. Another Violet Sapphire of a deeper colour. ibid. Chap. 127. Another very fine Blue Sapphire. p. 1 87 Chap.i 28. Another fine Sapphire. ibid. Chap. 1 29. Another admirable Blue. p. 1 88 Chap.i 30. To make Beryl, orEgmarine. ibid. Chap. 1 3 1 . A deeper Egmarine. p. 1 89 Chap.i 32. To make a fair Jacynth. ibid. Chap. 133. Another fairer Jacynth. p. 1 90 Chap.i 34. Another Oriental Jacynth. ibid, Chap. 135. To make a very fine Powder. p. 1 9 1 Chap.i 36". Another Powder. ibk{, Chap.i 37. Jargons of Auvergne, how to make thofe Red, that are of a Gridelin colour. p. 192 Chap. 138. To lixtrall the TinBure of the Jargons, and therewith to make a fine andvery hard Diamond.]).! 93 How to prepare a Sulphurous Tripoly, p. 1 94 Chap. 1 39. To make a Diamond. p. 1 95 Chap. 1 40. To make Diamond of Alanfon. p. 1 96 Chap. 141. To give the Natural Colour and Hardnefs of true Diamonds to Cryftal,and Diamond of Alanfon.ih. Chap. 1 42. Another Way. p. 1 98 Chap. 1 43. Another way to harden them, and make them fparkle as much aifine Natural Diamond. ibid. Chap. 1 44. To turn White Sapphire into a true Dia- mond, p- 1 99 Chap.i 45. Another way. p.2CO Chap. 1 ±6. Another way. p. 20 1 BOOK The INDEX. BOOK VI. Chap. 1 47. r I V/£ Defign and Contents of this Booh 1 p.203 Chap. 1 48.70 prepare the principal Stuff for Enamel.p. 20 $ Chap. 1 49. Milk-white Enamel. p. 206 Chap. 1 50. Turcoife colour Enamel. p.207 Chap. 151. A very fine Bine Enamel. p.209 Chap.152. Another. ibid. Chap. 1 5 3 . A very fine Green Enamel. p.2 1 o Chap.i 54. Another. p.2il Chap. 1 55. Another. ibid. Chap. 1 5 6. A Black Enamel. p. 2 1 2 Chap.i 57. Another. P«2I3 Chap.i 58. Another. ibid. Chap. 1 5 9 . A Purple coloured Enamel. 214 Obfervations by the Author, on the Noblenefs of this Colour. ibid. Chap.i 60. Another Purple Enamel. p.2 1 6 Chad. 161. A Violet colour Enamel. ibid. Chap. 1 62. A Telhw Enamel. p.2 1 7 Chap. 1 63 . To make Cryfial-Graund for Red Enam.1p.2i 8 Chap. 1 64. A fine Preparat. offufible Manganefe.p. 2 1 9 Chap. 155. To make a fixt Sulphur. p. 2 20 Chap.i 66. Another fixt and incombufhible Sulphur.~p.22 1 Chap. 1 57. To Extract Spirit of 'Saturn. ibid. Chap.iS8. A Blood-red Enamel. p.223 Chap.i 69. Another. p. 224 Chap. 1 70. A Sparkling Ruby-red Enamel. p.2 25 Chap.i 71 . A Balafs-Ruby colour Enamel. ibid. Chap. 1 72. A Rofe colour Enamel. p. 2 26 Chap.i 73. Another very fine Rofe colour Enaviel. ibid. Chap. The INDEX. Chap. 174. Another Rofe colour Enamel. P«22J Chap. 175. A Splendid Carbuncle-colour Enamel, p.228 To Calcine Gold. p. 2 29 Chap. 1 76. To Calcine Coffer for making Vitriol of Veuus "without Corrosives. p.230 The Author'* Report of the Excellency and ] r ertues of this Vitriol and its Spirit. p. 2 3 1 Chap.i 77. To make Vitriol of Venus without Corro- fives. p. 23 2 Chap. 178. To Extract this fine Vitriol. P-2-34 Chap. 1 79. To draw off the White Spirit from the Vi- triol. P-23<* To feparate the Cap.Mort./or tinging 0fGlafi.ip.257 To reflore it to a Blue colour , by the Air. p.238 BOOK VII. Chap.i8o. r TPHE Defign and Contents of this Book. JL * p.240 Chap. 1 8 1 . The Furnace for Enameling and T cur tray- itig withal. p. 242. Chap. 1 82. To Enamel on Gold. P-2-43 Chap. 1 83. To Enamel on Silver. P-245 Chap. 1 84. To Enamel on Copper. p.246 Chap. 185. To prepare the Enamel for applying it on the Metals. P- 2 47 Chap. 186. To prepare the Colours for pour t raying on Enamel. p. 248 Chap.187. TheWbite. p-249 Chap.188. The Black'. p.250 Chap. 1 89. The Ye How. ibid. Chap.190. The Blue. p. 3 5 t A very fine Preparation of the Blue, ibid. Chap. 1 91 1 The Red. p.252 Gold Calcind, and how, ibid. A The INDEX. A Vermilion Reel. P-2$3 Cha p- 1 9 2 . To Ponrt ray on 'Enamel. p. 2 5 4. BOOK VIII. Chap. 1 93.' I s He Defign and Com. of this Book, p. 3 57 I Chap. 1 94. The Furnace for baking andfinifinngthe China-Ware in. P- 2 59 Chap. 195. A fine Compofition of Mold for China- iVare. p. 1 60 Pure Earth for China-Ware. p.261 Chap. 196. To Enamel China. p.2^2 Chap. 197. To Paint China. p«2.^3 Chap. 198. To Gild China. ibid. Chap. 199. Another finer Way. p.264 Chap-200. To prepare Linfeed-Oyl for Gilding on China. p.265 BOOK IX. Chap. 201 / I 'He Defign and Cent, of this Book, p.267 J^_ Chap. 202. A Furnace for finifinng the Painted Glafs. p. 2 70 Chap.203. A White for Painting on Glafs. p.272 Chap.204. A Black. P'373 Chap-205. A Tellow. ibid. Chap.206. A Blue. p.174 T prepare the Crucibles. ibid. Chap. 207. A Red. P-!75 Chap-208. A Purple. V A 1 6 Chap, 209. A Green. . P-I77 Chap. The I N D E X. Chap.2 1 0. Of other Colours in general. p.227 Chap.211. To make Rocaille. p.278 Chap.212. To Paint on Glafs. p.280 The Privileges granted to fuch as Work therein ,&C.ib. Chap.213. The Order of Baking the Glafs in the Fur- nace^ after it is fainted, p. 28 3 Chap.214. Another way to faint on Glafs, p.285 Chap.215. To gild on Glafs. p.287 Chap.2 16. Another way. ibid. Chap.2 1 7. To faint all forts of Colours in Globes, p.288 BOOK X. Chap.2 1 8»HpV/£ Dejign and Contents of this Book. Chap.2 1 9. To Extract Yellow Lake from Broom-flowers. p.292 Chap. 2 20. To Extratl the Ejfential Tincture 3lO Chap.2. 3 5 . To Extratl the Ultra-marine. p.3 1 1 Chap.2.36. The Method of clean (ing the Ultra-marine, when ^tis fepar at ed from the Cement. p.3 1 4. Chap.2 37. Toftrainoffthe Ultra-marine already Wajht and Purified. V-5 l % Chap.2 38. To Correal the Colours just before prepared. p.3 1 6 Chap.2 39. Another Way to make Ultra-marine, and draw off the Colours with more Expedition. ibid. Chap. 240. Another Way to make Ultra-marine, p.3 1 8 A Colour inclining to^or near He Ultra-marine , and that the Lapis-Laz. may be Artificially madcp. 320 Ghap.241. To make German Blue. ibid. BOOK XI. i:hap.242. r ~T~W£ Defign and Contents of this Book. jL p.322 The Origine of Pearls, and how they are increafcd , with the like account of the Bezoar-Stone, p.3 24 'hap.243. To imitate fine Oriental Pearl. p-32# A The INDEX. A further Defer ipt ion of Furnaces, &c. i bid - The Philofophick Pearl. p-329 Chap. 244. To make Mercury JVater forgiving Trans- parency and Luftre to the Pearl. ibid. Chap.245. Another Way to make thofe Pearls, p.330 Chap.246. Another Way. p-332 Chap.247. How to Blanch fine Pearl. P-334 Chap.248. Other Ways to Blanch and Cleanfe fine?ear\. P-335 Chap.249.T0 make Counterfeit Pearl like Natural.~p.$$6 BOOK Xli. Chap.25oJ 1 ^HE Dejign and Contents of this Boot. 1 £-338' The Original of Looking-Glafs, with an account when Met at, and Marble Mirrors were in #/f.p.339 Chap. 2 5 1 , To make Looking-glafs. p. 3 40 The Privileges of the Royal Glafs Mantifa&ures.ib'. Of Round Mirrors. P-342. Chap.252. To Grind, Polijl^ and T>iamond'Cut the Glajfes. p.343' Chap.253. To File, or Silver them. P«344 Chap. 2 34. To make Concave, and Convex Burning- Glaffes. i p.34S Chap.255. To make Metal, or Steel Burning Mir- rors,whether Concaves fiphericks,or Paf-abolicks^.^^rj Chap.2 5 6. To Polijl) the Steel Mirrors. P-349 The Invention and Fff ell: s of Burning Mirrors, p.350 An Appendix concerning Glafs-Eyes. P«353 FINIS. m SPECfAU 8z-e> RFTTV riFNTCR | THE A B T OF GLASS BL AN COURT 1699